Relion® 670 series

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 505 338-UUS
Issued: February 2016
Revision: A
Product version: 2.1

© Copyright 2016 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/
developed by: Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product
names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All
persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy
themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any
applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any
risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for
harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall
be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so
responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or
mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely
ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the
manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB
be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the
application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on
the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use
within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is
the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN
60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN
60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the
international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction..........................................................................33
This manual............................................................................................ 33
Intended audience.................................................................................. 33
Product documentation...........................................................................34
Product documentation set................................................................34
Document revision history................................................................. 35
Related documents............................................................................36
Document symbols and conventions...................................................... 36
Symbols.............................................................................................36
Document conventions...................................................................... 37
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping..................................................38

Section 2 Available functions.............................................................. 47

Main protection functions........................................................................47
Back-up protection functions.................................................................. 48
Control and monitoring functions............................................................ 49
Communication.......................................................................................53
Basic IED functions.................................................................................55

Section 3 Analog inputs.......................................................................57

Introduction............................................................................................. 57
Function block.........................................................................................57
Signals.................................................................................................... 58
Settings...................................................................................................60
Monitored data........................................................................................68
Operation principle..................................................................................69
Technical data........................................................................................ 70

Section 4 Binary input and output modules.........................................73

Binary input.............................................................................................73
Binary input debounce filter............................................................... 73
Oscillation filter.................................................................................. 73
Settings..............................................................................................73
Setting parameters for binary input modules................................74
Setting parameters for binary input/output module.......................74

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ...............................75

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1

Technical manual
Table of contents

Local HMI screen behaviour................................................................... 75

Identification...................................................................................... 75
Settings..............................................................................................75
Local HMI signals................................................................................... 75
Identification...................................................................................... 75
Function block................................................................................... 76
Signals...............................................................................................76
Basic part for LED indication module......................................................77
Identification...................................................................................... 77
Function block................................................................................... 77
Signals...............................................................................................77
Settings..............................................................................................78
LCD part for HMI function keys control module...................................... 79
Identification...................................................................................... 79
Function block................................................................................... 79
Signals...............................................................................................79
Settings..............................................................................................79
Operation principle..................................................................................81
Local HMI...........................................................................................81
Keypad......................................................................................... 82
Display..........................................................................................84
LEDs.............................................................................................88
LED configuration alternatives...........................................................88
Functionality ................................................................................ 88
Status LEDs..................................................................................89
Indication LEDs............................................................................ 89
Function keys.....................................................................................99
Functionality ................................................................................ 99
Operation principle....................................................................... 99

Section 6 Differential protection........................................................ 103

Busbar differential protection ............................................................... 103
Identification.................................................................................... 103
Functionality............................................................................... 104
Operation principle.......................................................................... 106
Differential protection.......................................................................106
Differential Zone A or B BZNTPDIF, BZNSPDIF (87)......................106
Open CT detection..................................................................... 108
Differential protection supervision.............................................. 108
Explanation of Zone function block.............................................108

2 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block............................................................................ 114

Signals........................................................................................115
Settings.......................................................................................119
Monitored data............................................................................132
Calculation principles.......................................................................132
General.......................................................................................132
Open CT detection..................................................................... 139
Check zone BCZTPDIF, BCZSPDIF (87B)......................................141
Functionality............................................................................... 141
Explanation of Check zone function block..................................142
Function block............................................................................ 144
Signals........................................................................................144
Settings.......................................................................................145
Zone selection................................................................................. 145
Switch status monitoring BDCGAPC............................................... 146
Functionality............................................................................... 146
Explanation of Switch status monitoring function block..............148
Function block............................................................................ 149
Signals........................................................................................149
Settings.......................................................................................150
Monitored data............................................................................150
Bay BUTPTRC, BUSPTRC (87B)....................................................163
Functionality............................................................................... 163
Explanation of Bay function block...............................................165
Function block............................................................................ 168
Signals........................................................................................169
Settings.......................................................................................185
Monitored data............................................................................201
Bay operation principles............................................................. 211
Zone interconnection (Load transfer) BZITGGIO, BZISGGIO (87B)215
Functionality............................................................................... 215
Explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) function
block .......................................................................................... 216
Description of Zone interconnection operation........................... 216
Function block............................................................................ 217
Signals........................................................................................218
Settings.......................................................................................218
Technical data................................................................................. 219

Section 7 Current protection..............................................................221

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 3

Technical manual
Table of contents

Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC(51/67).................. 221

Identification.................................................................................... 221
Functionality.................................................................................... 221
Function block................................................................................. 222
Signals.............................................................................................222
Settings............................................................................................224
Monitored data.................................................................................230
Operation principle.......................................................................... 231
Technical data................................................................................. 239
Four step single phase overcurrent protection PH4SPTOC (51)..........240
Identification.................................................................................... 240
Functionality.................................................................................... 240
Function block................................................................................. 241
Signals.............................................................................................241
Settings............................................................................................242
Monitored data.................................................................................246
Operation principle.......................................................................... 247
Technical data................................................................................. 248
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC (51N/67N)...................... 249
Identification.................................................................................... 249
Functionality.................................................................................... 249
Function block................................................................................. 250
Signals.............................................................................................250
Settings............................................................................................251
Monitored data.................................................................................259
Operation principle.......................................................................... 259
Operating quantity within the function........................................ 260
Internal polarizing....................................................................... 261
External polarizing for ground-fault function............................... 263
Directional detection for ground fault function............................ 263
Base quantities within the protection.......................................... 263
Internal ground-fault protection structure....................................264
Four residual overcurrent steps..................................................264
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function................................................................... 265
Second harmonic blocking element............................................268
Switch on to fault feature............................................................ 270
Technical data................................................................................. 272

4 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent

protection NS4PTOC (46I2)..................................................................273
Identification.................................................................................... 273
Functionality.................................................................................... 274
Function block................................................................................. 274
Signals.............................................................................................275
Settings............................................................................................276
Monitored data.................................................................................281
Operation principle.......................................................................... 281
Operating quantity within the function........................................ 281
Internal polarizing facility of the function.....................................282
External polarizing for negative sequence function.................... 283
Internal negative sequence protection structure.........................283
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages.............................. 283
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function................................................................... 285
Technical data................................................................................. 287
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR (49)...........288
Identification.................................................................................... 288
Functionality.................................................................................... 288
Function block................................................................................. 288
Signals.............................................................................................289
Settings............................................................................................289
Monitored data.................................................................................290
Operation principle.......................................................................... 291
Technical data................................................................................. 295
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF)...........................................295
Identification.................................................................................... 295
Functionality.................................................................................... 295
Function block................................................................................. 296
Signals.............................................................................................296
Settings............................................................................................297
Monitored data.................................................................................298
Operation principle.......................................................................... 298
Technical data................................................................................. 301
Breaker failure protection, single phase version CCSRBRF (50BF).... 301
Identification.................................................................................... 301
Functionality.................................................................................... 302
Function block................................................................................. 302
Signals.............................................................................................302

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 5

Technical manual
Table of contents

Settings............................................................................................303
Monitored data.................................................................................303
Operation principle.......................................................................... 303
Technical data................................................................................. 306
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)..............................307
Identification.................................................................................... 307
Functionality.................................................................................... 307
Function block................................................................................. 308
Signals.............................................................................................309
Settings............................................................................................309
Monitored data.................................................................................311
Operation principle.......................................................................... 311
Low pass filtering........................................................................314
Calibration of analog inputs........................................................ 314
Technical data................................................................................. 316
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)................................316
Identification.................................................................................... 316
Functionality.................................................................................... 316
Function block................................................................................. 317
Signals.............................................................................................318
Settings............................................................................................318
Monitored data.................................................................................320
Operation principle.......................................................................... 320
Low pass filtering........................................................................323
Calibration of analog inputs........................................................ 323
Technical data................................................................................. 325
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC.................................................. 325
Identification.................................................................................... 325
Functionality.................................................................................... 325
Function block................................................................................. 326
Signals.............................................................................................326
Settings............................................................................................328
Monitored data.................................................................................329
Operation principle.......................................................................... 329
Measured quantities................................................................... 330
Reconnection inhibit feature....................................................... 333
Overcurrent feature.................................................................... 333
Undercurrent feature.................................................................. 334
Capacitor harmonic overload feature......................................... 335
Capacitor reactive power overload feature.................................337

6 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Technical data................................................................................. 337

Section 8 Voltage protection............................................................. 339

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................339
Identification.................................................................................... 339
Functionality.................................................................................... 339
Function block................................................................................. 340
Signals.............................................................................................340
Settings............................................................................................341
Monitored data.................................................................................343
Operation principle.......................................................................... 344
Measurement principle............................................................... 344
Time delay.................................................................................. 345
Blocking...................................................................................... 350
Design........................................................................................ 351
Technical data................................................................................. 353
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)................................. 353
Identification.................................................................................... 353
Functionality OV2PTOV.................................................................. 354
Function block................................................................................. 354
Signals.............................................................................................354
Settings............................................................................................355
Monitored data.................................................................................357
Operation principle.......................................................................... 357
Measurement principle............................................................... 358
Time delay.................................................................................. 359
Blocking...................................................................................... 364
Design........................................................................................ 364
Technical data................................................................................. 366
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............366
Identification.................................................................................... 366
Functionality.................................................................................... 367
Function block................................................................................. 367
Signals.............................................................................................367
Settings............................................................................................368
Monitored data.................................................................................370
Operation principle.......................................................................... 370
Measurement principle............................................................... 370
Time delay.................................................................................. 370
Blocking...................................................................................... 376

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 7

Technical manual
Table of contents

Design........................................................................................ 376
Technical data................................................................................. 377
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)..................................... 378
Identification.................................................................................... 378
Functionality.................................................................................... 378
Function block................................................................................. 378
Signals.............................................................................................379
Settings............................................................................................379
Monitored data.................................................................................380
Operation principle.......................................................................... 380
Technical data................................................................................. 382
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27).................................................. 382
Identification.................................................................................... 382
Functionality.................................................................................... 382
Function block................................................................................. 383
Signals.............................................................................................383
Settings............................................................................................383
Operation principle.......................................................................... 384
Technical data................................................................................. 386

Section 9 Frequency protection.........................................................387

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................387
Identification.................................................................................... 387
Functionality.................................................................................... 387
Function block................................................................................. 387
Signals.............................................................................................388
Settings............................................................................................388
Monitored data.................................................................................389
Operation principle.......................................................................... 389
Measurement principle............................................................... 389
Time delay.................................................................................. 390
Voltage dependent time delay.................................................... 390
Blocking...................................................................................... 392
Design........................................................................................ 392
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................393
Identification.................................................................................... 393
Functionality.................................................................................... 394
Function block................................................................................. 394
Signals.............................................................................................394
Settings............................................................................................395

8 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data.................................................................................395
Operation principle.......................................................................... 395
Measurement principle............................................................... 396
Time delay.................................................................................. 396
Blocking...................................................................................... 396
Design........................................................................................ 397
Technical data................................................................................. 397
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)............................ 398
Identification.................................................................................... 398
Functionality.................................................................................... 398
Function block................................................................................. 399
Signals.............................................................................................399
Settings............................................................................................399
Monitored data.................................................................................400
Operation principle.......................................................................... 400
Measurement principle............................................................... 400
Time delay.................................................................................. 400
Blocking...................................................................................... 401
Design........................................................................................ 401
Technical data................................................................................. 402

Section 10 Multipurpose protection..................................................... 403

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................ 403
Identification.................................................................................... 403
Function block................................................................................. 403
Signals.............................................................................................404
Settings............................................................................................406
Monitored data.................................................................................413
Operation principle.......................................................................... 414
Measured quantities within CVGAPC.........................................414
Base quantities for CVGAPC function........................................ 416
Built-in overcurrent protection steps........................................... 417
Built-in undercurrent protection steps.........................................422
Built-in overvoltage protection steps...........................................423
Built-in undervoltage protection steps........................................ 423
Logic diagram............................................................................. 423
Technical data................................................................................. 429

Section 11 Secondary system supervision..........................................433

Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC...................................................... 433
Identification.................................................................................... 433

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 9

Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality.................................................................................... 433
Function block................................................................................. 434
Signals.............................................................................................434
Settings............................................................................................435
Monitored data.................................................................................436
Operation principle.......................................................................... 436
Zero and negative sequence detection...................................... 436
Delta current and delta voltage detection................................... 438
Dead line detection.....................................................................441
Main logic................................................................................... 442
Technical data................................................................................. 445
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60).................................................445
Identification.................................................................................... 445
Functionality.................................................................................... 445
Function block................................................................................. 446
Signals.............................................................................................446
Settings............................................................................................447
Monitored data.................................................................................448
Operation principle.......................................................................... 448
Technical data................................................................................. 449

Section 12 Control...............................................................................451
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25)..................................................................................... 451
Identification.................................................................................... 451
Functionality.................................................................................... 451
Function block................................................................................. 452
Signals.............................................................................................452
Settings............................................................................................455
Monitored data.................................................................................457
Operation principle.......................................................................... 458
Basic functionality.......................................................................458
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 458
Technical data................................................................................. 470
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation
SMBRREC (79).................................................................................... 471
Identification.................................................................................... 471
Functionality.................................................................................... 471
Function block................................................................................. 472
Signals.............................................................................................472

10 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Settings............................................................................................474
Operation principle.......................................................................... 476
Logic Diagrams...........................................................................476
Auto-reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled........................ 476
Auto-reclosing mode selection................................................... 476
Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a
reclosing cycle............................................................................ 476
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1......................478
Long trip signal........................................................................... 479
Time sequence diagrams........................................................... 485
Technical data................................................................................. 489
Interlocking (3)...................................................................................... 490
Functionality.................................................................................... 490
Operation principle.......................................................................... 490
Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)...........................................493
Identification............................................................................... 493
Functionality............................................................................... 494
Function block............................................................................ 494
Signals........................................................................................494
Logic diagram............................................................................. 494
Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)....................... 495
Identification............................................................................... 495
Functionality............................................................................... 495
Function block............................................................................ 496
Logic diagram............................................................................. 496
Signals........................................................................................496
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)...........................497
Identification............................................................................... 497
Functionality............................................................................... 497
Function block............................................................................ 498
Logic diagram............................................................................. 499
Signals........................................................................................500
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3).................. 502
Identification............................................................................... 502
Functionality............................................................................... 502
Function block............................................................................ 503
Logic diagram............................................................................. 503
Signals........................................................................................504
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3).................................. 505
Identification............................................................................... 505

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 11

Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality............................................................................... 505
Function block............................................................................ 506
Logic diagram............................................................................. 507
Signals........................................................................................509
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)........................ 512
Identification............................................................................... 512
Functionality............................................................................... 512
Function blocks...........................................................................514
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 516
Signals........................................................................................521
Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)............................................. 525
Identification............................................................................... 526
Functionality............................................................................... 526
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 527
Function block............................................................................ 531
Signals........................................................................................532
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)............................................ 535
Identification............................................................................... 536
Functionality............................................................................... 536
Function block............................................................................ 537
Logic diagram............................................................................. 538
Signals........................................................................................543
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)..............................546
Identification............................................................................... 546
Functionality............................................................................... 546
Function block............................................................................ 547
Logic diagram............................................................................. 548
Signals........................................................................................550
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.......................................................552
Identification............................................................................... 552
Functionality............................................................................... 552
Function block............................................................................ 552
Logic diagram............................................................................. 552
Signals........................................................................................553
Apparatus control APC......................................................................... 553
Functionality.................................................................................... 553
Operation principle.......................................................................... 554
Error handling.................................................................................. 555
Bay control QCBAY......................................................................... 558
Functionality............................................................................... 558

12 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block............................................................................ 558

Signals........................................................................................558
Settings.......................................................................................559
Operation principle..................................................................... 559
Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL............................ 561
Function block............................................................................ 561
Signals........................................................................................562
Settings.......................................................................................563
Operation principle..................................................................... 563
Switch controller SCSWI..................................................................565
Functionality .............................................................................. 565
Function block............................................................................ 565
Signals........................................................................................565
Settings.......................................................................................567
Operation principle..................................................................... 567
Circuit breaker SXCBR....................................................................574
Functionality .............................................................................. 574
Function block............................................................................ 575
Signals........................................................................................575
Settings.......................................................................................576
Operation principle..................................................................... 576
Circuit switch SXSWI....................................................................... 581
Functionality .............................................................................. 581
Function block............................................................................ 582
Signals........................................................................................582
Settings.......................................................................................583
Operation principle..................................................................... 583
Bay reserve QCRSV........................................................................588
Functionality............................................................................... 588
Function block............................................................................ 588
Signals........................................................................................589
Settings.......................................................................................590
Operation principle..................................................................... 590
Reservation input RESIN.................................................................592
Functionality............................................................................... 592
Function block............................................................................ 593
Signals........................................................................................593
Settings.......................................................................................594
Operation principle..................................................................... 594

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 13

Technical manual
Table of contents

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation

SLGAPC............................................................................................... 596
Identification.................................................................................... 596
Functionality.................................................................................... 596
Function block................................................................................. 597
Signals.............................................................................................597
Settings............................................................................................599
Monitored data.................................................................................599
Operation principle.......................................................................... 599
Graphical display........................................................................ 600
Selector mini switch VSGAPC.............................................................. 601
Identification.................................................................................... 601
Functionality.................................................................................... 602
Function block................................................................................. 602
Signals.............................................................................................602
Settings............................................................................................603
Operation principle.......................................................................... 603
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC604
Identification.................................................................................... 604
Functionality.................................................................................... 604
Function block................................................................................. 604
Signals.............................................................................................605
Settings............................................................................................605
Operation principle.......................................................................... 605
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC...............................605
Identification.................................................................................... 605
Functionality.................................................................................... 605
Function block................................................................................. 606
Signals.............................................................................................606
Settings............................................................................................607
Operation principle.......................................................................... 607
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS................ 608
Identification.................................................................................... 608
Functionality.................................................................................... 608
Function block................................................................................. 609
Signals.............................................................................................609
Settings............................................................................................610
Operation principle.......................................................................... 626
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD.......................................... 626
Identification.................................................................................... 626

14 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Functionality.................................................................................... 626
Function block................................................................................. 627
Signals.............................................................................................627
Settings............................................................................................628
Operation principle.......................................................................... 628

Section 13 Logic..................................................................................629
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC..................................................................629
Identification.................................................................................... 629
Functionality.................................................................................... 629
Function block................................................................................. 630
Signals.............................................................................................630
Settings............................................................................................632
Operation principle.......................................................................... 632
Technical data................................................................................. 633
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH..........................................................634
Identification.................................................................................... 634
Functionality.................................................................................... 634
Function block................................................................................. 634
Signals.............................................................................................634
Settings............................................................................................635
Operation principle.......................................................................... 635
Technical data................................................................................. 636
Logic for group warning WRNCALH..................................................... 636
Identification.................................................................................... 636
Functionality.................................................................................... 636
Function block................................................................................. 637
Signals.............................................................................................637
Settings............................................................................................638
Operation principle.......................................................................... 638
Technical data................................................................................. 638
Logic for group indication INDCALH.....................................................639
Identification.................................................................................... 639
Functionality.................................................................................... 639
Function block................................................................................. 639
Signals.............................................................................................639
Settings............................................................................................640
Operation principle.......................................................................... 640
Technical data................................................................................. 641
Basic configurable logic blocks.............................................................641

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 15

Technical manual
Table of contents

AND function block AND................................................................. 642

Function block............................................................................ 642
Signals........................................................................................643
Technical data............................................................................ 643
Controllable gate function block GATE............................................643
Function block............................................................................ 643
Signals........................................................................................643
Settings.......................................................................................644
Technical data............................................................................ 644
Inverter function block INV.............................................................. 644
Function block............................................................................ 644
Signals........................................................................................644
Technical data............................................................................ 645
Loop delay function block LLD........................................................ 645
Function block............................................................................ 645
Signals........................................................................................645
Technical data............................................................................ 645
OR function block OR......................................................................646
Function block............................................................................ 646
Signals........................................................................................646
Technical data............................................................................ 646
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER........................................647
Function block............................................................................ 647
Signals........................................................................................647
Settings.......................................................................................647
Technical data............................................................................ 647
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.......................648
Function block............................................................................ 648
Signals........................................................................................648
Settings.......................................................................................649
Technical data............................................................................ 649
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY....................... 649
Function block............................................................................ 649
Signals........................................................................................650
Settings.......................................................................................650
Technical data............................................................................ 650
Settable timer function block TIMERSET........................................ 650
Function block............................................................................ 651
Signals........................................................................................651
Settings.......................................................................................652

16 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Technical data............................................................................ 652

Exclusive OR function block XOR................................................... 652
Function block............................................................................ 652
Signals........................................................................................653
Technical data............................................................................ 653
Extension logic package....................................................................... 653
Fixed signals FXDSIGN........................................................................654
Identification.................................................................................... 654
Functionality.................................................................................... 654
Function block................................................................................. 654
Signals.............................................................................................654
Settings............................................................................................655
Operation principle.......................................................................... 655
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.................................................655
Identification.................................................................................... 655
Function block................................................................................. 656
Signals.............................................................................................656
Monitored data.................................................................................657
Settings............................................................................................657
Operation principle.......................................................................... 657
Technical data................................................................................. 658
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
BTIGAPC.............................................................................................. 658
Identification.................................................................................... 658
Functionality.................................................................................... 659
Function block................................................................................. 659
Signals.............................................................................................659
Settings............................................................................................660
Monitored data.................................................................................660
Operation principle.......................................................................... 660
Technical data................................................................................. 661
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16................................................. 662
Identification.................................................................................... 662
Functionality.................................................................................... 662
Function block................................................................................. 662
Signals.............................................................................................662
Setting parameters.......................................................................... 663
Operation principle.......................................................................... 663
Technical data................................................................................. 665

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 17

Technical manual
Table of contents

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IT

BGAPC................................................................................................. 665
Identification.................................................................................... 665
Functionality.................................................................................... 665
Function block................................................................................. 666
Signals.............................................................................................666
Settings............................................................................................667
Operation principle.......................................................................... 667
Technical data................................................................................. 668
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC...........................................................................669
Identification.................................................................................... 669
Functionality.................................................................................... 669
Function block................................................................................. 670
Signals.............................................................................................670
Settings............................................................................................670
Operation principle.......................................................................... 671
Operation accuracy.................................................................... 672
Memory storage..........................................................................672
Technical data................................................................................. 673
Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP............................................. 673
Identification.................................................................................... 673
Functionality.................................................................................... 673
Function block................................................................................. 673
Signals.............................................................................................674
Settings............................................................................................674
Operation principle.......................................................................... 674
Technical data................................................................................. 675
Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP.............................................675
Identification.................................................................................... 675
Functionality.................................................................................... 676
Function block................................................................................. 676
Signals.............................................................................................676
Settings............................................................................................676
Operation principle.......................................................................... 677
Technical data................................................................................. 679

Section 14 Monitoring..........................................................................681
Measurements...................................................................................... 681
Identification.................................................................................... 681

18 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Functionality.................................................................................... 682
Function block................................................................................. 683
Signals.............................................................................................685
Settings............................................................................................688
Monitored data.................................................................................701
Operation principle.......................................................................... 703
Measurement supervision.......................................................... 703
Measurements CVMMXN...........................................................708
Phase current measurement CMMXU........................................713
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU.................................................................... 714
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI 714
Technical data................................................................................. 714
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63).................................................. 716
Functionality.................................................................................... 716
Function block................................................................................. 717
Signals.............................................................................................717
Settings............................................................................................718
Operation principle.......................................................................... 718
Technical data................................................................................. 719
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71)................................................ 720
Functionality.................................................................................... 720
Function block................................................................................. 720
Signals.............................................................................................720
Settings............................................................................................721
Operation principle.......................................................................... 721
Technical data................................................................................. 722
Breaker monitoring SSCBR.................................................................. 723
Identification.................................................................................... 723
Functionality.................................................................................... 723
Function block................................................................................. 723
Signals.............................................................................................724
Settings............................................................................................725
Monitored data.................................................................................726
Operation principle.......................................................................... 726
Circuit breaker contact travel time.............................................. 728
Circuit breaker status..................................................................730
Remaining life of circuit breaker................................................. 730
Accumulated energy...................................................................731
Circuit breaker operation cycles................................................. 733

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 19

Technical manual
Table of contents

Circuit breaker operation monitoring.......................................... 734

Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring....................................735
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication...................................... 735
Technical data................................................................................. 736
Event function EVENT.......................................................................... 737
Identification.................................................................................... 737
Functionality.................................................................................... 737
Function block................................................................................. 737
Signals.............................................................................................738
Settings............................................................................................739
Operation principle.......................................................................... 741
Disturbance report DRPRDRE............................................................. 742
Identification.................................................................................... 742
Functionality.................................................................................... 743
Function block................................................................................. 743
Signals.............................................................................................745
Settings............................................................................................747
Monitored data.................................................................................757
Operation principle.......................................................................... 761
Technical data................................................................................. 769
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP........................................... 769
Identification.................................................................................... 769
Functionality.................................................................................... 769
Function block................................................................................. 770
Signals.............................................................................................770
Settings............................................................................................771
Operation principle.......................................................................... 771
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP...................................... 772
Identification.................................................................................... 772
Functionality.................................................................................... 772
Function block................................................................................. 773
Signals.............................................................................................773
Operation principle.......................................................................... 773
Limit counter L4UFCNT........................................................................ 774
Identification.................................................................................... 774
Identification............................................................................... 774
Functionality.................................................................................... 774
Operation principle.......................................................................... 774
Design........................................................................................ 774
Reporting.................................................................................... 776

20 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block................................................................................. 776

Signals.............................................................................................776
Settings............................................................................................777
Monitored data.................................................................................777
Technical data................................................................................. 778
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC .......................................................... 778
Identification.................................................................................... 778
Functionality.................................................................................... 778
Function block................................................................................. 779
Signals.............................................................................................779
Settings............................................................................................780
Operation principle.......................................................................... 780
Operation accuracy.................................................................... 781
Memory storage..........................................................................782
Technical data................................................................................. 782

Section 15 Metering............................................................................ 783

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT................................................................783
Identification.................................................................................... 783
Functionality.................................................................................... 783
Function block................................................................................. 783
Signals.............................................................................................784
Settings............................................................................................784
Monitored data.................................................................................785
Operation principle.......................................................................... 785
Technical data................................................................................. 787
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR...... 787
Identification.................................................................................... 787
Functionality.................................................................................... 787
Function block................................................................................. 788
Signals.............................................................................................789
Settings............................................................................................790
Monitored data.................................................................................791
Operation principle.......................................................................... 791
Technical data................................................................................. 795
Technical data............................................................................ 795

Section 16 Station communication...................................................... 797

Communication protocols..................................................................... 797
Communication protocol diagnostics.................................................... 797
DNP3 protocol...................................................................................... 798

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 21

Technical manual
Table of contents

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol............................................... 798

Functionality.................................................................................... 798
Communication interfaces and protocols........................................ 799
Settings............................................................................................799
Technical data................................................................................. 800
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC.....................................................................800
Functionality............................................................................... 800
Function block............................................................................ 800
Signals........................................................................................801
Settings.......................................................................................802
Monitored data............................................................................802
Operation principle..................................................................... 803
Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC.... 803
Functionality............................................................................... 803
Function block............................................................................ 803
Signals........................................................................................804
Settings.......................................................................................804
Monitored data............................................................................805
Operation principle..................................................................... 805
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication.................... 805
Functionality............................................................................... 805
Function block............................................................................ 805
Signals........................................................................................806
Settings.......................................................................................806
Monitored data............................................................................806
Principle of operation..................................................................807
LON communication protocol............................................................... 809
Functionality.................................................................................... 809
Settings............................................................................................809
Operation principle.......................................................................... 810
Technical data................................................................................. 829
SPA communication protocol................................................................829
Functionality.................................................................................... 829
Design..............................................................................................829
Settings............................................................................................830
Operation principle.......................................................................... 830
Communication ports..................................................................838
Technical data................................................................................. 839
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol........................................... 839

22 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Introduction......................................................................................839
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS................................. 839
Functionality............................................................................... 839
Identification............................................................................... 840
Function block............................................................................ 840
Signals........................................................................................840
Settings.......................................................................................841
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR................................................................................841
Functionality............................................................................... 841
Identification............................................................................... 841
Function block............................................................................ 842
Signals........................................................................................842
Settings.......................................................................................842
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR............843
Functionality............................................................................... 843
Identification............................................................................... 843
Function block............................................................................ 843
Signals........................................................................................844
Settings.......................................................................................844
Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.............. 844
Functionality............................................................................... 844
Identification............................................................................... 844
Function block............................................................................ 844
Signals........................................................................................845
Settings.......................................................................................845
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT................................................................................. 845
Functionality............................................................................... 845
Identification............................................................................... 845
Function block............................................................................ 846
Signals........................................................................................846
Settings.......................................................................................847
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED........................................ 847
Functionality............................................................................... 847
Identification............................................................................... 848
Function block............................................................................ 848
Signals........................................................................................848
Settings.......................................................................................848
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV....................849

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 23

Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality............................................................................... 849
Identification............................................................................... 849
Function block............................................................................ 849
Signals........................................................................................849
Settings.......................................................................................850
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF 850
Functionality............................................................................... 850
Identification............................................................................... 850
Function block............................................................................ 850
Signals........................................................................................851
Settings.......................................................................................851
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD...................... 853
Functionality............................................................................... 853
Identification............................................................................... 853
Function block............................................................................ 853
Signals........................................................................................853
Settings.......................................................................................853
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD........................ 854
Functionality............................................................................... 854
Identification............................................................................... 854
Function block............................................................................ 854
Signals........................................................................................854
Settings.......................................................................................855
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD..................................................................................855
Functionality............................................................................... 855
Identification............................................................................... 855
Function block............................................................................ 855
Signals........................................................................................855
Settings.......................................................................................856
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD.. 856
Functionality............................................................................... 856
Identification............................................................................... 857
Function block............................................................................ 857
Signals........................................................................................857
Settings.......................................................................................858
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD..................................................................................858
Functionality............................................................................... 858
Identification............................................................................... 858

24 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block............................................................................ 859

Signals........................................................................................859
Settings.......................................................................................859
Operation principle ......................................................................... 859
General.......................................................................................859
Communication ports..................................................................871
Technical data................................................................................. 871
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV...............................................................................871
Functionality.................................................................................... 871
Function block................................................................................. 872
Signals.............................................................................................873
Settings............................................................................................874
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV................................................ 875
Function block................................................................................. 875
Signals.............................................................................................875
Settings............................................................................................877
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV.................................................................................... 877
Identification.................................................................................... 877
Functionality.................................................................................... 877
Function block................................................................................. 877
Signals.............................................................................................877
Settings............................................................................................878
Operation principle ......................................................................... 878
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV...879
Identification.................................................................................... 879
Functionality.................................................................................... 879
Function block................................................................................. 879
Signals.............................................................................................879
Settings............................................................................................880
Operation principle ......................................................................... 880
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV880
Identification.................................................................................... 880
Functionality.................................................................................... 881
Function block................................................................................. 881
Signals.............................................................................................881
Settings............................................................................................881
Operation principle ......................................................................... 881
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV882

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 25

Technical manual
Table of contents

Identification.................................................................................... 882
Functionality.................................................................................... 882
Function block................................................................................. 882
Signals.............................................................................................883
Settings............................................................................................883
Operation principle ......................................................................... 883
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND.................................................884
Functionality.................................................................................... 884
Design..............................................................................................884
General.......................................................................................884
Function block................................................................................. 885
Signals.............................................................................................885
Settings............................................................................................887
Operation principle.......................................................................... 887
Security events on protocols SECALARM............................................888
Security alarm SECALARM............................................................. 888
Signals........................................................................................888
Settings.......................................................................................888
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG............................................... 888
Activity logging ACTIVLOG............................................................. 888
Settings............................................................................................889

Section 17 Remote communication.....................................................891

Binary signal transfer............................................................................ 891
Identification.................................................................................... 891
Functionality.................................................................................... 891
Function block................................................................................. 892
Signals.............................................................................................893
Settings............................................................................................894
Monitored data.................................................................................897
Operation principle.......................................................................... 898
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit.................... 899
Function block................................................................................. 899
Signals.............................................................................................899

Section 18 Basic IED functions........................................................... 901

Authority check ATHCHCK...................................................................901
Identification.................................................................................... 901
Functionality.................................................................................... 901
Operation principle ......................................................................... 902
Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED..904

26 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Authority management AUTHMAN.......................................................907

Identification.................................................................................... 907
AUTHMAN.......................................................................................907
Settings............................................................................................907
FTP access with password FTPACCS................................................. 908
Identification.................................................................................... 908
FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS.................................................... 908
Settings............................................................................................908
Authority status ATHSTAT....................................................................909
Identification.................................................................................... 909
Functionality.................................................................................... 909
Function block................................................................................. 909
Signals.............................................................................................909
Settings............................................................................................909
Operation principle ......................................................................... 910
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG............................ 910
Functionality.................................................................................... 910
Function block................................................................................. 910
Signals.............................................................................................911
Settings............................................................................................911
Operation principle.......................................................................... 911
Internal signals........................................................................... 913
Supervision of analog inputs...................................................... 915
Technical data................................................................................. 915
Time synchronization............................................................................916
Functionality.................................................................................... 916
Settings............................................................................................916
Operation principle ......................................................................... 921
General concepts....................................................................... 921
Real-time clock (RTC) operation................................................ 923
Synchronization alternatives.......................................................924
Technical data................................................................................. 928
Parameter setting groups..................................................................... 928
Functionality.................................................................................... 928
Function block................................................................................. 928
Signals.............................................................................................929
Settings............................................................................................929
Operation principle.......................................................................... 929
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK......................................................... 931
Functionality.................................................................................... 931

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 27

Technical manual
Table of contents

Function block................................................................................. 932

Signals.............................................................................................932
Operation principle ......................................................................... 932
Test mode functionality TEST...............................................................933
Functionality.................................................................................... 933
Function block................................................................................. 933
Signals.............................................................................................934
Settings............................................................................................934
Operation principle ......................................................................... 934
IED identifiers....................................................................................... 935
Functionality.................................................................................... 935
Settings ...........................................................................................936
Product information...............................................................................936
Functionality.................................................................................... 936
Settings ...........................................................................................937
Factory defined settings.................................................................. 937
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI.....................................................938
Functionality.................................................................................... 938
Function block................................................................................. 938
Signals.............................................................................................938
Operation principle.......................................................................... 939
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ................................................939
Functionality.................................................................................... 939
Function block................................................................................. 940
Signals.............................................................................................940
Operation principle.......................................................................... 940
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI........................................................ 940
Functionality.................................................................................... 941
Function block................................................................................. 941
Signals.............................................................................................941
Operation principle.......................................................................... 942
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI....................................................942
Functionality.................................................................................... 942
Function block................................................................................. 942
Signals.............................................................................................943
Settings............................................................................................944
Operation principle ......................................................................... 946
Frequency values....................................................................... 947
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM.................................................... 948
Functionality.................................................................................... 948

28 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block................................................................................. 948

Signals.............................................................................................948
Settings............................................................................................949
Operation principle ......................................................................... 950
Global base values GBASVAL............................................................. 950
Identification.................................................................................... 950
Functionality.................................................................................... 950
Settings............................................................................................950
Primary system values PRIMVAL.........................................................951
Identification.................................................................................... 951
Functionality.................................................................................... 951
Settings............................................................................................951
Denial of service DOS.......................................................................... 951
Functionality ................................................................................... 951
Function blocks................................................................................952
Signals.............................................................................................952
Settings............................................................................................953
Monitored data.................................................................................953
Operation principle.......................................................................... 954

Section 19 IED hardware.................................................................... 955

Overview...............................................................................................955
Variants of case size with local HMI display.................................... 955
Case from the rear side................................................................... 956
Hardware modules................................................................................959
Overview..........................................................................................959
Numeric processing module (NUM).................................................960
Introduction.................................................................................960
Functionality............................................................................... 960
Block diagram.............................................................................961
Power supply module (PSM)........................................................... 961
Introduction.................................................................................961
Design........................................................................................ 962
Technical data............................................................................ 962
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)................................... 962
Transformer input module (TRM).................................................... 962
Introduction.................................................................................962
Design........................................................................................ 963
Technical data............................................................................ 964

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 29

Technical manual
Table of contents

Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

(ADM) ............................................................................................. 965
Introduction.................................................................................965
Design........................................................................................ 965
Binary input module (BIM)............................................................... 967
Introduction.................................................................................967
Design........................................................................................ 967
Signals........................................................................................970
Settings.......................................................................................971
Monitored data............................................................................971
Technical data............................................................................ 972
Binary output modules (BOM)......................................................... 973
Introduction.................................................................................973
Design........................................................................................ 973
Signals........................................................................................974
Settings.......................................................................................975
Monitored data............................................................................975
Technical data............................................................................ 979
Static binary output module (SOM)................................................. 980
Introduction.................................................................................980
Design........................................................................................ 980
Signals........................................................................................981
Settings.......................................................................................982
Monitored data............................................................................982
Technical data............................................................................ 984
Binary input/output module (IOM)....................................................985
Introduction.................................................................................985
Design........................................................................................ 986
Signals........................................................................................988
Settings.......................................................................................989
Monitored data............................................................................989
Technical data............................................................................ 991
mA input module (MIM)................................................................... 994
Introduction.................................................................................994
Design........................................................................................ 994
Signals........................................................................................996
Settings.......................................................................................996
Monitored data............................................................................998
Technical data............................................................................ 998
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) .............................. 998

30 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Introduction.................................................................................998
Design........................................................................................ 999
Technical data.......................................................................... 1000
Galvanic RS485 communication module.......................................1000
Introduction...............................................................................1000
Design...................................................................................... 1000
Technical data.......................................................................... 1002
Optical ethernet module (OEM).....................................................1002
Introduction...............................................................................1002
Functionality............................................................................. 1002
Design...................................................................................... 1002
Technical data.......................................................................... 1003
Line data communication module (LDCM).................................... 1003
Introduction...............................................................................1003
Design...................................................................................... 1004
Technical data.......................................................................... 1005
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM).................. 1006
Introduction...............................................................................1006
Design...................................................................................... 1006
Functionality............................................................................. 1009
Technical data.......................................................................... 1009
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)..................................... 1010
Introduction...............................................................................1010
Design...................................................................................... 1010
Monitored data..........................................................................1010
Technical data.......................................................................... 1010
GPS antenna................................................................................. 1011
Introduction...............................................................................1011
Design...................................................................................... 1011
Technical data.......................................................................... 1012
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B................................. 1012
Introduction...............................................................................1012
Design...................................................................................... 1012
Settings.....................................................................................1013
Technical data.......................................................................... 1013
Dimensions......................................................................................... 1015
Case without rear cover.................................................................1015
Case with rear cover......................................................................1017
Flush mounting dimensions...........................................................1019
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions....................................... 1020

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 31

Technical manual
Table of contents

Wall mounting dimensions.............................................................1022

External current transformer unit................................................... 1023
Mounting alternatives..........................................................................1023
Flush mounting.............................................................................. 1023
Overview...................................................................................1023
Mounting procedure for flush mounting.................................... 1024
19” panel rack mounting................................................................ 1025
Overview...................................................................................1025
Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting.....................1026
Wall mounting................................................................................1027
Overview...................................................................................1027
Mounting procedure for wall mounting..................................... 1028
How to reach the rear side of the IED...................................... 1028
Side-by-side 19” rack mounting.....................................................1029
Overview...................................................................................1029
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting................ 1030
IED mounted with a RHGS6 case............................................ 1030
Side-by-side flush mounting.......................................................... 1031
Overview...................................................................................1031
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting................1032
Technical data.................................................................................... 1032
Enclosure.......................................................................................1032
Electrical safety............................................................................. 1033
Connection system........................................................................ 1033
Influencing factors......................................................................... 1034
Type tests according to standard.................................................. 1035

Section 20 Labels..............................................................................1037
Labels on IED..................................................................................... 1037

Section 21 Connection diagrams...................................................... 1041

Section 22 Inverse time characteristics.............................................1043

Application.......................................................................................... 1043
Principle of operation.......................................................................... 1046
Mode of operation..........................................................................1046
Inverse characteristics........................................................................ 1052

Section 23 Glossary.......................................................................... 1083

Glossary..............................................................................................1083

32 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks,
logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal
service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection
equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The
installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling
electronic equipment.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 33

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V4 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on
how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also
recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI
functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, DNP3,
LON and SPA.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized
in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

34 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance
during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying
settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a
substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the chronological order
in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also
during the service and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks,
logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported

by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the
IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication
protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security
when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access
control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted
by function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering
phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
December 2015 First release
A/February 2016 Minor updates

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 35

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documents

Documents related to REB670 Document numbers
Application manual 1MRK 505 337-UUS
Commissioning manual
Product guide 1MRK 505 340-BEN

Technical manual 1MRK 505 338-UUS

Type test certificate 1MRK 505 340-TUS

670 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 123-UUS
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 355-UUS
Installation manual 1MRK 514 024-UUS
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 348-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1MRK 511 350-UEN
2
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 354-UUS
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BUS
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning

about the temperature of product surfaces.

36 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do
not view directly with optical instruments.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard
which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or
property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project
or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the
user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 37

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Introduction

• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve
a valid application configuration.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered
by dashed lines.
• Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting
parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
• If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int
is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another
diagram have the suffix ”-cont.”
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in mm.

1.5 IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Table 1: IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM ALTIM
ALTMS ALTMS
ALTRK ALTRK
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
Table continues on next page

38 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 39

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
Table continues on next page

40 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOOSEBINRCV BINGREC
GOOSEDPRCV DPGREC
GOOSEINTLKRCV INTGREC
GOOSEINTRCV INTSGREC
GOOSEMVRCV MVGREC
GOOSESPRCV BINSGREC
GOOSEVCTRRCV VCTRGREC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 41

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
Table continues on next page

42 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 43

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH SCHLCCH
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
Table continues on next page

44 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 45

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

46 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Main protection functions

Table 2: Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670 (Customized)

Differential protection
BUTPTRC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, three
BCZTPDIF, phase/4 bays
BZNTPDIF,
BZITGGIO,
BUTSM4
BUTPTRC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, three 1 1
BCZTPDIF, phase/8 bays
BZNTPDIF,
BZITGGIO,
BUTSM8
BUSPTRC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, single
BCZSPDIF, phase/12 bays
BZNSPDIF,
BZISGGIO,
BUSSM12
BUSPTRC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, single 1
BCZSPDIF, phase/24 bays
BZNSPDIF,
BZISGGIO,
BUSSM24
BDCGAPC Status of primary switching object for busbar 96 40
protection zone selection

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 47

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Available functions

2.2 Back-up protection functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670 (Customized)

Current protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase overcurrent protection 0-8 8-C07

PH4SPTOC 51 Four step single phase overcurrent protection 0-24

EF4PTOC 51N Four step residual overcurrent protection 0-8
67N2)
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase sequence 0–8
overcurrent protection
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, two time constant 0-2
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-8 8-C11
CCSRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection, single phase version 0-24
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-4
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-4
CBPGAPC Capacitor bank protection 0-2

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0-2
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 0-2

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change frequency protection 0-6

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

48 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 2
Available functions

2.3 Control and monitoring functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670

Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and 0-3
synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-2 2-H05
APC30 3 Apparatus control for up to 6 bays, max 30 0-1
apparatuses (6CBs) incl. interlocking
QCBAY Apparatus control 1+5/APC30 1
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch positions 1+5/APC30 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1+5/APC30 1
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and 15 15
LHMI presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20 20
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double 16 16
Point indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control 8 signals 5 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function for 3 3
DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 50 50
60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for 50 50
IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 10 10
60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 1 1
60870-5-103
Secondary system
supervision
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-2
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on voltage 0-2
difference
Logic
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 49

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670

TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12

ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 3) 40-420 40-28
LLD, OR, 0
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T (see Table 4) 0–1
INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see Table 5) 0–1
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 18 18
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with Logic 16 16
Node representation
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic 16 16
Node representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit 12 12
transgression and overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 12 12
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 12 12
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6 6
VMMXU, CMSQI,
VMSQI, VNMMXU
Table continues on next page

50 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670

CMMXU Measurements 10 10
AISVBAS Function block for service value presentation 1 1
of secondary analog inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1
A1RADR-
A4RADR,
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single 64 64
Point indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single 16 16
Point indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication function for 24 24
Measured Value
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 28 28
SSIMG 63 Gas medium supervision 21 21
SSIML 71 Liquid medium supervision 3 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker monitoring 3 24-
M14
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 3 3
60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC 1 1
60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 1 1
60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 1 1
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for IEC 20 20
60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30 30
TEILGAPC Running hour-meter 9 9
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 51

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670

Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand 6
handling

Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 328
GATE 64
INV 468
LLD 40
OR 481
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 84
XOR 40

Table 4: Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40

52 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 2
Available functions

Table 5: Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 180
GATE 49
INV 180
LLD 49
OR 180
PULSETIMER 59
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 110
TIMERSET 49
VSGAPC 130
XOR 49

2.4 Communication

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670
(Customized)

Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA and IEC 1 1
60870-5-103 for SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1
RS485GEN RS485 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1 1
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol 1 1
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1 1
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication 1 1
protocol
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 53

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670
(Customized)

MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol 1 1

MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 1 1
communication protocol
IEC 61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850 1 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for 59 59
interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point 64 64
value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60 60
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64 64
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND
FRONT, LANABI, Ethernet configuration of links 1 1
LANAB, LANCDI,
LANCD
GATEWAY Ethernet configuration of link one 1 1
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1 1
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 1 1
AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols 1 1
such as DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access via SPA protocol over 1 1
FSTACCSNA ethernet communication
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1 1
ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1
SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link status 1 1
PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port link status 1 1

Process bus communication IEC 61850-9-2 1)

Table continues on next page

54 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Busbar Busbar

REB670 (A31A)
REB670
(Customized)

PRP IEC 62439-3 parallel redundancy protocol 0-1 1-P03

Remote communication
Binary signal transfer receive/transmit 6/36 6/36
Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1 1
Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3 6/3/3

1) Only included for 9-2LE products

2.5 Basic IED functions

Table 6: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 55

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
PRODINF Product information
RUNTIME IED Runtime Comp
CAMCONFIG Central account management configuration
CAMSTATUS Central account management status
TOOLINF Tools Information component
SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function

Table 7: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

56 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs

3.1 Introduction

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be defined
in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in the field
( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED
use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is
important to set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.

A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog
channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information
will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the
IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input

module (TRM) type.

3.2 Function block

The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in ACT
when a TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware
configuration tool. In the SMT or the ACT they can be mapped to the
desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the
configuration.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 57

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Analog inputs

3.3 Signals

Table 8: TRM_12I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analog current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analog current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analog current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analog current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analog current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analog current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analog current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analog current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analog current input 10
CH11(I) STRING Analog current input 11
CH12(I) STRING Analog current input 12

Table 9: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analog current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analog current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analog current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analog current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analog current input 6
CH7(V) STRING Analog voltage input 7
CH8(V) STRING Analog voltage input 8
CH9(V) STRING Analog voltage input 9
CH10(V) STRING Analog voltage input 10
CH 11(V) STRING Analog voltage input 11
CH12(V) STRING Analog voltage input 12

58 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 10: TRM_6I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analog current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analog current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analog current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analog current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analog current input 6

Table 11: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analog current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analog current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analog current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analog current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analog current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analog current input 7
CH8(V) STRING Analog voltage input 8
CH9(V) STRING Analog voltage input 9
CH10(V) STRING Analog voltage input 10
CH 11(V) STRING Analog voltage input 11
CH12(V) STRING Analog voltage input 12

Table 12: TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analog current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analog current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analog current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analog current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analog current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analog current input 7
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 59

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Analog inputs

Name Type Description

CH8(I) STRING Analog current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analog current input 9
CH10(V) STRING Analog voltage input 10
CH 11(V) STRING Analog voltage input 11
CH12(V) STRING Analog voltage input 12

Table 13: TRM_10I_2U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analog current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analog current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analog current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analog current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analog current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analog current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analog current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analog current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analog current input 10
CH 11(V) STRING Analog voltage input 11
CH12(V) STRING Analog voltage input 12

3.4 Settings

Dependent on ordered IED type.

60 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 14: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12 for phase angle
MU1-IA presentation
MU1-IB
MU1-IC
MU1-I0
MU1- VA
MU1- VB
MU1-VC
MU1-V0
MU2-IA
MU2-IB
MU2-IC
MU2-I0
MU2-VA
MU2-VB
MU2-VC
MU2-V0
MU3-IA
MU3-IB
MU3-IC
MU3-I0
MU3-VB
MU2-VB
MU3-VC
MU3-V0
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU6-L1U - L4U

Table 15: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 61

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint11 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim11 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint12 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim12 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

62 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 16: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 63

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Analog inputs

Table 17: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 18: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

64 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 19: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 65

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

66 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 20: TRM_10I_2U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 67

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

3.5 Monitored data

Table 21: AISVBAS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

Table 22: TRM_12I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analog input module status
1=Error

Table 23: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analog input module status
1=Error

Table 24: TRM_6I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analog input module status
1=Error

Table 25: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analog input module status
1=Error

68 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 26: TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analog input module status
1=Error

Table 27: TRM_10I_2U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analog input module status
1=Error

3.6 Operation principle

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically
star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the
object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from
the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure 2)

• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 69

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Analog inputs

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse

Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456-2.vsd
ANSI05000456 V2 EN

Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or

ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards
the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and
VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and
primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated
ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

3.7 Technical data

Table 28: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current In = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) × In

Operative range (0-100) x In

Permissive overload 4 × In cont.

100 × In for 1 s *)

Burden < 150 mVA at In = 5 A

< 20 mVA at In = 1 A

Ac voltage Vn = 120 V 0.5–288 V

Operative range (0–340) V

Table continues on next page

70 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 3
Analog inputs

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fn = 60/50 Hz ±5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Table 29: CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
lug terminals

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 71

Technical manual
72
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond
when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced
binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime
value and the debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and the
debounced input value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 1 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the
counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again.

4.1.2 Oscillation filter

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields
from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance
from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.

An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the counter
value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The input signal
is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set value OscRelease.

4.1.3 Settings

OscBlock must always be set to a value greater than OscRelease. If this is

not done, oscillation detection will not function correctly, and the
resulting behaviour will be undefined.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 73

Technical manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Binary input and output modules

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 30: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 31: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Binary input/output module in operation (On) or
Enabled not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

74 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
Table 32: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Disabled - - Disabled Automatic indication of disturbance report
Enabled
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line diagram
Yes
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 75

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.2.2 Function block

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
Table 33: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
RSTLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to reset the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 34: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
RSTPULSE BOOLEAN A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-
HMI are cleared
LEDSRST BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not ON

76 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication HW GRP1_LED1 - - -
module GRP1_LED15

GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15

GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

5.3.2 Function block

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 4: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G

IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups
have a similar function block.

5.3.3 Signals
Table 35: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 77

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Table 36: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

Table 37: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

5.3.4 Settings
Table 38: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
t_MaxTripDelay 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Table 39: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm
Follow-F group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1
is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1
is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1
is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1
is green

78 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module

5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys Control FNKEYMD1 - - -
module FNKEYMD5

5.4.2 Function block

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1

IEC09000327 V1 EN

Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function key button.

5.4.3 Signals
Table 40: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

Table 41: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.4.4 Settings
Table 42: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Disabled - - Disabled Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 79

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Table 43: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Disabled - - Disabled Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut - 0 Menu shortcut for function key

MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the
product main menu.

80 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5 Operation principle

5.5.1 Local HMI

ANSI13000239-2-en.vsd

ANSI13000239 V2 EN

Figure 7: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 81

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.5.1.1 Keypad

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or
menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide
help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.

82 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

24

1
23
2
18

3
19

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

ANSI15000157-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000157 V1 EN

Figure 8: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons
and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 83

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs

5.5.1.2 Display

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a
resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The character size can vary.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

84 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000270 V1 EN

Figure 9: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be
shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three
dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the
object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on
the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in
the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 85

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC15000138-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000138 V1 EN

Figure 10: Truncated path

The number after : (colon sign) at the end of the function instance, for example, 1 in
SMAI1:1, indicates the number of that function instance.

The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback
signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal
with PCM600.

86 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN

Figure 11: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs.
Three indication LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN

Figure 12: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that
depends on the label string length.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 87

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5.1.3 LEDs

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup and
Trip.

There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each three-
color LED are divided into three panels.

There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one
LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated
since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being
the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one panel there is an
indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another panel there is an indication
that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes priority and is lit. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI or
PCM600.

Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is
indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow
buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC
button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit.
If there are un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To
acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of
this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and . They
can, for example, represent the status of a circuit breaker. The LEDs are controlled by the
function block OPENCLOSE_LED which must be configured to show the status of the
breaker.

5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives

5.5.2.1 Functionality

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx

(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The
input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input
signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled
by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block that controls the color and the operating
mode.

88 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types
are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting
mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system
in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

5.5.2.2 Status LEDs

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.

The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The yellow
and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a
disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red
LED can be used to indicate a trip command.

Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:

• Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not in
service); steady > IED is in service
• Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED is not
in normal service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the yellow
LED on has been active
• Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write
from PCM600; steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED on
has been active

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function,
DRPRDRE, by connecting a pickup or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR
binary input function block using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off,Pickup
or Trip for that particular signal.

5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes
Collecting mode

• LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously
until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are
used as a simplified alarm system. When all three inputs (red, yellow and green) are
connected to different sources of events for the same function block, collecting mode
shows the highest priority LED color that was activated since the latest
acknowledgment was made. If a number of different indications were made since the
latest acknowledgment, it is not possible to get a clear view of what triggered the
latest event without looking at the sequence of events list. A condition for getting the

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 89

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

sequence of events is that the signals have been engineered in the disturbance
recorder.

Re-starting mode

• In the re-starting mode of operation each new pickup resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for
re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a
reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time
after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has
elapsed. In sequence 6, the restarting or reset mode means that upon occurrence of
any new event, all previous indications will be reset. This facilitates that only the LED
indications related to the latest event is shown.

Acknowledgment/reset
• From local HMI
• The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common
signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge
triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the
button and menus on the LHMI.

• From function input

• The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input,
CLRLEDS, to the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for example be
configured to a binary input operated from an external push button or a function
button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means
that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only
affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will
be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows the
input signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the corresponding
input signal until it is reset.

90 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. The following 6 sequences are available:
• Sequence 1: Follow-S
• Sequence 2: Follow-F
• Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
• Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
• Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
• Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S

For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset
function is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input
signal. Sequence 3 and 4, which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are only
working in collecting (Coll) mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting
(Reset) mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and
F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding LED
obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to the
selected sequence diagrams shown below.

In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the following
symbols:

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 13: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light. It
does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs
in its operation.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 91

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 14: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the priority
color it shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of the
operation when two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in Figure
15.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 15: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of
showing steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the
indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is
not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady
light.

92 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 16: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block is
used for all three colour LEDs.

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication
with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low
priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In Figure 17 it is shown the
sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has
been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as
acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment
of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which
are not visible according to Figure 18.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 93

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 18: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority

indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to
Figure 19.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have
been alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of
the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence

94 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is,
immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and
storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its
operation.

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 20: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower
priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to Figure
21.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 21: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs
set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will
not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the
manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 95

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other
sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 22: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance

Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

96 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has
reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 97

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

98 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

5.5.3 Function keys

5.5.3.1 Functionality

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left of
the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button
has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between
default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary
signal.

5.5.3.2 Operation principle

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from
the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of
the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control
other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 99

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters
that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally
set using the PST.

Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-2-en.vsd

IEC09000330 V2 EN

Figure 26: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes. The
function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd

IEC09000331 V2 EN

Figure 27: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output will go back
to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high and there is
no output pulse.

100 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero;
else the trigger edge is lost.

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms

pulse time pulse time pulse time

Output value

IEC09000332_2_en.vsd

IEC09000332 V2 EN

Figure 28: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function
All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block
becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off. It has been
implemented this way for safety reasons; the idea is that the function key LEDs should
always reflect the actual status of any primary equipment monitored by these LEDs.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 101

Technical manual
102
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 Busbar differential protection

6.1.1 Identification
Busbar differential protection, 3-phase version
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Function description
identification identification device number

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BUTPTRC 87B
three phase/4 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BTCZPDIF 87B
three phase/4 or 8 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BZNTPDIF_A 87B
three phase/4 or 8 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BZNTPDIF_B 87B
three phase/4 or 8 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BZITGGIO 87B
three phase/4 or 8 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 103

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Busbar differential protection, 1-phase version

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BUSPTRC 87B
single phase/12 or 24 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BCZSPDIF 87B
single phase/12 or 24 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BZNSPDIF_A 87B
single phase/12 or 24 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BZNSPDIF_B 87B
single phase/12 or 24 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, 3Id/I

BZISGGIO 87B
single phase/12 or 24 bays

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN

Status of primary switching object for Busbar protection zone selection

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Status of primary switching object for
BDCGAPC - -
Busbar protection zone selection

6.1.1.1 Functionality

IED is designed for the selective, reliable and fast differential protection of busbars, T-
connections and meshed corners. IED can be used for different switchgear layouts,

104 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

including single and double busbar with or without transfer bus, double circuit breaker or
breaker-and-a-half stations. The IED is applicable for the protection of medium voltage
(MV), high voltage (HV) and extra high voltage (EHV) installations at a power system
frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz. The IED can detect all types of internal phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground faults in solidly grounded or low impedance grounded power systems, as
well as all internal multi-phase faults in isolated or high-impedance grounded power
systems.

Available versions
The following versions of the IED are available:

1. Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection

zones and four three-phase CT inputs.
• This version is available in 1/2 of 19” case. The version is intended for simpler
applications such as T-connections, meshed corners and so on.
2. Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection
zones and eight three-phase CT inputs.
• This version is available in full 19” case. The version is intended for
applications on smaller busbars, with up to two zones and eight CT inputs.
3. One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and twelve CT inputs.
• This version is available in either 1/2 of 19” or full 19” case.
• The IED in 1/2 of 19” case is intended for applications without need for
dynamic Zone Selection. Typical examples are substations with single busbar
with or without bus-section breaker, breaker-and-a-half or double breaker
arrangements. Three such IEDs offer cost effective solution for such simple
substation arrangements with up to 12 CT inputs.
• The IED in full 19” case is intended for applications in substation where
dynamic Zone Selection or bigger number of binary inputs and outputs is
needed. Such stations for example are double busbar station with or without
transfer bus with up to 12 CT inputs.
• This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summation
transformers.
4. One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and twenty-four CT inputs
• This version is available in full 19” case. The IED is intended for busbar
protection applications in big substation where dynamic Zone Selection, quite
large number of binary inputs and outputs and many CT inputs are needed. The
IED includes two differential zones and twenty-four CT inputs.
• This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summation
transformers.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 105

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

6.1.2 Operation principle

Busbar differential protection detects internal faults within the station. In order to do that
selectively it often incorporates more than one differential protection-measuring element.
These differential protection-measuring elements are often called protection zones in
relay protection literature. On the other hand, the protection function is quite specific,
because typically all CTs in the station are connected to it. It is, therefore, of outmost
importance that individually connected CT inputs are appropriately routed to the relevant
protection zone. Sometimes these connections need to be dynamically changed in
accordance with the actual connections within the station. Therefore, the busbar
differential protection has two essential parts:

1. Differential Protection, which provide differential protection algorithm for each

busbar section
2. Zone Selection, which provide dynamic linking between input CTs and individual
protection zones as well as routing of zone trip signals to the individual bay CBs

It is also important to understand that all function blocks described in the next sections,
except the Switch Status function block, are not independent from each other. Hidden
connections are pre-made in the software in order to simplify the required engineering
work in PCM600 for the end user.

6.1.3 Differential protection

This part of busbar protection consists of differential protection algorithm, sensitive
differential protection algorithm, check zone algorithm, open CT algorithm and two
supervision algorithms. It is presented to the end user as three function blocks:

1. Zone A
2. Zone B (functionality wise completely identical to the Zone A)
3. Check Zone

6.1.4 Differential Zone A or B BZNTPDIF, BZNSPDIF (87)

The numerical, low-impedance differential protection function is designed for fast and
selective protection for faults within protected zone. All connected CT inputs are provided
with a restraint feature. The minimum pick-up value for the differential current is set to
give a suitable sensitivity for all internal faults. For busbar protection applications typical
setting value for the minimum differential operating current is from 50% to 150% of the
biggest CT. This setting is made directly in primary amperes. The operating slope for the
differential operating characteristic is fixed to 53% in the algorithm. The fast tripping time
of the low-impedance differential protection function is especially advantages for power

106 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

system networks with high fault levels or where fast fault clearance is required for power
system stability. The advanced open CT detection algorithm detects instantly the open CT
secondary circuits and prevents differential protection operation without any need for
additional check zone.

Differential protection zones include a sensitive operational level. This sensitive

operational level is designed to be able to detect internal busbar ground faults in low
impedance grounded power systems (that is, power systems where the ground-fault
current is limited to a certain level, typically between 300A and 2000A primary by a
neutral point reactor or resistor). Alternatively, this sensitive level can be used when high
sensitivity is required from busbar differential protection (that is, energizing of the bus via
long line).

Overall operating characteristic of Busbar differential protection is shown in figure 29.

Sensitive
differential
protection
Id [Primary Amps]

Operate
I in region
I d=
Differential protection
operation characteristic
Diff Oper Level
Sens Iin Block
Sensitive Oper Level
s=0.53

Iin [Primary Amps]

en06000142.vsd
IEC06000142 V1 EN

Figure 29: Operating characteristic

Where:
Iin Iin represents the RMS value of the incoming current to the differential protection zone

Id Id represents the RMS value of the differential current of the differential protection zone

s = 0.53 the operating slope for the differential function is fixed to 0.53 in the algorithm and can not be
changed by the user

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 107

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

6.1.4.1 Open CT detection

The innovative measuring algorithm provides stability for open or short-circuited main
CT secondary circuits, which means that no separate check zone is actually necessary.
Pick-up current for open CT detection can usually be set to detect the open circuit
condition for the smallest CT. This built-in feature allows the protection terminal to be set
very sensitive, even to a lower value than the maximum CT primary rating in the station.
At detection of problems in CT secondary circuits, the differential protection can be
instantly blocked and an alarm is given. Alternatively, the differential protection can be
automatically desensitized in order to ensure busbar differential protection stability
during normal through-load condition. When problems in CT secondary circuits have
been found and associated error has been corrected a manual reset must be given to the
IED. This can be done locally from the local HMI, or remotely via binary input or
communication link.

However, it is to be noted that this feature can only be partly utilized when the summation
principle is in use.

6.1.4.2 Differential protection supervision

Dual monitoring of differential protection status is available. The first monitoring feature
operates after settable time delay when differential current is higher than the user settable
pickup. This feature can be, for example, used to design automatic reset logic for
previously described open CT detection feature. The second monitoring feature operates
immediately when the busbar through-going current is bigger than the user settable level.
Both of these monitoring features are phase segregated and they give out binary signals,
which can be either used to trigger disturbance recorder or for alarming purposes.

6.1.4.3 Explanation of Zone function block

Detailed explanation of Zone function block inputs

• BLOCK, when this binary input has logical value one all trip commands from the
zone are prevented
• BLKST, when this binary input has logical value one the differential protection
within the zone is blocked (that is, can not operate)
• TRZONE, when this binary input has logical value one forced external trip will be
given from the zone

108 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

• RSTTRIP, when this binary input has logical value one latched trip from the zone will
be re-set back to zero. Whether zone trip is in Latched or SelfReset mode is defined
by a parameter setting DiffTripOut
• RSTOCT, when this binary input has logical value one OCT latched signals and
possible blocking will be re-set. It is to be noted that it is possible to do this only if the
zone differential current has lower value then defined by a parameter DiffOperLevel
• ENSENS, when this binary input has logical value one the sensitive differential
protection feature within the zone is allowed to operate in accordance with its settings
(for example, connect here the pickup signal from open delta overvoltage relay in
impedance grounded system)

Detailed explanation of Zone function block outputs

• TRIP, this binary output is used as general trip command from the zone. It is activated
when either differential protection operates or sensitive differential protection
operates or for any external trip signal (that is, either from the individual bays
connected to the zone or via TRZONE input).
• TRIP_X, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP output signal
is initiated (only available in 1Ph-version)
• TRIP_A, TRIP_B, TRIP_C, these binary outputs has logical value one whenever
zone TRIP output signal is initiated (only available in 3Ph-version)
• TREXTBAY, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP output
signal is initiated by operation of the external trip signal from one of the connected
bays. In most cases this will in practice mean operation of back-up trip command
from the breaker failure protection in that bay
• TREXTZ, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP output signal
is initiated externally via input TRZONE
• TRSENS, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP output signal
is initiated by operation of the sensitive differential protection algorithm (only
available in 1Ph-version)
• TRSENS_A(B,C), this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP
output signal is initiated by operation of the sensitive differential protection
algorithm in the corresponding phase (only available in 3Ph-version)
• OCT, this binary output is used as general Open CT detection signal from the zone.
It is activated when either fast or slow OCT algorithm operates.
• SOCT, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT output signal is
initiated by operation of the slow OCT algorithm (only available in 1Ph-version)
• SOCT_A(B,C), this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT output
signal is initiated by operation of the slow OCT algorithm in the corresponding phase
(only available in 3Ph-version)
• FOCT, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT output signal is
initiated by operation of the fast OCT algorithm (only available in 1Ph-version)
• FOCT_A(B,C), this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT output
signal is initiated by operation of the fast OCT algorithm in the corresponding phase
(only available in 3Ph-version)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 109

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

• ALDIFF, this binary output has logical value one whenever differential current
supervision algorithm operates (only available in 1Ph-version)
• ALDIFF_A(B,C), this binary output has logical value one whenever differential
current supervision algorithm operates in the corresponding phase (only available in
3Ph-version)
• ALIIN, this binary output has logical value one whenever incoming current
supervision algorithm operates (only available in 1Ph-version)
• ALIIN_A(B,C), this binary output has logical value one whenever incoming current
supervision algorithm operates in the corresponding phase (only available in 3Ph-
version)
• IIN, this output represents internally calculated instantaneous (sample based)
incoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function in order to
record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IIN_A(B,C), this output represents phase wise internally calculated instantaneous
(sample based) incoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder
function in order to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 3Ph-
version)
• ID, this output represents internally calculated instantaneous (sample based)
differential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function in order
to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IID_A(B,C), this output represents phase wise internally calculated instantaneous
(sample based) differential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder
function in order to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 3Ph-
version)
• IIN_ZA, this output represents internally calculated RMS value of the incoming
current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function in order to record it
during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IIN_ZA_A(B,C), this output represents phase wise internally calculated RMS value
of the incoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function in
order to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 3Ph-version)
• IINRANGE, this output represents internally calculated RMS value of the incoming
current. It can be connected to the measurement expander block for value reporting
via IEC 61850 (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IINRNG_A(B,C), this output represents phase wise internally calculated RMS value
of the incoming current. It can be connected to the measurement expander block for
value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 3Ph-version)
• ID_ZA, this output represents internally calculated RMS value of the differential
current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function in order to record it
during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• ID_ZA_A(B,C), this output represents phase wise internally calculated RMS value
of the differential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function in
order to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 3Ph-version)
• IDRANGE, this output represents internally calculated RMS value of the differential
current. It can be connected to the measurement expander block for value reporting
via IEC 61850 (only available in 1Ph-version)

110 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

• IDRNG_A(B,C), this output represents phase wise internally calculated RMS value
of the differential current. It can be connected to the measurement expander block for
value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 3Ph-version)
• IDFRMS, this output represents internally calculated fundamental frequency RMS
value of the differential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder
function in order to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-
version)
• IDFRMS_A(B,C), this output represents phase wise internally calculated
fundamental frequency RMS value of the differential current. It can be connected to
the disturbance recorder function in order to record it during external and internal
faults (only available in 3Ph-version)

Table 44: Zone function block outputs

Fault condition/type Check zone TRIP TRIPLX TREXTBAY TREXTZ TRSENS
supervision
I>DiffOperLevel Off Yes Yes - - -
BFP BU Trip Off Yes Yes Yes - -
TRZONE Input Off Yes Yes - Yes -
activated
I>SensOperLevel + Off Yes Yes - - Yes
ENSENS activated

I>DiffOperLevel On - Yes - - -
without CheckZone
operation
I>DiffOperLevel with On Yes Yes - - -
CheckZone
operation
BFP BU Trip On Yes Yes Yes - -
TRZONE Input On Yes Yes - Yes -
activated
I>SensOperLevel + On Yes Yes - - Yes
ENSENS activated

Detailed explanation of Zone function block settings

• Operation: this setting determines whether the zone is in operation or out of
operation. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for every function
block:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 111

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

1. On: when this mode is selected the zone is in operation

2. Off: when this mode is selected the zone is out of operation
• DiffOperLevel: this setting determines the minimum pickup level for the differential
feature. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 1000A
• DiffTripOut: this setting determines how the trip output from the zone shall behave.
Note that the setting does not affect the behave of differential trip per phase from the
zone. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for every function block:
1. SelfReset: when this mode is selected the zone TRIP output will reset to logical
value zero after the pre-set time determined by the setting parameter tTripHold.
2. Latched: when this mode is selected the zone TRIP output will latched and it
will require manual re-set command. This reset command can be given from
local HMI or via communication link
• tTripHold: defines the drop-off time for the TRIP signal in the SelfReset mode of
operation. Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s. Default
value is 0.200s
• CheckZoneSup: this setting determines whether the busbar protection zone
differential algorithm is supervised by the operation of the built-in Check Zone or not.
One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for every function block:
1. On: when this mode is selected the zone differential trip is supervised by the
operation of the built-in Check Zone
2. Off: when this mode is selected the zone differential trip is not supervised by the
operation of the built-in Check Zone
• SlowOCTOper: this setting determines operation of the slow OCT algorithm. One of
the following three alternatives shall be selected for every function block:
1. Off: when this mode is selected the slow OCT feature is completely disabled
2. Block: when this mode is selected the operation of the slow OCT feature
completely blocks the operation of the differential protection. It shall be noted
that this blocking is selective (that is, zone and phase wise)
3. Supervise: when this mode is selected the operation of the slow OCT feature
only supervises the operation of the differential protection. As soon as
differential current is bigger than the pre-set level determined by the setting
parameter OCTReleaseLev the differential function will be again allowed to
operate.
• FastOCTOper: this setting determines operation of the fast OCT algorithm. One of
the following three alternatives shall be selected for every function block:
1. Off: when this mode is selected the fast OCT feature is completely disabled
2. Block: when this mode is selected the operation of the fast OCT feature
completely blocks the operation of the differential protection. It shall be noted
that this blocking is selective (that is, zone and phase wise)
3. Supervise: when this mode is selected the operation of the fast OCT feature only
supervises the operation of the differential protection. As soon as differential

112 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

current is bigger than the pre-set level determined by the setting parameter
OCTReleaseLev the differential function will be again allowed to operate
• OCTOperLevel: this setting determines the minimum pickup level for the slow and
fast OCT feature. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 200A.
• tSlowOCT: this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of the slow
OCT algorithm. Time delay can be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in step of 0.01s. Default
value is 20.00s. Minimum setting should always be above 1 s
• OCTReleaseLev: this setting determines the differential current level above which
the OCT feature will again allow the differential protection operation, when OCT
feature is used in the Supervise mode of the operation. It is to be entered directly in
primary amperes. Default value 2500A
• IdAlarmLev: this setting determines the differential current level above which the
alarm is given after the pre-set time determined by the parameter setting tIdAlarm. It
shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 200A.
• tIdAlarm: this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of the
differential alarm feature. Time delay can be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in step of
0.01s. Default value is 30.00s
• IinAlarmLev: this setting determines the incoming current level (bus through-going
current level) above which the alarm is given instantaneously. It is to be entered
directly in primary amperes. Default value 3000A
• SensDiffOper: this setting determines operation of the sensitive differential
algorithm. One of the following two alternatives is to be selected for every function
block:
1. On: when this mode is selected the sensitive differential algorithm is in
operation. Note that the input signal ENSENS must have logical value one in
order to get operation from the sensitive differential algorithm
2. Off: when this mode is selected the sensitive differential algorithm is out of
operation
• SensOperLevel: this setting determines the minimum pickup level for the sensitive
differential algorithm. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value
200A.
• SensIinBlock: this setting determines the incoming current level (bus through-going
current level) above which the sensitive differential algorithm is automatically
blocked. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 1000A
• tSensDiff: this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of the
sensitive differential algorithm. Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step
of 0.001s. Default value is 0.400s

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 113

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

6.1.4.4 Function block

BTZA-
BZNTPDIF_87B
BLOCK TRIP
BLKST TRIP_A
TRZONE TRIP_B
RSTTRIP TRIP_C
RSTOCT TREXTBAY
ENSENS TREXTZ
TRSENS_A
TRSENS_B
TRSENS_C
OCT
SOCT_A
SOCT_B
SOCT_C
FOCT_A
FOCT_B
FOCT_C
ALDIFF_A
ALDIFF_B
ALDIFF_C
ALIIN_A
ALIIN_B
ALIIN_C
IIN_ZA_A
IINRNG_A
IIN_ZA_B
IINRNG_B
IIN_ZA_C
IINRNG_C
ID_ZA_A
IDRNG_A
ID_ZA_B
IDRNG_B
ID_ZA_C
IDRNG_C
IDFRMS_A
IDFRMS_B
IDFRMS_C

en06000159_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000159 V1 EN

Figure 30: BZNTPDIF function block (Differential Zone A, 3ph). Also applicable for
Differential Zone B, 3ph

114 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

BSZA-
BZNSPDIF_87B
BLOCK TRIP
BLKST TRIP_X
TRZONE TREXTBAY
RSTTRIP TREXTZ
RSTOCT TRSENS
ENSENS OCT
SOCT
FOCT
ALDIFF
ALIIN
IIN_ZA
IINRANGE
ID_ZA
IDRANGE
IDFRMS
en06000160_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000160 V1 EN

Figure 31: BZNSPDIF function block (Differential Zone A, 1ph). Also applicable for
Differential Zone B, 1ph

6.1.4.5 Signals
Table 45: BZNTPDIF_A (87B) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block zone trip
BLKDIFF BOOLEAN 0 Block stable differential protection
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 External zone trip
RSTTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Reset latched zone trip
RSTOCT BOOLEAN 0 Reset open CT alarm
ENSENS BOOLEAN 0 Enable Sensitive Differential Protection

Table 46: BZNTPDIF_A (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Zone A general trip
TRIP_A BOOLEAN Differential trip phase A Zone A
TRIP_B BOOLEAN Differential trip phase B Zone A
TRIP_C BOOLEAN Differential trip phase C Zone A
TREXTBAY BOOLEAN Zone A trip due to external trip from one of connected
bays
TREXTZ BOOLEAN Zone A trip due to external input signal
TRSENS_A BOOLEAN Sensitive differential function trip phase A Zone A
TRSENS_B BOOLEAN Sensitive differential function trip phase B Zone A
TRSENS_C BOOLEAN Sensitive differential function trip phase C Zone A
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 115

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Type Description

OCT BOOLEAN General open CT alarm Zone A
SOCT_A BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase A Zone A
SOCT_B BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase B Zone A
SOCT_C BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase C Zone A
FOCT_A BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase A Zone A
FOCT_B BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase B Zone A
FOCT_C BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase C Zone A
ALDIFF_A BOOLEAN Differential current alarm in phase A Zone A
ALDIFF_B BOOLEAN Differential current alarm in phase B Zone A
ALDIFF_C BOOLEAN Differential current alarm in phase C Zone A
ALIIN_A BOOLEAN Incoming current alarm in phase A Zone A
ALIIN_B BOOLEAN Incoming current alarm in phase B Zone A
ALIIN_C BOOLEAN Incoming current alarm in phase C Zone A
IIN_ZA_A REAL RMS incoming current A, instantaneous value
IINRNG_A INTEGER RMS incoming current A, range
IIN_ZA_B REAL RMS incoming current B, instantaneous value
IINRNG_B INTEGER RMS incoming current B, range
IIN_ZA_C REAL RMS incoming current C, instantaneous value
IINRNG_C INTEGER RMS incoming current C, range
ID_ZA_A REAL RMS differential current, instantaneous value
IDRNG_A INTEGER RMS differential current, range
ID_ZA_B REAL RMS differential current, instantaneous value
IDRNG_B INTEGER RMS differential current, range
ID_ZA_C REAL RMS differential current, instantaneous value
IDRNG_C INTEGER RMS differential current, range
IDFRMS_A REAL Fundamental Frequency Differential current Zone A
IDFRMS_B REAL Fundamental Frequency Differential current Zone A
IDFRMS_C REAL Fundamental Frequency Differential current Zone A

Table 47: BZNTPDIF_B (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block zone trip
BLKDIFF BOOLEAN 0 Block stable differential protection
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 External zone trip
RSTTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Reset latched zone trip
RSTOCT BOOLEAN 0 Reset open CT alarm
ENSENS BOOLEAN 0 Enable Sensitive Differential Protection

116 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 48: BZNTPDIF_B (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Zone B general trip
TRIP_A BOOLEAN Differential trip phase A Zone B
TRIP_B BOOLEAN Differential trip phase B Zone B
TRIP_C BOOLEAN Differential trip phase C Zone B
TREXTBAY BOOLEAN Zone B trip due to external trip from one of connected
bays
TREXTZ BOOLEAN Zone B trip due to external input signal
TRSENS_A BOOLEAN Sensitive differential function trip phase A Zone B
TRSENS_B BOOLEAN Sensitive differential function trip phase B Zone B
TRSENS_C BOOLEAN Sensitive differential function trip phase C Zone B
OCT BOOLEAN General open CT alarm Zone B
SOCT_A BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase A Zone B
SOCT_B BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase B Zone B
SOCT_C BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase C Zone B
FOCT_A BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase A Zone B
FOCT_B BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase B Zone B
FOCT_C BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase C Zone B
ALDIFF_A BOOLEAN Differential current alarm in phase A Zone B
ALDIFF_B BOOLEAN Differential current alarm in phase B Zone B
ALDIFF_C BOOLEAN Differential current alarm in phase C Zone B
ALIIN_A BOOLEAN Incoming current alarm in phase A Zone B
ALIIN_B BOOLEAN Incoming current alarm in phase B Zone B
ALIIN_C BOOLEAN Incoming current alarm in phase C Zone B
IIN_ZB_A REAL RMS incoming current A, instantaneous value
IINRNG_A INTEGER RMS incoming current A, range
IIN_ZB_B REAL RMS incoming current B, instantaneous value
IINRNG_B INTEGER RMS incoming current B, range
IIN_ZB_C REAL RMS incoming current C, instantaneous value
IINRNG_C INTEGER RMS incoming current C, range
ID_ZB_A REAL RMS differential current Phase A, instantaneous value
IDRNG_A INTEGER RMS differential current A, range
ID_ZB_B REAL RMS differential current Phase B, instantaneous value
IDRNG_B REAL RMS differential current B, range
ID_ZB_C REAL RMS differential current Phase C, instantaneous value
IDRNG_C INTEGER RMS differential current C, range
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 117

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Type Description

IDFRMS_A REAL Fundamental Frequency Differential current Zone B
IDFRMS_B REAL Fundamental Frequency Differential current Zone B
IDFRMS_C REAL Fundamental Frequency Differential current Zone B

Table 49: BZNSPDIF_A (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block zone trip
BLKDIFF BOOLEAN 0 Block stable differential protection
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 External zone trip
RSTTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Reset latched zone trip
RSTOCT BOOLEAN 0 Reset open CT alarm
ENSENS BOOLEAN 0 Enable Sensitive Differential Protection

Table 50: BZNSPDIF_A (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Zone A general trip
TRIP_X BOOLEAN Differential trip output Zone A
TREXTBAY BOOLEAN Zone A trip due to external trip from one of connected
bays
TREXTZ BOOLEAN Zone A trip due to external input signal
TRSENS BOOLEAN Sensitive differential function trip Zone A
OCT BOOLEAN General open CT alarm Zone A
SOCT BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from slow algorithm Zone A
FOCT BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from fast algorithm Zone A
ALDIFF BOOLEAN Differential current alarm Zone A
ALIIN BOOLEAN Incoming current alarm Zone A
IIN_ZA REAL RMS incoming current, magnitude of instantaneous
value
IINRANGE INTEGER RMS incoming current, range
ID_ZA REAL RMS differential current, magnitude of instantaneous
value
IDRANGE INTEGER RMS differential current, range
IDFRMS REAL Fundamental Frequency Differential current Zone A

118 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 51: BZNSPDIF_B (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block zone trip
BLKDIFF BOOLEAN 0 Block stable differential protection
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 External zone trip
RSTTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Reset latched zone trip
RSTOCT BOOLEAN 0 Reset open CT alarm
ENSENS BOOLEAN 0 Enable Sensitive Differential Protection

Table 52: BZNSPDIF_B (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Zone B general trip
TRIP_X BOOLEAN Differential trip output Zone B
TREXTBAY BOOLEAN Zone B trip due to external trip from one of connected
bays
TREXTZ BOOLEAN Zone B trip due to external input signal
TRSENS BOOLEAN Sensitive differential function trip Zone B
OCT BOOLEAN General open CT alarm Zone B
SOCT BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from slow algorithm Zone B
FOCT BOOLEAN Open CT alarm from fast algorithm Zone B
ALDIFF BOOLEAN Differential current alarm Zone B
ALIIN BOOLEAN Incoming current alarm Zone B
IIN_ZB REAL RMS incoming current, magnitude of instantaneous
value
IINRANGE INTEGER RMS incoming current, range
ID_ZB REAL RMS differential current, magnitude of instantaneous
value
IDRANGE INTEGER RMS differential current, range
IDFRMS REAL Fundamental Frequency Differential current Zone B

6.1.4.6 Settings

All general settings for Busbar differential protection are only relevant for proper event
reporting via IEC 61850-8-1. They are not important for proper operation of Busbar
differential protection.

Note that all settings for busbar protection under relevant parameter setting group are
directly related to proper operation of the Busbar differential protection.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 119

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 53: BZNTPDIF_A (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Differential protection operation
Enabled
DiffOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Differential protection trip pickup in primary
amperes
DiffTripOut SelfReset - - SelfReset Differential protection trip output mode
Latched
tTripHold 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Differential trip drop-off delay in SelfReset
mode
CheckZoneSup Disabled - - Disabled Check zone supervises differential protection
Enabled operation
SlowOCTOper Disabled - - Block Operation of slow open CT alarm
Block
Supervise
FastOCTOper Disabled - - Block Operation of fast open CT alarm
Block
Supervise
OCTOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Open CT pickup in primary amperes
tSlowOCT 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 20.00 Time delay for slow open CT alarm
OCTReleaseLev 10 - 99999 A 1 2500 Id level above which OCT alarm releases in
supervision mode
IdAlarmLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Differential current alarm pickup in primary
amperes
tIdAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for Differential Current Alarm Level
in sec.
IinAlarmLev 10 - 99999 A 1 3000 Incoming current alarm level in primary
amperes
SensDiffOper Disabled - - Disabled Sensitive differential protection operation
Enabled
SensOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Sensitive differential operation level in primary
amperes
SensIinBlock 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Iin level above which sensitive diff protection is
blocked
tSensDiff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay for sensitive differential function
operation

120 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 54: BZNTPDIF_A (87B) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IIN_A db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
IIN_A zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
IIN_A hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_A hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_A lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_A llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_A min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
IIN_A max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
IIN_A dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
IIN_A limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
IIN_B db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
IIN_B zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
IIN_B hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_B hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_B lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_B llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_B min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
IIN_B max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
IIN_B dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
IIN_B limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
IIN_C db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 121

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IIN_C zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
IIN_C hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_C hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_C iLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.00 Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_C llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_C min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
IIN_C max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
IIN_C dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
IIN_C limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
ID_A db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
ID_A zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
ID_A hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
ID_A hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
ID_A lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_A llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_A min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
ID_A max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
ID_A dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
ID_A limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
ID_B db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
ID_B zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
ID_B hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
Table continues on next page

122 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ID_B hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
ID_B lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_B llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_B min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
ID_B max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
ID_B dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
ID_B limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
ID_C db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
ID_C zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
ID_C hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
ID_C hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
ID_C lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_C llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_C min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
ID_C max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
ID_C dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
ID_C limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 123

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 55: BZNTPDIF_B (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Differential protection operation
Enabled
DiffOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Differential protection trip pickup in primary
amperes
DiffTripOut SelfReset - - SelfReset Differential protection trip output mode
Latched
tTripHold 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Differential trip drop-off delay in SelfReset
mode
CheckZoneSup Disabled - - Disabled Check zone supervises differential protection
Enabled operation
SlowOCTOper Disabled - - Block Operation of slow open CT alarm
Block
Supervise
FastOCTOper Disabled - - Block Operation of fast open CT alarm
Block
Supervise
OCTOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Open CT pickup in primary amperes
tSlowOCT 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 20.00 Time delay for slow open CT alarm
OCTReleaseLev 10 - 99999 A 1 2500 Id level above which OCT alarm releases in
supervision mode
IdAlarmLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Differential current alarm pickup in primary
amperes
tIdAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for Differential Current Alarm Level
in sec.
IinAlarmLev 10 - 99999 A 1 3000 Incoming current alarm level in primary
amperes
SensDiffOper Disabled - - Disabled Sensitive differential protection operation
Enabled
SensOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Sensitive differential operation level in primary
amperes
SensIinBlock 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Iin level above which sensitive differential
protection is blocked
tSensDiff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay for sensitive differential function
operation

124 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 56: BZNTPDIF_B (87B) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IIN_A db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
IIN_A zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
IIN_A hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_A hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_A lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_A llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_A min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
IIN_A max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
IIN_A dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
IIN_A limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
IIN_B db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
IIN_B zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
IIN_B hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_B hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_B lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_B llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_B min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
IIN_B max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
IIN_B dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
IIN_B limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
IIN_C db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 125

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IIN_C zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
IIN_C hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_C hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
IIN_C iLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_C llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN_C min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
IIN_C max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
IIN_C dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
IIN_C limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
ID_A db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
ID_A zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
ID_A hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
ID_A hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
ID_A lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_A llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_A min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
ID_A max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
ID_A dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
ID_A limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
ID_B db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
ID_B zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
ID_B hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
Table continues on next page

126 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ID_B hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
ID_B lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_B llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_B min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
ID_B max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
ID_B dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
ID_B limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
ID_C db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
ID_C zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
ID_C hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
ID_C hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
ID_C lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_C llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
ID_C min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
ID_C max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
ID_C dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
ID_C limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 127

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 57: BZNSPDIF_A (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Differential protection operation
Enabled
DiffOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Differential protection trip pickup in primary
amperes
DiffTripOut SelfReset - - SelfReset Differential protection trip output mode
Latched
tTripHold 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Differential trip drop-off delay in SelfReset
mode
CheckZoneSup Disabled - - Disabled Check zone supervises differential protection
Enabled operation
SlowOCTOper Disabled - - Block Operation of slow open CT alarm
Block
Supervise
FastOCTOper Disabled - - Block Operation of fast open CT alarm
Block
Supervise
OCTOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Open CT pickup in primary amperes
tSlowOCT 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 20.00 Time delay for slow open CT alarm
OCTReleaseLev 10 - 99999 A 1 2500 Id level above which OCT alarm releases in
supervision mode
IdAlarmLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Differential current alarm pickup in primary
amperes
tIdAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for Differential Current Alarm Level
in sec.
IinAlarmLev 10 - 99999 A 1 3000 Incoming current alarm level in primary
amperes
SensDiffOper Disabled - - Disabled Sensitive differential protection operation
Enabled
SensOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Sensitive differential operation level in primary
amperes
SensIinBlock 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Iin level above which sensitive differential
protection is blocked
tSensDiff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay for sensitive differential function
operation

128 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 58: BZNSPDIF_A (87B) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IIN db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
IIN zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
IIN hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
IIN hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
IIN lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
IIN max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
IIN dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
IIN limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
ID db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
ID zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
ID hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
ID hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
ID lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
ID llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
ID min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
ID max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
ID dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
ID limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 129

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 59: BZNSPDIF_B (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Differential protection operation
Enabled
DiffOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Differential protection trip pickup in primary
amperes
DiffTripOut SelfReset - - SelfReset Differential protection trip output mode
Latched
tTripHold 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Differential trip drop-off delay in SelfReset
mode
CheckZoneSup Disabled - - Disabled Check zone supervises differential protection
Enabled operation
SlowOCTOper Disabled - - Block Operation of slow open CT alarm
Block
Supervise
FastOCTOper Disabled - - Block Operation of fast open CT alarm
Block
Supervise
OCTOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Open CT pickup in primary amperes
tSlowOCT 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 20.00 Time delay for slow open CT alarm
OCTReleaseLev 10 - 99999 A 1 2500 Id level above which OCT alarm releases in
supervision mode
IdAlarmLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Differential current alarm pickup in primary
amperes
tIdAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for Differential Current Alarm Level
in sec.
IinAlarmLev 10 - 99999 A 1 3000 Incoming current alarm level in primary
amperes
SensDiffOper Disabled - - Disabled Sensitive differential protection operation
Enabled
SensOperLev 10 - 99999 A 1 200 Sensitive differential operation level in primary
amperes
SensIinBlock 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Iin level above which sensitive differential
protection is blocked
tSensDiff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay for sensitive differential function
operation

130 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 60: BZNSPDIF_B (87B) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IIN db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
IIN zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
IIN hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
IIN hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
IIN lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
IIN min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
IIN max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
IIN dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
IIN limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
ID db 0 - 300 s,%,%s 1 10 Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral
is used)
ID zeroDb 0 - 100000 - 1 500 Values less than this are forced to zero in
0.001% of range
ID hhLim 0.000 - - 0.001 5000.000 High High limit
10000000000.000
ID hLim 0.000 - - 0.001 3000.000 High limit
10000000000.000
ID lLim 0.000 - - 0.001 100.000 Low limit
10000000000.000
ID llLim 0.000 - - 0.001 50.000 Low Low limit
10000000000.000
ID min 0.000 - - 0.001 25.000 Minimum value
10000000000.000
ID max 0.000 - - 0.001 6000.000 Maximum value
10000000000.000
ID dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db)
Dead band
Int deadband
ID limHys 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 131

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

6.1.4.7 Monitored data

Table 61: BZNTPDIF_A (87B) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IIN_ZA_A REAL - A RMS incoming current A,
instantaneous value
IIN_ZA_B REAL - A RMS incoming current B,
instantaneous value
IIN_ZA_C REAL - A RMS incoming current C,
instantaneous value
ID_ZA_A REAL - A RMS differential current,
instantaneous value
ID_ZA_B REAL - A RMS differential current,
instantaneous value
ID_ZA_C REAL - A RMS differential current,
instantaneous value

Table 62: BZNSPDIF_A (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IIN_ZA REAL - A RMS incoming current,
magnitude of instantaneous
value
ID_ZA REAL - A RMS differential current,
magnitude of instantaneous
value

Table 63: BZNSPDIF_B (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IIN_ZB REAL - A RMS incoming current,
magnitude of instantaneous
value
ID_ZB REAL - A RMS differential current,
magnitude of instantaneous
value

6.1.5 Calculation principles

6.1.5.1 General

The calculation of relevant quantities from the CT input values are performed by the IED
and passed to the Busbar differential protection and open CT algorithm for further
processing.

132 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

These calculations are completely phase-segregated. Therefore, they can be explained for
one phase only. Calculations for other two phases are done in exactly the same way.

The prerequisites for correct calculations are:

• Sampling of all analog current inputs have to be done simultaneously

• Current samples have to be in primary amps
• All currents connected to the zone must be measured with same reference direction
(that is, all towards the zone or all from the zone)

The instantaneous differential current is calculated as absolute value of the sum of all
currents connected to the protection zone:

id = å ij
j=1
EQUATION1141 V1 EN (Equation 1)

Where:
id instantaneous differential current (calculated from raw samples)

N total number of bays connected to the protection zone

ij instantaneous current value (that is, latest sample value) for bay j

The sum of all latest current samples with positive value is made:

SP = å ij
j= 1
EQUATION1143 V1 EN (Equation 2)

Where:
M number of bays with positive value of the latest current sample (M<N)

as well as the absolute value of the sum of all latest negative current samples:

SN = å ij
j = M+1
EQUATION1142 V1 EN (Equation 3)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 133

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Now the instantaneous incoming and outgoing currents are calculated as follows:

iin = max {SP,SN}

iout = min {SP, SN}

All these quantities are calculated for every set of samples (that is, 20 times in one power
system cycle in the IED). It is to be noted that all three quantities (that is, iin, iout & id) will
be of a “DC” nature in time (that is, these quantities can only be positive). This means that
the instantaneous incoming current during normal load condition looks like as the output
of the full wave rectifier. Note that iin is always bigger than or equal to iout.

Figure 32 shows the comparison between above calculated quantities and REB103 (or
RADSS) design:

IR1
SR
TMD
Z1 RZ2 TMZ
RD3 Vd3
AR
Z1 IL » io u t D2
DR
Id 1 » id RD11
VS

IT 3 » i in IR2

en06000134_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000134 V1 EN

Figure 32: Comparison between iin, iout and id quantities inside REB670 and
REB103 (or RADSS) analog design

Where:
iout instantaneous outgoing current from the zone of protection (calculated from raw samples)

id instantaneous differential current (calculated from raw samples)

iin instantaneous incoming current into the zone of protection (calculated from raw samples)

This means that any differential protection zone in the IED can be represented as shown
in figure 33, regardless the number of the connected feeders.

134 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

iin Differential iout

Protection Zone

id

en04000229.vsd
IEC04000229 V1 EN

Figure 33: Differential zone representation

The instantaneous quantities are constantly changing in time, therefore, RMS values of
the incoming, outgoing and differential currents (that is, Iin, Iout and Id respectively) are
used in the algorithm. These quantities are calculated over last power system cycle (that is,
16.66ms long, moving window for 60Hz system). The only requirement for this type of
calculation is that the last twenty samples of the instantaneous quantity must be stored in
the IED internal memory. The calculated values of Iin and Id are available as service
values on local HMI.

When all six values (that is, iin, iout, id, Iin, Iout and Id) are calculated, they are passed
further to the general differential protection function and open CT algorithm for further
processing to the differential and open CT algorithms.

CT saturation
Differential relays do not measure directly the primary currents in the high voltage
conductors, but the secondary currents of magnetic core current transformers, which are
installed in all high-voltage bays. Because the current transformer is a non-linear
measuring device, under high current conditions in the primary CT circuit, the secondary
CT current can be drastically different from the original primary current. This is caused by
CT saturation, a phenomenon that is well known to protection engineers. This
phenomenon is especially relevant for bus differential protection applications, because it
has the tendency to cause unwanted operation of the differential relay.

Another difficulty is the large number of main CTs (that is, up to 24x3 for REB670 single
phase and up to 8x3 CTs for REB670 three phase version) which can be connected to the
differential IED. If the CT saturation has to be checked and preventive measures taken for
every HV CT connected to the protection zone on one-by-one basis, the differential relay
algorithm would be slow and quite complex. Therefore, only the properties of incoming,
outgoing and differential currents are used in order to cope with CT saturation of any main
CT connected to the IED as shown in figure 34.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 135

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

id

iin

iout
Id_mod
CT saturation compensation logic
Id

Iin

Iout

en01000148.vsd

IEC01000148 V1 EN

Figure 34: CT saturation compensation logic inside REB670 terminal

This CT saturation compensation logic effectively suppresses the false differential current
by looking into properties of the six input quantities. Output of the logic is modified RMS
value of the differential current Id_mod, which has quite small value during external faults
followed by CT saturation or full Id value in case of an internal fault.

This logic incorporate a memory feature as well in order to cope with full CT remanence
in the faulty overhead line bay in case of a high speed autoreclosing onto permanent fault.

By this approach a new, patented differential algorithm has been formed, which is
completely stable for all external faults and operates very fast in case of an internal fault.
All problems caused by the non-linearity of the CTs are solved in an innovative numerical
way on the basic principles described above.

Tripping criteria
To provide reliable but fast differential protection, a multiple tripping criterion is
implemented in the general differential protection function.

The main tripping criteria can be listed as follows:

• Minimum differential current level (Id >DiffOperLev)

• RMS tripping criteria (Id_mod >0.53 * Iin)
• Instantaneous tripping criteria based only on properties of iin, iout and id
• No pick-up of the Block binary input

136 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

• No operation of open CT algorithm

• Sensitive differential current level (Id>SensOperLev) which can be enable or disable.
• Check zone differential operation can also supervise the trip output signal. This
feature can be enable or disabled.

These tripping conditions are then arranged in an AND gate in order to provide final trip
signal to the binary output contacts of the terminal.

The trip from differential zone can be either latched or self rest in accordance with end user
settings (note that this is not applied to the trip of each phase from differential zone).
Figure 35 shows the simplified internal trip logic for the busbar protection.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 137

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

TRZONE TREXTZ
tripZoneA from Bay01
tripZoneA from Bay02
TREXTBAY
OR
...

tripZoneA from Baynn OR

SensDiffOper = On
ENSENS

Iin a 0-tSensDiff TRSENS

a>b 0 AND
SensIinBlock b 3s 0

Id a
a>b
SensOperLevel b

BLKST

ZA Diff Algorithm

TRIPLX
Id OR
AND

Iin
OR
OCTBlock AND
CheckZoneSup = Off
CZTrip OR

BLOCK
AND 0
Operation = On 0-tTripHold

AND TRIP
AND S OR
AND
RSTTRIP R

DiffTripOper = Latched ZATrip-cont.

ANSI06000072-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000072 V2 EN

Figure 35: Simplified Zone internal trip logic for one phase

Dual monitoring of differential protection status is available. The first monitoring feature
operates after settable time delay when differential current is higher than the user settable
level. This feature can for example be used to design automatic reset logic for previously
described open CT detection feature. The second monitoring feature operates

138 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

immediately when the busbar through-going current is bigger than the user settable level.
Both of these monitoring features are phase segregated and they give out binary signals,
which can be either used to trigger disturbance recorder or for alarming purposes.

Id a 0-tIdAlarm ALDIFF
a>b
IdAlarmLev b 0

Iin a ALIIN
a>b
IinAlarmLev b

en06000071_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000071 V1 EN

Figure 36: Simplified logic for Zone supervision features

6.1.5.2 Open CT detection

The three input quantities into the open CT detection algorithm are:

• Id = RMS value of the differential current

• Iin = RMS value of the incoming current
• Iout = RMS value of the outgoing current

It is to be noted that the open CT detection algorithm does not know the number of
connected CT inputs into the IED.

The open CT detection algorithm is completely phase-segregated. Therefore, it is

explained for one phase only.

Fast operating open CT detection logic instantly detects the moment when a healthy CT
secondary circuit carrying the load current is accidently opened (that is, current
interrupted to the differential relay). The logic is based on the perception that the total
busbar through-load current is the same before and after that CT is open circuited.

In order to prevent false operation of this logic in case of a fault or disturbance in the power
system, the total through-load current must not have big changes three seconds before the
open CT condition is detected.

When one CT secondary circuit is open circuited during normal through-load condition
one measuring point is lost and, therefore, the following should hold true:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 139

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

• values of Iin and Iout were equal one cycle before

• value of Iin remains constant (that is, unchanged)
• value of Iout drops for more than pre-set value of OCTOperLev
• value of Id rises for more than pre-set value of OCTOperLev
• value of the sum Iout + Id is equal to value of Iin one cycle before

When all above conditions are simultaneously detected open CT condition is declared, the
trip output of the affected phase is blocked and alarm output is set

It is to be noted that this logic can only detect an instant of time when an already connected
CT with the secondary load current is open circuited. This logic do not detect, for example,
the situation when a new bay is connected to the differential zone, but its CT secondary
circuits are short circuited or open circuited.

Slow operating open CT detection logic will detect most abnormalities in the CT
secondary circuits or in the Zone Selection logic, but with the time delay determined by
setting parameter tSlowOCT. The logic is based on the perception that the values of Iin and
Iout shall be equal during normal through-load situation.

This logic will operate when:

• there was not any big through-load current change during last five seconds
• value of Iin is much bigger than value of Iout (0.9·Iin > Iout)
• Id > OCTOperLevel

When these conditions are fulfilled for longer than time defined by the tSlowOCT
parameter, the open CT condition is declared.

Note that the setting of tSlowOCT should always be longer than 1 s.

140 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

SlowOCTOper=Off

Slow OCT Algorithm

AND 0-tSlowOCT SOCT

Id a S
a>b 0 AND
OCTOperLevel b
R

FastOCTOper=Off

Fast OCT Algorithm

Id a AND FOCT
a>b AND S
OCTOperLevel b
R

100ms
RSTOCT
AND

Id a
a>b
DiffOperLevel b
OR

SlowOCTOper= AND
Supervise

Id a
a>b
OCTReleaseLev b

OCT
AND
FastOCTOper= OR
Supervise AND

OCTBlock-cont.
Id a
a>b
OCTReleaseLev b

en06000074_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000074 V1 EN

Figure 37: Simplified internal logic for fast and slow OCT features

6.1.6 Check zone BCZTPDIF, BCZSPDIF (87B)

6.1.6.1 Functionality

For busbar protection in double busbar stations when dynamic zone selection is needed,
it is sometimes required to include the overall differential zone (that is, check zone).
Hence, the built-in, overall check zone is available in the IED. Because the built-in check
zone current measurement is not dependent on the disconnector status, this feature ensures

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 141

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

stability of Busbar differential protection even for completely wrong status indication
from the busbar disconnectors. It is to be noted that the overall check zone, only supervise
the usual differential protection operation. The external trip commands, breaker failure
backup-trip commands and sensitive differential protection operation are not supervised
by the overall check zone.

The overall check zone has simple current operating algorithm, which ensures check zone
operation for all internal faults regardless the fault current distribution. To achieve this,
the outgoing current from the overall check zone is used as restraint quantity. If required,
the check zone operation can be activated externally by a binary signal.

Operating characteristic of the check zone is shown in figure 38.

Id [Primary Amps]

Operate
region

Oper Level
s=0.0-0.90 (settable)

Iout [Primary Amps]

en06000062.vsd
IEC06000062 V1 EN

Figure 38: Check zone operating characteristic

6.1.6.2 Explanation of Check zone function block

Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block inputs

When EXTTRIP binary input has logical value one, operation of the check zone is forced
(that is, TRIP output signal set to one). Therefore, this signal can be used to connect other
release criteria (for example, pickup signal from external undervoltage IED) .

142 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block outputs

• TRIP, this binary output is used as general trip command from the check zone. It is
activated when either differential protection in check zone operates or when external
signal EXTTRIP is set one.
• TR_x, this binary output has logical value one whenever check zone TRIP output
signal is initiated by operation of the differential protection in the corresponding
phase (only available in 3Ph-version)
• IIN, this is output which represents internally calculated instantaneous (sample
based) incoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function in
order to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IIN_x, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated instantaneous
(sample based) incoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder
function in order to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 3Ph-
version)
• ID, this is output which represents internally calculated instantaneous (sample based)
differential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function in order
to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• ID_x, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated instantaneous
(sample based) differential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder
function in order to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 3Ph-
version)

Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block settings

• Operation, this setting determines whether check zone is in operation or out of
operation. One of the following two alternatives is selected for every function block:
1. On, when this mode is selected the check zone is enabled
2. Off, when this mode is selected the check zone is out of operation
• OperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for the check zone. It
shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 1000A.
• Slope, this setting determines the slope of the check zone operating characteristic. It
can be set from 0.00 to 0.90 in step of 0.01. Default value 0.15.

Check zone uses simple differential algorithm. Outgoing current is used for restraining in
order to insure check zone operation for all internal faults.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 143

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

EXTTRIP

CZ Diff Algorithm

Id TRIP
OR
OR AND

CZTrip-cont.
OR
Iout

Operation = On
Operation = Off

en06000073_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000073 V1 EN

Figure 39: Simplified Check zone internal logic

6.1.6.3 Function block

BTCZ-
BCZTPDIF_87B
EXTTRIP TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
en06000161_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000161 V1 EN

Figure 40: BCZTPDIF function block (Check zone, 3ph)

BCZSPDIF
EXTTRIP TRIP

IEC06000162-2-en.vsd
IEC06000162 V2 EN

Figure 41: BCZSPDIF function block (Check zone, 1ph)

6.1.6.4 Signals
Table 64: BCZTPDIF (87B) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
EXTTRIP BOOLEAN 0 External check zone trip

144 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 65: BCZTPDIF (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Check zone general trip
TR_A BOOLEAN Check zone trip phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Check zone trip phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Check zone trip phase C

Table 66: BCZSPDIF (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
EXTTRIP BOOLEAN 0 External check zone trip

Table 67: BCZSPDIF (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Check zone general trip

6.1.6.5 Settings
Table 68: BCZTPDIF (87B) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Check zone operation
Enabled
OperLevel 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Check zone operation level in primary amperes
Slope 0.00 - 0.90 - 0.01 0.15 Check zone slope

Table 69: BCZSPDIF (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Check zone operation
Enabled
OperLevel 10 - 99999 A 1 1000 Check zone operation level in primary amperes
Slope 0.00 - 0.90 - 0.01 0.15 Check zone slope

6.1.7 Zone selection

Typically CT secondary circuits from every bay in the station are connected to the busbar
protection. The built-in software feature called “Zone Selection” gives a simple but
efficient control over the connected CTs to busbar protection IED in order to provide fully

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 145

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

operational differential protection scheme for multi-zone applications on both small and
large buses.

Flexible, software based dynamic Zone Selection enables easy and fast adaptation to the
most common substation arrangements such as single busbar with or without transfer bus,
double busbar with or without transfer bus, one-and-a-half breakerbreaker-and-a-half
stations, double busbar-double breaker stations, ring busbars and so on. The software
based dynamic Zone Selections ensures:

1. Dynamic linking of measured CT currents to the appropriate differential protection

zone as required by substation topology
2. Efficient merging of the two differential zones when required by substation topology
(that is, zone interconnection)
3. Selective operation of busbar differential protection to ensure tripping only of circuit
breakers connected to the faulty zone
4. Correct marshaling of backup-trip commands from internally integrated or external
circuit breaker failure protections to all surrounding circuit breakers
5. Easy incorporation of bus-section and/or bus-coupler bays (that is, tie-breakers) with
one or two sets of CTs into the protection scheme
6. Disconnector and/or circuit breaker status supervision

Zone Selection logic accompanied by optionally available end-fault and/or circuit breaker
failure protections ensure minimum possible tripping time and selectivity for faults within
the blind spot or the end zone between main CT and affiliated circuit breaker. Therefore,
the IED offers best possible coverage for such faults in feeder and bus-section/bus-coupler
bays.

The Zone Selection functionality consists of the following function blocks:

• Switch Status, for monitoring of disconnector/circuit breaker status

• Bay, which provide all necessary interface for one primary bay to/from busbar
protection
• Zone Interconnection, which offer facility to effectively merge two zones when
required

6.1.8 Switch status monitoring BDCGAPC

6.1.8.1 Functionality

For stations with complex primary layout (that is, double busbar single breaker station
with or without transfer bus) the information about busbar disconnector position in every
bay is crucial information for busbar protection. The positions of these disconnectors then
actually determine which CT input (that is, bay) is connected to which differential
protection zone. For some more advanced features like end-fault or blind-spot protection

146 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

the actual status of the circuit breaker in some or even all bays can be vital information for
busbar protection as well. The switch function block is used to take the status of two
auxiliary contacts from the primary device, evaluate them and then to deliver the device
primary contact position to the rest of the zone selection logic.

For such applications typically two auxiliary contacts (that is, normally open and normally
closed auxiliary contacts) from each relevant primary switching object shall be connected
to the IED. Then the status for every individual primary switching object will be
determined. The dedicated function block for each primary switching object is available
in order to determine the status of the object primary contacts. By a parameter setting one
of the following two logical schemes can be selected for each primary object individually
by the end user:

• If not open then closed (that is, as in RADSS schemes)

• Open or closed only when clearly indicated by aux contact status (that is, as in INX
schemes)

Table 70 gives quick overview about both schemes.

Note that the first scheme only requires fast breaking normally closed auxiliary contact
(that is, b contact) for proper operation. The timing of normally open auxiliary contact is
not critical because it is only used for supervision of the primary object status. The second
scheme in addition requires properly timed-adjusted, early-making normally open
auxiliary contact (that is, early making a contact) for proper operation.

Regardless which scheme is used the time-delayed disconnector/circuit breaker status

supervision alarm is available (that is, 00 or 11 auxiliary contact status). How two
integrated differential protection zones behave when disconnector alarm appears is freely
configurable by the end user.

It is possible by a parameter setting to override the primary object status as either

permanently open or permanently closed. This feature can be useful during testing,
installation and commissioning of the busbar protection scheme. At the same time,
separate alarm is given to indicate that the actual object status is overwritten by a setting
parameter.

It is to be noted that it is as well possible to use only normally closed auxiliary contacts for
Zone Selection logic. In that case the Switch function blocks are not used.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 147

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 70: Treatment of primary object auxiliary contact status

Primary equipment Status in busbar protection Alarm facility
Normally Open Normally Closed when when Alarm after Information visible
auxiliary contact auxiliary contact “Scheme 1 “Scheme 2 INX” settable time on local HMI
status status RADSS” is selected delay
(that is, “closed” (that is, “open” or is selected
or “a” contact) “b” contact)
open open closed Last position yes intermediate_00
saved
open closed open open no open

closed open closed closed no closed

closed closed closed closed yes badState_11

6.1.8.2 Explanation of Switch status monitoring function block

Inputs
• DISABLE, when this binary input has logical value zero function works in
accordance with the selected scheme (see setting OperMode). When this binary input
has logical value one, OPEN and CLOSED outputs from the function are
unconditionally set to logical value zero. All other outputs work as usual.
• NO, to this binary input normally open (that is, ”closed” or “a” contact) of the primary
switching object shall be connected
• NC, to this binary input normally closed (that is, ”OPEN” or “b” contact) of the
primary switching object shall be connected.

Outputs
• CLOSED, this binary output has logical value one when the internal logic determines
that the primary object is closed (for more information about available logical
schemes, refer to table 70)
• OPEN, this binary output has logical value one when the internal logic determines
that the primary object is open (for more info about available logical schemes, refer
to table 70)
• ALARM, this binary output has logical value one when pre-set timer set under setting
tAlarm expires and the auxiliary contacts still have illegal status (that is, 00 or 11)
• FORCED, this binary output has logical value zero when the object status is forced
via parameter setting OperMode

Settings
• OperMode, this setting determines the operating logic used within the function block.
One of the following five alternatives shall be selected for every function block

148 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

1. Off, when this mode is selected the entire function block is switched off (that is,
de-activated)
2. Scheme1_RADSS, when this mode is selected the internal logic behaves as
described in table 70/row 3. Note that this logical scheme has the minimal
requirements regarding the auxiliary contacts timing. It is recommended
scheme to be used, especially to determine the circuit breaker status
3. Scheme2_INX, when this mode is selected the internal logic behaves as
described in table 70/row 4. Note that this logical scheme has increased
requirements regarding the auxiliary contacts timing, especially for normally
open (that is, a contact), as explained intable 70.
4. ForceOpen, when this mode is selected the internal logic consider the primary
object as open regardless the status of the auxiliary contacts. However, note that
ALARM output will still work as usual and that FORCED binary output will be
unconditionally set to one
5. ForceClosed, when this mode is selected the internal logic consider the primary
object as closed regardless the actual status of the auxiliary contacts. However,
note that ALARM output will still work as usual and that FORCED binary
output will be unconditionally set to one
• tAlarm, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to give an alarm output when illegal
status of auxiliary input contacts (that is, 00 or 11) is given to the function. Timer can
be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in step of 0.01s. Default value is 15.00s.

6.1.8.3 Function block

BDCGAPC (87B)
DISABLE CLOSED
NO OPEN
NC ALARM
FORCED

ANSI13000306-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000306 V1 EN

Figure 42: BDCGAPC (87B) function block

6.1.8.4 Signals
Table 71: BDCGAPC (87B) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
DISABLE BOOLEAN 0 OPEN & CLOSED outputs are both set unconditionally
to zero
NO BOOLEAN 0 Connect normally open auxiliary contact (a contact)
here
NC BOOLEAN 0 Connect normally closed auxiliary contact (b contact)
here

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 149

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 72: BDCGAPC (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
CLOSED BOOLEAN Indicates that primary object is closed
OPEN BOOLEAN Indicates that primary object is open
ALARM BOOLEAN Delayed alarm for abnormal aux. contact status, 00 or
11
FORCED BOOLEAN Primary object status forced to open or closed by setting

6.1.8.5 Settings
Table 73: BDCGAPC (87B) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperMode Disabled - - Disabled Switch operating mode (Scheme 1, Scheme 2
Scheme1_RADSS or forced)
Scheme2_INX
ForceOpen
ForceClosed
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 15.00 Alarm time delay for abnormal aux. contact
status

6.1.8.6 Monitored data

Table 74: BDCGAPC (87B) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
POSITION INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Switch position status
00
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed

150 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 75: BDCGAPC_01 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUTPUT01 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT02 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT03 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT04 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT05 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT06 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT07 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT08 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 151

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT09 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT10 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT11 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT12 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT13 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT14 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT15 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT16 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT17 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

152 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT18 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT19 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT20 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed

Table 76: BDCGAPC_21 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUTPUT21 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT22 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT23 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT24 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT25 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 153

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT26 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT27 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT28 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT29 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT30 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT31 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT32 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT33 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT34 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

154 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT35 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT36 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT37 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT38 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT39 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT40 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 155

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 77: BDCGAPC_41 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUTPUT41 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT42 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT43 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT44 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT45 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT46 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT47 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT48 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

156 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT49 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT50 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT51 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT52 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT53 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT54 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT55 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT56 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT57 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 157

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT58 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT59 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT60 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed

Table 78: BDCGAPC_61 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUTPUT61 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT62 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT63 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT64 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT65 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

158 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT66 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT67 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT68 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT69 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT70 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT71 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT72 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT73 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT74 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 159

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT75 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT76 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT77 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT78 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT79 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT80 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed

160 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 79: BDCGAPC_81 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUTPUT81 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT82 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT83 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT84 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT85 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT86 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT87 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT88 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 161

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUTPUT89 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT90 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT91 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT92 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT93 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT94 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT95 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed
OUTPUT96 INTEGER 0=intermediate_ - Presents the value from
00 corresponding Input
1=Open
2=Closed
3=badState_11
4=NotUsed

162 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.9 Bay BUTPTRC, BUSPTRC (87B)

6.1.9.1 Functionality

Each CT input is allocated to one dedicated bay function block. This function block is used
to provide complete user interface for all signals from and towards this bay. It is also used
to influence bay measured current.

In order to guarantee proper operation of the IED, the first instance of Bay
function block must always be used in the configuration.

It is possible by a parameter setting CTConnection to connect or disconnect the CT input

to the bay function block. Once the CT input is connected to the bay function block this
associated current input can be included to or excluded from the two internally available
differential functions in software. This can be done by a parameter setting for simple
station layouts (that is, breaker-and-a-half stations) or alternatively via dedicated logical
scheme (that is, double busbar stations). For each bay the end user have to select one of the
following five alternatives:

• Permanently connect this bay current to zone A (that is, ZA)

• Permanently connect this bay current to zone B (that is, ZB)
• Permanently connect this bay current to zone A and inverted bay current to ZB (that
is, ZA and -ZB)
• Connect this bay current to ZA or ZB depending on the logical status of the two input
binary signals available on this bay function block. These two input signals will
include measured current to the respective zone when their logical value is one (that
is, CntrlIncludes). This option is used together with above described Switch function
blocks in order to provide complete Zone Selection logic
• Connect the bay current to ZA or ZB depending on the logical status of the two input
binary signals available on this bay function block. These two signals will include
measured current to the respective zone when their logical value is zero (that is,
CntrlExcludes). This option is typically used when only normally closed auxiliary
contacts from the busbar disconnector are available to the Zone Selection logic

At the same time, an additional feature for instantaneous or time delayed disconnection or
even inversion of the connected bay current via separate logical signals is also available.
This feature is provided in order to facilitate for bus-section or bus-coupler CT
disconnection for tie-breakers with a CT only on one side of the circuit breaker. This
ensures correct and fast fault clearance of faults between the CT and the circuit breaker
within these bays. The same feature can be individually used in any feeder bay to optimize
Busbar differential protection performance, when feeder circuit breaker is open. Thus, the
end-fault protection for faults between circuit breaker and the CT is available. However,
to use this feature circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and closing command to the circuit

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 163

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

breaker shall be wired to the binary inputs of the IED. Therefore, he IED offers best
possible coverage for these special faults between CT and circuit breaker in feeder and
bus-section/bus-coupler bays.

Within the Bay function block it is decided by a parameter setting how this bay should
behave during zone interconnection (that is, load transfer). For each bay individually one
of the following three options can be selected:

• Bay current is forced out from both zones during zone interconnection (used for bus-
coupler bays)
• Bay current is unconditionally forced into both zones during zone interconnection
(used in special applications)
• Bay current is connected to both zones during zone interconnection if the bay was
previously connected to one of the two zones (typically used for feeder bays)

The third option ensures that the feeder, which is out of service, is not connected to any of
the two zones during zone interconnection.

Within the Bay function block it is decided by a parameter setting whether this bay should
be connected to the check zone or not. In this way the end user has simple control over the
bays, which shall be connected to the overall check zone.

By appropriate configuration logic it is possible to take any bay (that is, CT input) out of
service. This can be done from the local HMI or externally via binary signal. In that case
all internal current measuring functions (that is, differential protection, sensitive
differential protection, check zone, breaker failure protection and overcurrent protection)
are disabled. At the same time, any trip command to this bay circuit breaker can be
inhibited.

Via two dedicated binary input signals it is possible to:

• Trip only the bay circuit breaker (used for integrated OC protection tripping)
• Trip the whole differential zone to which this bay is presently connected (used for
backup-trip command from either integrated or external bay circuit breaker failure
protection)

Finally dedicated trip binary output from the Bay function block is available in order to
provide common trip signal to the bay circuit breaker from busbar differential protection,
breaker failure protection, backup overcurrent protection and so on.

In this way the interface to the user is kept as simple as possible and IED engineering work
is quite straight forward.

164 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.9.2 Explanation of Bay function block

Inputs
• I3PB1, 3ph CT input; applicable for 3-phase version of the terminal
• ISI1, 1ph CT input; applicable for 1-phase version of the terminal
• BLKTR, when this binary input has logical value one all trip commands from the bay
function block are prevented including busbar protection, breaker failure and external
trip commands
• CTRLZA, this binary input is used to control the bay CT connection to the differential
zone A. Note that the status of this binary input is considered ONLY if the value of
setting parameter ZoneSel is either
• CtrlIncludes when logical value one of this input will include current to zone A,
or
• CtrlExcludes when logical value zero of this input will include current to zone
A
• CTRLZB, this binary input is used to control the bay CT connection to the differential
zone B. Note that the status of this binary input is considered ONLY if the value of
setting parameter ZoneSel is either
• CtrlIncludes when logical value one of this input will include current to zone B,
or
• CtrlExcludes when logical value zero of this input will include current to zone
B
• ZEROCUR, when this binary input has logical value one the bay CT current is
unconditionally forced to zero (that is, internally multiplied with zero) after the
internal delay on pickup timer has expired. The time delay is determined by setting
parameter tZeroCurrent. Note that the zero current value will be given to all
differential zones, including the check zone, to which this bay is currently connected
• INVCUR, when this binary input has logical value one the bay CT current will be
inverted (that is, internally multiplied with –1) after the internal delay on pickup timer
has expired. The time delay is determined by setting parameter tInvertCurrent. Note
that the inverted current value will be given to all differential zones, including the
check zone, to which this bay is currently connected. However, it shall be noted that
the INVCUR input has lower priority than the ZEROCUR input. This means that,
when both of them simultaneously have logical value one, and both timers have
expired, the bay CT current will be forced to zero.
• TRZONE, when this binary input has logical value one the trip signal will be sent to
the differential zone to which this bay is currently connected. As a consequence all
bays connected to that zone will receive the trip signal. To this input the breaker
failure protection backup trip command for this bay is typically connected. This will
insure that all breakers connected to the same zone with the failed breaker will be

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 165

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

tripped. Note that this tripping is not supervised by the Check Zone operation, in
application where Check Zone is enabled.
• TRBAY, when this binary input has logical value one the output TRIP signal from the
same function block will be activated. In this way only the bay circuit breaker is
tripped. No any other breaker in the station will receive this trip command. This input
is used to give backup overcurrent trip command to the bay CB.

Outputs
• TRIP, this binary output shall be used as dedicated three-pole trip command to the bay
circuit breaker. It will be activated when the differential zone, to which this bay is
currently connected, operates for internal fault, or in case of breaker failure in some
other bay connected to the same zone (see description for input TRZONE). It operates
when external trip signal is given to this bay (see description for input TRBAY).
• CONNZA, this binary output has logical value one whenever this bay CT is
connected to zone A
• CONNZB, this binary output has logical value one whenever this bay CT is
connected to zone B
• CONNBAY, this is not a binary output. It has 9 defined states (Enumerators) and is
used to display actual "BayConnections" information on the LHMI.

Settings
• CTConnection, this setting determines how the hardware CT input is connected to
bay function block in software. One of the following three alternatives shall be
selected for every function block:
1. NotConnected, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input is
disconnected from the bay function block in software. This setting shall be used
for spare CT inputs in the IED or for a CT inputs where only for example,
breaker failure protection is required (that is, for middle breaker in breaker-and-
a-half configuration)
2. Connected, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input is connected to
the bay function block in software. This is normal setting for a CT input which
is used for busbar protection
3. Conn Inverted, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input is connected
to the bay function block in software, but the CT current is inverted (that is,
multiplied with –1). This is used only in special applications.
• ZoneSel, this setting determines how the bay CT input connection to the differential
zones is controlled within the IED internal logic. One of the five alternatives listed
below shall be selected for every function block. CtrlIncludes and CtrlExcludes are
typically used for feeder bays in double busbar-single breaker stations where
dynamic connections between CT and differential zones are required. It shall be
noted that when one of the last two modes are selected and in the same time the
operation of the Zone Interconnection function block is set to "On" the zone

166 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

interconnection (that is, merging between ZA & ZB) will be automatically started as
soon as the bay is connected to both zones simultaneously (that is, zone
interconnection on a feeder bay).
1. FixedToZA, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is always connected
to the differential zone A. This is for example used for simple busbar
configurations where dynamic connections between CTs and differential zones
are not required (that is, single zone, double bus-double breaker or breaker-and-
a-half stations)
2. FixedToZB, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is always connected
to the differential zone B. This is for example used for simple busbar
configurations where dynamic connections between CTs and differential zones
are not required (that is, double bus-double breaker or breaker-and-a-half
stations)
3. FixedToZA&-ZB, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is always
connected to the differential zone A and its inverted value to the differential
zone B. This is for example used for bus-tie bays with just one set of main CT.
In this way the same current is easily given to both differential zones. It shall be
noted that the CT staring shall be set with respect to zone A.
4. CtrlIncludes, when this mode is selected the bay CT input will be: connected
to zone A when binary input CTRLZA into the function block have logical
value one connected to zone B when binary input CTRLZB into the function
block have logical value one
5. CtrlExcludes, when this mode is selected the bay CT input will be: connected
to zone A when binary input CTRLZA into the function block have logical
value zero connected to zone B when binary input CTRLZB into the function
block have logical value zero
• ZoneSwitching, this setting determines how the bay CT shall behave when zone
interconnection is active (that is, merging between ZA & ZB). One of the following
three alternatives shall be selected for every function block:
1. ForceOut, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is unconditionally
disconnected from both differential zones when zone interconnection feature is
active. This setting is typically used for bus-coupler bay in double busbar
stations.
2. ForceIn, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is unconditionally
connected to both differential zones when zone interconnection feature is
active.
3. Conditionally, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is connected to both
differential zones when zone interconnection feature is active if it was
previously connected to at least one of them. This setting is typically used for
feeder bays in double busbar-single breaker stations, and for all spare/future
bays.
• CheckZoneSel, this setting determines the bay CT input connection towards the check
zone. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for every function block:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 167

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

1. NotConnected, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is not connected to
the overall check zone. This setting is typically used for bus-coupler bay in
double busbar-single breaker stations.
2. Connected, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is connected to the
overall check zone. This setting is typically used for feeder bays in double
busbar-single breaker stations.
• tTripPulse, this pulse timer is used in order to guaranty minimum trip pulse duration
from the bay function block. Pulse time can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of
0.001s. Default value is 0.200s.
• tZeroCurrent, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to unconditionally force bay
current to zero when ZEROCUR input into the function block has logical value one.
Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s. Default value is
0.200s.
• tInvertCurrent, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to invert bay current when
INVCUR input into the function block has logical value one. Time delay can be set
from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s. Default value is 0.200s.

6.1.9.3 Function block

BUTPTRC_B1 (87B)
I3PB1* TRIP
BLKTR CONNZA
CTRLZA CONNZB
CTRLZB CONNBAY
ZEROCUR
INVCUR
TRZONE
TRBAY

ANSI06000164-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000164 V1 EN

Figure 43: BUTPTRC (87B) function block (Bay, 3ph), example for BUTPTRC_B1 to
BUTPTRC_B8

BUSPTRC_B1 (87B)
ISI1* TRIP
BLKTR CONNZA
CTRLZA CONNZB
CTRLZB CONNBAY
ZEROCUR
INVCUR
TRZONE
TRBAY

ANSI06000165-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000165 V1 EN

Figure 44: BUSPTRC (87B) function block (Bay, 1ph), example for BUSPTRC_B1
to BUSPTRC_B24

168 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.9.4 Signals
Table 80: BUTPTRC_B1 (87B) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3PB1 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 81: BUTPTRC_B1 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 82: BUTPTRC_B2 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PB2 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 169

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 83: BUTPTRC_B2 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 84: BUTPTRC_B3 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PB3 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 85: BUTPTRC_B3 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 86: BUTPTRC_B4 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PB4 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

170 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 87: BUTPTRC_B4 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 88: BUTPTRC_B5 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PB5 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 89: BUTPTRC_B5 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 90: BUTPTRC_B6 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PB6 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 171

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 91: BUTPTRC_B6 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 92: BUTPTRC_B7 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PB7 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 93: BUTPTRC_B7 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 94: BUTPTRC_B8 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PB8 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

172 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 95: BUTPTRC_B8 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 96: BUSPTRC_B1 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI1 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 97: BUSPTRC_B1 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 98: BUSPTRC_B2 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI2 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 173

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 99: BUSPTRC_B2 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 100: BUSPTRC_B3 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI3 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 101: BUSPTRC_B3 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 102: BUSPTRC_B4 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI4 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

174 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 103: BUSPTRC_B4 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 104: BUSPTRC_B5 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI5 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 105: BUSPTRC_B5 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 106: BUSPTRC_B6 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI6 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 175

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 107: BUSPTRC_B6 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 108: BUSPTRC_B7 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI7 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 109: BUSPTRC_B7 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 110: BUSPTRC_B8 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI8 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

176 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 111: BUSPTRC_B8 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 112: BUSPTRC_B9 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI9 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 113: BUSPTRC_B9 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 114: BUSPTRC_B10 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI10 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 177

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 115: BUSPTRC_B10 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 116: BUSPTRC_B11 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI11 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 117: BUSPTRC_B11 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 118: BUSPTRC_B12 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI12 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

178 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 119: BUSPTRC_B12 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 120: BUSPTRC_B13 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI13 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 121: BUSPTRC_B13 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 122: BUSPTRC_B14 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI14 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 179

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 123: BUSPTRC_B14 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 124: BUSPTRC_B15 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI15 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 125: BUSPTRC_B15 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 126: BUSPTRC_B16 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI16 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

180 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 127: BUSPTRC_B16 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 128: BUSPTRC_B17 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI17 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 129: BUSPTRC_B17 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 130: BUSPTRC_B18 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI18 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 181

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 131: BUSPTRC_B18 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 132: BUSPTRC_B19 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI19 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 133: BUSPTRC_B19 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 134: BUSPTRC_B20 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI20 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

182 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 135: BUSPTRC_B20 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 136: BUSPTRC_B21 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI21 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 137: BUSPTRC_B21 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 138: BUSPTRC_B22 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI22 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 183

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 139: BUSPTRC_B22 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 140: BUSPTRC_B23 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI23 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

Table 141: BUSPTRC_B23 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

Table 142: BUSPTRC_B24 (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI24 GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block bay trip
CTRLZA BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB BOOLEAN 0 Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR BOOLEAN 0 Force bay current to zero
INVCUR BOOLEAN 0 Invert bay current
TRZONE BOOLEAN 0 Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY BOOLEAN 0 External bay trip

184 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 143: BUSPTRC_B24 (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB BOOLEAN Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY INTEGER Status of bay to zones connections

6.1.9.5 Settings
Table 144: BUTPTRC_B1 (87B) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 145: BUTPTRC_B2 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 185

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 146: BUTPTRC_B3 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 147: BUTPTRC_B4 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

186 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 148: BUTPTRC_B5 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 149: BUTPTRC_B6 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 187

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 150: BUTPTRC_B7 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 151: BUTPTRC_B8 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

188 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 152: BUSPTRC_B1 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 153: BUSPTRC_B2 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 189

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 154: BUSPTRC_B3 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 155: BUSPTRC_B4 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

190 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 156: BUSPTRC_B5 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 157: BUSPTRC_B6 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 191

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 158: BUSPTRC_B7 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 159: BUSPTRC_B8 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

192 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 160: BUSPTRC_B9 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 161: BUSPTRC_B10 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 193

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 162: BUSPTRC_B11 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 163: BUSPTRC_B12 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

194 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 164: BUSPTRC_B13 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 165: BUSPTRC_B14 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 195

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 166: BUSPTRC_B15 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 167: BUSPTRC_B16 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

196 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 168: BUSPTRC_B17 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 169: BUSPTRC_B18 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 197

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 170: BUSPTRC_B19 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 171: BUSPTRC_B20 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

198 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 172: BUSPTRC_B21 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 173: BUSPTRC_B22 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 199

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 174: BUSPTRC_B23 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

Table 175: BUSPTRC_B24 (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTConnection Conn Inverted - - Connected Hardware CT input connection to the bay
NotConnected function block
Connected
ZoneSel FixedToZA - - CtrlIncludes How bay/CT is controlled toward the zones
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSwitching ForceOut - - ForceIn Bay/CT status during zone switching
ForceIn
Conditionally
CheckZoneSel NotConnected - - NotConnected Bay/CT status for the check zone
Connected
Table continues on next page

200 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Bay trip pulse duration if zone trips in SelfReset
mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to force current to zero via binary
signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to invert current via binary signal

6.1.9.6 Monitored data

Table 176: BUTPTRC_B1 (87B) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay01: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay01: ZA - - connections
3=Bay01: - ZB -
4=Bay01: ZA ZB
-
7=Bay01: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay01: - - CZ
5=Bay01: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay01: - ZB
CZ

Table 177: BUTPTRC_B2 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay02: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay02: ZA - - connections
3=Bay02: - ZB -
4=Bay02: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay02: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay02: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay02: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay02: - - CZ

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 201

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 178: BUTPTRC_B3 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay03: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay03: ZA - - connections
3=Bay03: - ZB -
4=Bay03: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay03: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay03: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay03: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay03: - - CZ

Table 179: BUTPTRC_B4 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay04: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay04: ZA - - connections
3=Bay04: - ZB -
4=Bay04: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay04: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay04: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay04: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay04: - - CZ

Table 180: BUTPTRC_B5 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay05: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay05: ZA - - connections
3=Bay05: - ZB -
4=Bay05: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay05: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay05: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay05: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay05: - - CZ

202 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 181: BUTPTRC_B6 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay06: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay06: ZA - - connections
3=Bay06: - ZB -
4=Bay06: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay06: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay06: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay06: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay06: - - CZ

Table 182: BUTPTRC_B7 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay07: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay07: ZA - - connections
3=Bay07: - ZB -
4=Bay07: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay07: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay07: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay07: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay07: - - CZ

Table 183: BUTPTRC_B8 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay08: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay08: ZA - - connections
3=Bay08: - ZB -
4=Bay08: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay08: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay08: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay08: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay08: - - CZ

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 203

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 184: BUSPTRC_B1 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay01: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay01: ZA - - connections
3=Bay01: - ZB -
4=Bay01: ZA ZB
-
7=Bay01: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay01: - - CZ
5=Bay01: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay01: - ZB
CZ

Table 185: BUSPTRC_B2 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay02: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay02: ZA - - connections
3=Bay02: - ZB -
4=Bay02: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay02: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay02: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay02: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay02: - - CZ

Table 186: BUSPTRC_B3 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay03: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay03: ZA - - connections
3=Bay03: - ZB -
4=Bay03: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay03: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay03: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay03: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay03: - - CZ

204 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 187: BUSPTRC_B4 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay04: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay04: ZA - - connections
3=Bay04: - ZB -
4=Bay04: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay04: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay04: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay04: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay04: - - CZ

Table 188: BUSPTRC_B5 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay05: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay05: ZA - - connections
3=Bay05: - ZB -
4=Bay05: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay05: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay05: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay05: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay05: - - CZ

Table 189: BUSPTRC_B6 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay06: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay06: ZA - - connections
3=Bay06: - ZB -
4=Bay06: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay06: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay06: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay06: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay06: - - CZ

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 205

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 190: BUSPTRC_B7 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay07: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay07: ZA - - connections
3=Bay07: - ZB -
4=Bay07: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay07: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay07: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay07: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay07: - - CZ

Table 191: BUSPTRC_B8 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay08: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay08: ZA - - connections
3=Bay08: - ZB -
4=Bay08: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay08: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay08: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay08: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay08: - - CZ

Table 192: BUSPTRC_B9 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay09: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay09: ZA - - connections
3=Bay09: - ZB -
4=Bay09: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay09: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay09: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay09: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay09: - - CZ

206 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 193: BUSPTRC_B10 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay10: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay10: ZA - - connections
3=Bay10: - ZB -
4=Bay10: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay10: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay10: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay10: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay10: - - CZ

Table 194: BUSPTRC_B11 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay11: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay11: ZA - - connections
3=Bay11: - ZB -
4=Bay11: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay11: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay11: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay11: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay11: - - CZ

Table 195: BUSPTRC_B12 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay12: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay12: ZA - - connections
3=Bay12: - ZB -
4=Bay12: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay12: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay12: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay12: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay12: - - CZ

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 207

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 196: BUSPTRC_B13 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay13: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay13: ZA - - connections
3=Bay13: - ZB -
4=Bay13: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay13: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay13: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay13: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay13: - - CZ

Table 197: BUSPTRC_B14 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay14: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay14: ZA - - connections
3=Bay14: - ZB -
4=Bay14: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay14: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay14: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay14: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay14: - - CZ

Table 198: BUSPTRC_B15 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay15: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay15: ZA - - connections
3=Bay15: - ZB -
4=Bay15: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay15: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay15: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay15: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay15: - - CZ

208 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 199: BUSPTRC_B16 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay16: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay16: ZA - - connections
3=Bay16: - ZB -
4=Bay16: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay16: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay16: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay16: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay16: - - CZ

Table 200: BUSPTRC_B17 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay17: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay17: ZA - - connections
3=Bay17: - ZB -
4=Bay17: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay17: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay17: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay17: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay17: - - CZ

Table 201: BUSPTRC_B18 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay18: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay18: ZA - - connections
3=Bay18: - ZB -
4=Bay18: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay18: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay18: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay18: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay18: - - CZ

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 209

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 202: BUSPTRC_B19 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay19: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay19: ZA - - connections
3=Bay19: - ZB -
4=Bay19: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay19: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay19: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay19: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay19: - - CZ

Table 203: BUSPTRC_B20 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay20: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay20: ZA - - connections
3=Bay20: - ZB -
4=Bay20: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay20: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay20: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay20: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay20: - - CZ

Table 204: BUSPTRC_B21 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay21: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay21: ZA - - connections
3=Bay21: - ZB -
4=Bay21: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay21: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay21: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay21: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay21: - - CZ

210 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 205: BUSPTRC_B22 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay22: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay22: ZA - - connections
3=Bay22: - ZB -
4=Bay22: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay22: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay22: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay22: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay22: - - CZ

Table 206: BUSPTRC_B23 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay23: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay23: ZA - - connections
3=Bay23: - ZB -
4=Bay23: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay23: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay23: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay23: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay23: - - CZ

Table 207: BUSPTRC_B24 (87B) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CONNBAY INTEGER 1=Bay24: - - - - Status of bay to zones
2=Bay24: ZA - - connections
3=Bay24: - ZB -
4=Bay24: ZA ZB
-
5=Bay24: ZA -
CZ
6=Bay24: - ZB
CZ
7=Bay24: ZA ZB
CZ
8=Bay24: - - CZ

6.1.9.7 Bay operation principles

In order to have properly balanced differential function for the station busbar disconnector
switching arrangements, it is important to properly configure the zone selection data for

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 211

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

every connected current transformer. Due to this configuration parameter, the IED allows
an effective application for stations where the zone selection (that is, CT switching) is
required. This is possible due to the software facility to have full and easy control over all
CT inputs connected to the terminal. The philosophy is to allow every CT input to be
individually controlled by a setting parameter.

The setting parameters for the differential protection function (DFB) are set via the local
HMI or PCM600. See the technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in
local HMI.

Description of bay connection

The setting parameter for bay connection called ZoneSel can be individually set for every
CT. ZoneSel can be set to only one of the following five alternatives:

• FixedToZA, the CTx will be fixed to zone A.

• FixedToZB, the CTx will be fixed to zone B.
• FixedToZA&-ZB, the CTx is included to zone A and invert included to zone B.
• CtrlIncludes, the CTx will be included to zone A/zone B when the input signal
CTRLZA/CTRLZB is TRUE.
• CtrlExcludes, the CTx will be included to zone A/zone B when the input signal
CTRLZA/CTRLZB is FALSE (see figure 45).

When the last two options are used the CT input can be dynamically included or excluded
from the differential zone by simply controlling the dedicated inputs of the Bay function
block.

CTRLZA
AND 5 ms
OR CTtoZoneA-cont.
0 OR
AND
CTRLZB
AND 5 ms CTtoZoneB-cont.
OR
0 OR
ZoneSel=
CtrlIncludes AND
StrtLoadTransfBayxx-cont.
AND
ZoneSel=
CtrlExcludes
ZoneSel=
FixedToZA
ZoneSel= InvertCTtoZoneB-cont.
FixedToZB
ZoneSel=
FixedToZA&-ZB

en06000066_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000066 V1 EN

Figure 45: Zone selection logic

212 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Description of invert current and forcing current to zero

This logic is intended for binary input signals that give possibility to force current to zero
or invert the current. Two settable delays on timer tZeroCurrent and tInvertCurrent are
also implemented making sure that the right decision is taken, see figure 46.

ZEROCUR 0-tZeroCurrent
0
0.0
INV T
CU F
R 0-tInvertCurrent
0 -1.0
T
1.0
F X CurrentBayxx-cont.
X

CTConnection
Connected= 1
NotConnected= 0
ConnInverted= -1

A/D Conversion, Bayxx Current in

Multiplication with CT Ratio, Primary Amperes
Taking in account setting
CTWyePoint for TRM
REB 670
CT Input
en06000068_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000068 V1 EN

Figure 46: Overall CT status

Description of Zone interconnection and Check zone selection influence on Zone

selection
Figure 47 shows influence of zone interconnection feature and check zone selection on
overall zone selection logic. At the same time influence on TRZONE binary input is
shown.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 213

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

ANSI07000187 V1 EN

Figure 47: Check zone selection and zone interconnection operation influence on zone selection.

Bay trip logic

If there is an internal fault, differential function will operate, that is, a tripZoneA/
TripZoneB will be given to all bays. All the bays that are connected to that zone will be
tripped if they are not blocked by input BLKTR.

A pulse timer tTripPulse will ensure the minimal duration of the trip signal.

214 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

BayxxInZA
ZATrip AND
AND
OR
OR
BayxxInZB
ZBTrip AND

TRBAY

tTripPulse TRIP
t OR
BLKTR AND

en06000070_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000070 V1 EN

Figure 48: Bay trip logic

6.1.10 Zone interconnection (Load transfer) BZITGGIO, BZISGGIO

(87B)

6.1.10.1 Functionality

When this feature is activated the two integrated differential protection zones are merged
into one common, overall differential zone. This feature is required in double busbar
stations when in any of the feeder bays both busbar disconnectors are closed at the same
time (that is, load transfer). As explained in above section Bay each CT input will then
behave in the pre-set way in order to ensure proper current balancing during this special
condition. This feature can be started automatically (when Zone Selection logic
determines that both busbar disconnectors in one feeder bay are closed at the same time)
or externally via dedicated binary signal. If this feature is active for longer time than the
pre-set vale the alarm signal is given.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 215

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

6.1.10.2 Explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) function block

Inputs
• EXTSTART, when this binary input has logical value one the zone interconnection
feature will be activated if it is enabled by the setting parameter Operation
• SUMB1B2, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables the user
to internally sum Bay 01 and Bay 02 currents while the zone interconnection is active
• SUMB3B4, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables the user
to internally sum Bay 03 and Bay 04 currents while the zone interconnection is active
• SUMB5B6, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables the user
to internally sum Bay 05 and Bay 06 currents while the zone interconnection is active.
It shall be noted that this input is only available in 1-phase version of REB670.

Outputs
• ACTIVE, this binary output has logical value one while zone interconnection feature
is active in the IED
• ALARM, this binary output has logical value one, if the zone interconnection feature
is active longer than the time set under setting parameter tAlarm

Settings
• Operation, this setting is used to enable/disable zone interconnection feature.
• tAlarm, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to give an alarm output when zone
interconnection feature is active for too long time. Timer can be set from 0.00s to
6000.00s in step of 0.01s. Default value is 300.00s.

6.1.10.3 Description of Zone interconnection operation

Zone interconnection can be activated by external signal or by internal logic inside the
IED, when a bay is connected to both zones, it means that zone interconnection can be
activated by any particular bay. When the binary output signal ACTIVE is activated, each
CT will individually be include or exclude to the both zones depending on status of
ZoneSwitching setting.

216 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

EXTSTART
0
³1
OR ACTIVE
50 ms AND
&

StrtLoadTransfBay01 ZoneIntercActive-cont.

StrtLoadTransfBay02

OR 0-tAlarm ALARM

...
0

StrtLoadTransfBaynn

Operation = On

en06000069_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000069 V1 EN

Figure 49: Zone interconnection logic

ZoneSwitching can be set to only one of the following three alternatives:

• ForceOut, the particular bay will be excluded during the zone interconnection.
• ForceIn, the particular bay will be included during the zone interconnection.
• Conditionally, the particular bay will be included if it was in operation two ms before,
otherwise the bay will be excluded during the zone interconnection.

6.1.10.4 Function block

BZITGGIO (87B)
EXTSTART ACTIVE
SUMB1B2 ALARM
SUMB3B4

ANSI06000166-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000166 V2 EN

Figure 50: BZITGGIO (87B) function block (Zone interconnection, 3ph)

BZISGGIO (87B)
EXTSTART ACTIVE
SUMB1B2 ALARM
SUMB3B4
SUMB5B6

ANSI06000167-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000167 V2 EN

Figure 51: BZISGGIO (87B) function block (Zone interconnection, 1ph)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 217

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

6.1.10.5 Signals
Table 208: BZITGGIO (87B) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
EXTSTART BOOLEAN 0 External Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection start
SUMB1B2 BOOLEAN 0 Sum Bay1 and Bay2 currents during load transfer
SUMB3B4 BOOLEAN 0 Sum Bay3 and Bay4 currents during load transfer

Table 209: BZITGGIO (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection active
ALARM BOOLEAN Too long load transfer alarm

Table 210: BZISGGIO (87B) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
EXTSTART BOOLEAN 0 External Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection start
SUMB1B2 BOOLEAN 0 Sum Bay1 and Bay2 currents during load transfer
SUMB3B4 BOOLEAN 0 Sum Bay3 and Bay4 currents during load transfer
SUMB5B6 BOOLEAN 0 Sum Bay5 and Bay6 currents during load transfer

Table 211: BZISGGIO (87B) Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection active
ALARM BOOLEAN Too long load transfer alarm

6.1.10.6 Settings
Table 212: BZITGGIO (87B) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection operation
Enabled
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 300.00 Time delayed alarm for too long Load Transfer/
Zone Intercon

218 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 213: BZISGGIO (87B) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection operation
Enabled
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 300.00 Time delayed alarm for too long Load Transfer/
Zone Intercon.

6.1.11 Technical data

Table 214: (87B) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic S=0.53 fixed ± 2.0% of In for I ≤ In
± 2.0% of I for I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Differential current pickup level (10-99999) A ± 2.0% of In for I ≤ In
± 2.0% of I for I > In

Sensitive differential pickup level (10-99999) A ± 2.0% of In for I ≤ In

± 2.0% of I for I < In

Check zone operation pickup (10-99999) A ± 2.0% of In for I ≤ In

± 2.0% of I for I > In

Check zone slope (0.0-0.9) -

Trip time at 0 to 2 x Id Min = 10 ms -
Max = 20 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Id Min = 10 ms -
Max = 20 ms
Trip time at 0 to 10 x Id Min = 5 ms -
Max = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Id Min = 15 ms -
Max = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 8 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Id -

Independent time delay for alarm (0.00-6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 20 ms whichever is

for too long Load Transfer greater
Independent time delay for (0.00-6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 25 ms whichever is
differential current alarm level at greater
0 to 2 x IdAlarm
Independent time delay for slow (1.00-6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 25 ms whichever is
open CT alarm at 2 to 0 x OCTLev greater
Independent time delay to force (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 25 ms whichever is
current to zero via binary signal greater
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 219

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 25 ms whichever is
differential trip drop-off at 2 to 0 x greater
IdLev
Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 25 ms whichever is
sensitive differential function greater
operation at 0 to 2 x IdSens
Independent time delay to invert (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is
current via binary signal greater

220 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Section 7 Current protection

7.1 Four step phase overcurrent protection

OC4PTOC(51/67)

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51_67
3-phase output

TOC-REVA V2 EN

7.1.2 Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC (51/67) has
independent inverse time delay settings for steps 1 to 4.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined time characteristic.

The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each
step individually.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 221

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.1.3 Function block

OC4PTOC (51_67)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRST1
BLOCK TRST2
BLKTR TRST3
BLK1 TRST4
BLK2 TR_A
BLK3 TR_B
BLK4 TR_C
MULTPU1 TRST1_A
MULTPU2 TRST1_B
MULTPU3 TRST1_C
MULTPU4 TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
TRST3_A
TRST3_B
TRST3_C
TRST4_A
TRST4_B
TRST4_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
PU_ST3_A
PU_ST3_B
PU_ST3_C
PU_ST4_A
PU_ST4_B
PU_ST4_C
2NDHARM
DIR_A
DIR_B
DIR_C

ANSI06000187-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000187 V2 EN

Figure 52: OC4PTOC (51_67) function block

7.1.4 Signals
Table 215: OC4PTOC (51_67) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
Table continues on next page

222 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step3
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step4
MULTPU1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1
MULTPU2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2
MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3
MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4

Table 216: OC4PTOC (51_67) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3
TRST4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A
TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase B
TRST1_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase C
TRST2_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase A
TRST2_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase B
TRST2_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase C
TRST3_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase A
TRST3_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase B
TRST3_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase C
TRST4_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase A
TRST4_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase B
TRST4_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2
PU_ST3 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step3
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 223

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Type Description

PU_ST4 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step4
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase C
PU_ST2_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase A
PU_ST2_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase B
PU_ST2_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase C
PU_ST3_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step3 phase A
PU_ST3_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step3 phase B
PU_ST3_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step3 phase C
PU_ST4_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step4 phase A
PU_ST4_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step4 phase B
PU_ST4_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step4 phase C
PU2NDHARM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIR_A INTEGER Direction for phase A
DIR_B INTEGER Direction for phase B
DIR_C INTEGER Direction for phase C

7.1.5 Settings
Table 217: OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
NumPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for phase selection
2 out of 3 (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirModeSel1 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

224 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup1 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1 in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse
char of step 1
TD1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of
IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
MultPU1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1
DirModeSel2 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 225

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Pickup2 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Operating phase current level for step 2 in % of
IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse
char of step 2
TD2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of
IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 2
MultPU2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2
DirModeSel3 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup3 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step 3 in % of
IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse
char of step 3
TD3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step3 in % of
IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 3
MultPU3 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 3
DirModeSel4 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

226 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup4 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Operating phase current level for step 4 in % of
IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse
char of step 4
TD4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 4
IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step4 in % of
IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 4
MultPU4 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4

Table 218: OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PUMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in % of
IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of
fundamental curr
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 227

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 1
HarmBlock1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 1 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 2
HarmBlock2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 2 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for step 3
Table continues on next page

228 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 3
HarmBlock3 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 3 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 4
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 4
HarmBlock4 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
Enabled

Table 219: OC4PTOC (51_67) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 229

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Table 220: OC4PTOC (51_67) Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PU1_MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU1_MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU2_MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase current
level for step 2 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU2_MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase current
level for step 2 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU3_MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase current
level for step 3 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU3_MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase current
level for step 3 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU4_MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase current
level for step 4 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU4_MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase current
level for step 4 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings

7.1.6 Monitored data

Table 221: OC4PTOC (51_67) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIR_A INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase A
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIR_B INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase B
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIR_C INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase C
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IA REAL - A Current in phase A
IB REAL - A Current in phase B
IC REAL - A Current in phase C

230 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.1.7 Operation principle

The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51_67) is divided into four
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4,
an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx: Disable/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.

The protection design can be divided into four parts:

• The direction element

• The harmonic restraint blocking function
• The four step over current function
• The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModeSelx shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 231

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

4 step over current

Direction dirPhAFlt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPhBFlt step
I3P dirPhCFlt PICKUP

V3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

ANSI05000740-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000740 V2 EN

Figure 53: Functional overview of OC4PTOC (51/67)

A common setting for all steps, NumPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents
to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out
of 3.

The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase
overcurrent protection 1 and 3-phase output function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to
select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select
either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).

If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is
selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the
fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC

232 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are fed
to OC4PTOC (51/67).

In a comparator, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value
of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4) for each phase current. If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx, PU_A, PU_B
and PU_C are activated without delay. Output signals PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation. The
PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be noted that the
selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional
part of OC4PTOC (51/67) .

Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI
for OC4PTOC (51/67) function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service
operational checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation
to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-
processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level.

The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle
in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional
function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in
faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the
apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are
used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

Vref _ AB = VA - VB I dir _ AB = I A - I B
GUID-4F361BC7-6D91-47B5-8119-A27009C0AD6A V1 EN (Equation 4)

Vref _ BC = VB - VC I dir _ BC = I B - I C
ANSIEQUATION1450 V1 EN (Equation 5)

Vref _ CA = VC - VA I dir _ CA = IC - I A
ANSIEQUATION1451 V1 EN (Equation 6)

Phase-ground short circuit:

Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 233

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Vref _ A = VA I dir _ A = I A
ANSIEQUATION1452 V1 EN (Equation 7)

Vref _ B = VB I dir _ B = I B
ANSIEQUATION1453 V1 EN (Equation 8)

Vref _ C = VC I dir _ C = I C
ANSIEQUATION1454 V1 EN (Equation 9)

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4%

of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical
faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between
10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the
reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until
the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an
angle window ROADir.

234 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Reverse

Uref

RCA
ROA

ROA Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 235

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Reverse

Vref

RCA
ROA

ROA Forward

Idir

en05000745_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000745 V1 EN

Figure 54: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is –65°. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector
from AngleRCA for directional borders.

A minimum current for directional phase pickup current signal can be set.
PUMinOpPhSel is the pickup level for directional evaluation of IA, IB and IC. The
directional signals release the overcurrent measurement in respective phases if their
current amplitudes are higher than the pickup level (PUMinOpPhSel) and the direction of
the current is according to the set direction of the step.

If no blockings are given, the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available.It is
also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic.

The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".

236 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
a
a>b
OR 0-tx
Pickupx b
0
PUx
STx
AND

0-txMin
0 AND

Inve rse

Characteristx=Inve rse

DirModeSelx=Disa bled OR STAGE x_DIR_Int

DirModeSelx=Non-dire ctional
DirModeSelx=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModeSelx=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

ANSI12000008-3-en.vsd
ANSI12000008-3-en.vsd

ANSI12000008 V3 EN

Figure 55: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 237

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

I3P
DFWDLx

V3P DFWDLxx

DREVLx
Directional
Element
AngleRCA DREVLxx FORWARD_int

Directional
AngleROA Release REVERSE_int
Block

STLx

Greater
PUminOpPhSel Comparator
x- means three phases 1,2 and 3
xx – means phase to phase 12,23,31

ANSI15000266-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000266 V1 EN

Figure 56: OC4 directional release block diagram

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".

There is a possibility to activate a preset change (MultiPUx, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set

operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state.

The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLK.The trip signals from the function can
be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC 51_67
can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental
frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by parameter
2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by
parameter HarmRestrainx setting. When the 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active, the
OC4PTOC 51_67 function output signal ST2NDHRM will be set to logical value one.

238 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-2-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V2 EN

Figure 57: Second harmonic blocking

7.1.8 Technical data

Table 222: OC4PTOC (51/67) technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Trip current, step 1 - 4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of In at I ≤ In
±1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of -

lBase
Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of In at I ≤ In
±1.0% of I at I > In

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of In

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2 % or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Iset, step 1 - 4

Minimum trip time for inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2 % or ±35 ms whichever is

curves , step 1 - 4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 864, table 865 and table
table 864, table 865 and table 866 866
Trip time, pickup non-directional at Min. = 15 ms -
0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, pickup non-directional Min. = 15 ms -
at 2 to 0 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 239

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Function Setting range Accuracy

Operate time, start non-directional Min. = 5 ms -
at 0 to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at Min. = 20 ms -

10 to 0 x Iset Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.2 Four step single phase overcurrent protection

PH4SPTOC (51)

7.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step single phase overcurrent PH4SPTOC 51
protection I>
4
alt
4
OC V1 EN

7.2.2 Functionality
Four step single phase, non-directional overcurrent protection (PH4SPTOC, 51) has an
inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined time characteristic.

The function is normally used as end fault protection to clear faults between current
transformer and circuit breaker.

240 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.2.3 Function block

PH4SPTOC (51)
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLK1 TRST2
BLK2 TRST3
BLK3 TRST4
BLK4 PICKUP
BLKTR PU_ST1
MULTPU1 PU_ST2
MULTPU2 PU_ST3
MULTPU3 PU_ST4
MULTPU4 2NDHARM

ANSI10000015-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000015 V1 EN

Figure 58: PH4SPTOC (51) function block

7.2.4 Signals
Table 223: PH4SPTOC (51) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step3
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step4
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
MULTPU1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1
MULTPU2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2
MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3
MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4

Table 224: PH4SPTOC (51) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3
TRST4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 241

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Type Description

PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2
PU_ST3 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step3
PU_ST4 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step4
PU2NDHARM BOOLEAN Second Harmonic Detected

7.2.5 Settings
Table 225: PH4SPTOC (51) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OpStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Operation over current step 1 Off / On
Enabled
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup1 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1 in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time delay of step 1
TD1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
MultPU1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for operate current level for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for
step 1
OpStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Operation over current step 2 Off / On
Enabled
Table continues on next page

242 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup2 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Operating phase current level for step 2 in % of
IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Definite time delay of step 2
TD2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for
step 2
MultPU2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for
step 2
OpStep3 Disabled - - Enabled Operation over current step 3 Off / On
Enabled
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup3 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step 3 in % of
IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Definite time delay of step 3
TD3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for
step 3
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 243

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MultPU3 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for
step 3
OpStep4 Disabled - - Enabled Operation over current step 4 Off / On
Enabled
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup4 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Operating phase current level for step 4 in % of
IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Definite time delay of step 4
TD4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 4
MultPU4 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for
step 4

Table 226: PH4SPTOC (51) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of
fundamental curr
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

244 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 1
HarmBlock1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 1 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 2
HarmBlock2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 2 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 3
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 245

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 3
HarmBlock3 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 3 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 4
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 4
HarmBlock4 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 4 for harmonic restraint
Enabled

Table 227: PH4SPTOC (51) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.2.6 Monitored data

Table 228: PH4SPTOC (51) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I REAL - A Single phase current

246 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.2.7 Operation principle

The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step.

The function consists of two major parts:

• The harmonic restraint blocking function

• Four step overcurrent protection (PH4SPTOC, (51))

4 step overcurrent
element
ISI One element for each PICKUP
step

TRIP

Harmonic
ISI Restraint harmRestrBlock
Element

en06000141_2_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000141 V2 EN

Figure 59: Functional overview of PH4SPTOC, (51)

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. The RMS value of the phase current is derived. The phase current value is fed to the
PH4SPTOC (51) function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set
operation current value of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4). If the phase
current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true.
This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal Pickup for this step and a
common Pickup signal.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation
to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-
processing of the phase current and compared to a set restrain current level.

If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of inverse

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 247

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available.

It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse
time characteristics are described in chapter "".

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "".

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (MultPUx, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set

operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. The
function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLK. The trip signals from the function can
be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

7.2.8 Technical data

Table 229: PH4SPTOC (51) technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Trip current, step 1 - 4 (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I ≤ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of In

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is

Iset, step 1 - 4 greater

Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is

curves, step 1 - 4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 864, table 865, and table
table 864, table 865, and table 866
866
Trip time, pickup at 0 to 2 x Iset Min = 15 ms -
Max = 30 ms
Reset time, pickup at 2 to 0 x Iset Min = 15 ms -
Max = 30 ms
Trip time, pickup at 0 to 10 x Iset Min = 5 ms -
Max = 20 ms
Reset time, pickup at 10 to 0 x Iset Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 10 ms typically -

248 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.3 Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero

sequence or negative sequence directionality)
EF4PTOC (51N/67N)

7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N_67N
4(IN>)
protection
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN

7.3.2 Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step.

All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of

the steps.

IDir, VPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative
sequence.

Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be used as main protection for phase-to-ground faults.

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the
case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.

Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking the input
from neutral CT

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 249

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.3.3 Function block

EF4PTOC (51N_67N)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRST1
I3PPOL* TRST2
I3PDIR* TRST3
BLOCK TRST4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLK1 PICK UP
BLK2 PUST1
BLK3 PUST2
BLK4 PUST3
MULTPU1 PUST4
MULTPU2 PUSOTF
MULTPU3 PUFW
MULTPU4 PUREV
52A 2NDHARMD
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
ANSI06000424-4-en.vsd

ANSI06000424 V4 EN

Figure 60: EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function block

7.3.4 Signals

Table 230: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Pickup and trip)
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Pickup and trip)
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Pickup and trip)
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Pickup and trip)
MULTPU1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1
MULTPU2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2
Table continues on next page

250 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3
MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4
52a BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command

Table 231: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRST4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from switch onto fault function
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PUST1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 1
PUST2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 2
PUST3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 3
PUST4 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 4
PUSOTF BOOLEAN Pickup signal from switch onto fault function
PUFW BOOLEAN Pick up foward direction
PUREV BOOLEAN Pick up reverse direction
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

7.3.5 Settings

Table 232: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 251

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VPolMin 1 - 100 %VB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of
VBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in % of
IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used for current
polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for current
polarisation
INDirPU 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of
fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Disabled - - Disabled Enable blocking at energizing of parallel
Enabled transformers
Use_PUValue ST1 - - ST4 Current pickup blocking at parallel transf
ST2 (step1, 2, 3 or 4)
ST3
ST4
SOTF Disabled - - Disabled SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/Undertime/
SOTF SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
SOTFSel Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-Open/ -
Closed Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start SOTF
Step 3
HarmBlkSOTF Disabled - - Disabled Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF
Enabled
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUndrTimeSel CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos /
CB command CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirModeSel1 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

252 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup1 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1 in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse
char of step 1
TD1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time
characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for step 1 in
% of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
MultPU1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value
for step 1
HarmBlock1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 1 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
DirModeSel2 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 253

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup2 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Residual current operate level for step 2 in % of
IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse
char of step 2
TD2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected time
characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for step 2 in
% of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
MultPU2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value
for step 2
HarmBlock2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 2 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
DirModeSel3 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

254 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup3 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Residual current operate level for step 3 in % of
IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse
char of step 3
TD3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected time
characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum operate residual current for step 3 in
% of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
MultPU3 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value
for step 3
HarmBlock3 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 3 for harmonic restraint
Enabled
DirModeSel4 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 255

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Pickup4 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Residual current operate level for step 4 in % of
IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse
char of step 4
TD4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected time
characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum operate residual current for step 4 in
% of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
MultPU4 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value
for step 4
HarmBlock4 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 4 for harmonic restraint
Enabled

Table 233: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1 (Instantaneous /
IEC Reset IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 1
Table continues on next page

256 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2 (Instantaneous /
IEC Reset IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3 (Instantaneous /
IEC Reset IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4 (Instantaneous /
IEC Reset IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 257

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 4

Table 234: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional current
Neg seq
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing current
Neg seq
SeqTypeVPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing voltage
Neg seq

Table 235: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PU1_MinEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum settable operate residual current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU1_MaxEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate residual current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU2_MinEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum settable operate residual current
level for step 2 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU2_MaxEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate residual current
level for step 2 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
Table continues on next page

258 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PU3_MinEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum settable operate residual current
level for step 3 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU3_MaxEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate residual current
level for step 3 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU4_MinEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum settable operate residual current
level for step 4 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU4_MaxEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate residual current
level for step 4 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings

7.3.6 Monitored data

Table 236: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
VPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
VPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between
voltage and current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle

7.3.7 Operation principle

This function has the following three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the
configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
2. V3P, input used for “Voltage Polarizing Quantity”. Supply either zero or negative
sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for “Current Polarizing Quantity”. Provide polarizing current to
the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the grounding of a
power transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for “Directional detection”. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 259

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.3.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual
current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to

the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example, connected
to:
• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
• one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system WYE
point and ground (that is, current transformer located in the neutral grounding
of a WYE connected transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two WYE points
of double WYE shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600).
In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into
the pre-processing block by using the following formula (will take I2 from SMAI
AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was connected to I3P input also):

If zero sequence current is selected,

I op = 3 × Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2011-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 10)

where:
IA, IB, IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the set
operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-
directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will,
without delay, activate the output signal PUSTx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common
PICKUP signal.

260 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.3.7.2 Internal polarizing

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to
the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use the residual voltage -3V0 as
polarizing quantity V3P.

This voltage can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to

the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input V3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to
open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
2. calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) analog
function input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate -3V2 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

VPol=3V0=(VA +VB +VC)

EQUATION2012 V1 EN (Equation 12)

where:
VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

In order to use this, all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED VT
inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order
to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum
level defined by setting parameter VpolMin.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 261

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3V0) or negative sequence voltage (-3V2) is used
to determine the location of the ground fault. This insures the required inversion of the
polarizing voltage within the ground-fault function.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current (3I0)
as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to

the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically
connected to one single current transformer located between power system WYE
point and ground (current transformer located in the WYE point of a WYE connected
transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input can
be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three
inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

I Pol = 3 × Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2019-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 14)

where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then
multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to calculate
equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:

VIPol = Zo S × I Pol = ( RNPol + j × XNPOL ) × I Pol

EQUATION2013-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 15)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

262 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

VTotPol = VVPol + VIPol = -3V0 + Z 0 s × IPol = -3V0 + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) × IPol

ANSIEQUATION1878 V1 EN (Equation 16)

Vpol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component
depending upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/
Reverse).

7.3.7.3 External polarizing for ground-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting
is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx to provide external
directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following
functions if available in the IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection
function.

7.3.7.4 Directional detection for ground fault function

Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for ground fault
function. In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong.
Negative sequence quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select either zero
sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting directionality with
the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to the same source as I3P
input.

7.3.7.5 Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base current
(IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.
Base voltage (VBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected
object in primary kV.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 263

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.3.7.6 Internal ground-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based ground-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker
problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

7.3.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:

• Directional mode can be set to Disabled/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that the
directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual overcurrent
step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common “directional
supervision element”.
• Residual current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter setting
it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the ground-fault protection.
Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the
complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section "Inverse
characteristics".
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the
complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and
parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (Enabled/Disabled). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup
value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 61.

264 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

BLKTR

EMULTX

IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
TRSTx
tx AND
|IOP|
a OR
a>b
b

PUSTx
MultPUx AND
X T
Pickupx F tMin
AND Inverse
BLKx

BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse

2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrainx=Disabled

DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

ANSI10000008-4-en.vsd

ANSI10000008 V3 EN

Figure 61: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals
for respective step, and PUSTx and TRSTx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKx.
The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

7.3.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall
be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional
supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function.

The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current lop is
always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod.
The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 265

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

1. When polMethod = Voltage, VPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, VPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 62, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.

Operating area

PUREV
0.6 * INDirPU
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for PUREV 40% of
INDirPU RCA +85 deg

RCA
65° VPol = -3V0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
INDirPU

PUFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW ANSI11000243-1-en.ai

ANSI11000243 V1 EN

Figure 62: Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the
zero sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

• Directional element will be internally enabled to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40%
of IDirPU and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

266 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function output binary signals:

1. PUFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than
setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in
forward direction.
2. PUREV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger
than 60% of setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects
fault in reverse direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based ground-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 63:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 267

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

|IopDir|
a
a>b PUREV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND PUFW
IDirPU b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
VPolMin

Characteristic
Directional
polMethod=Dual IPolMin
VPol T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
VTPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F
VIPol
RNPol X STAGE1_DIR_Int
Complex T
STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd

ANSI07000067 V4 EN

Figure 63: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step

7.3.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC can
be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of the 2nd
harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual
current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab) then ST2NDHRM
function output signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the
function block will be applicable.

Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:

268 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

1. Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

2. Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
3. Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting

If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then ST2NDHRM function output signal is
set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block is
applicable.

In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set
in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to
stabilize EF4PTOC (51N67N) during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In
case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the
transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric
inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the
transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of
the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the
two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is
however significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel
transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we
have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current is
however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function
is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched as long as the residual current
measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level by using setting
UseStartValue.

This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in
feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set pickup value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting Use_PUValue it is possible to
select which one of the four pickup values that will be used (Pickup1 or Pickup2 or
Pickup3 or Pickup4).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal
is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter
setting Use_PUValue (see condition 3 above).

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 64.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 269

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

q-1

0-70ms OR
0 AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
Use_PUValue
Pickup1>
Pickup2>
Pickup3>
Pickup4>

ANSI13000015-1-en.vsd

ANSI13000015 V1 EN

Figure 64: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature

7.3.7.10 Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF
or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it
onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic
will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and
Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U.

The SOTF logic uses the pickup signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by
setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change in
circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting

270 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

parameter SOTFSel can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position
closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current pickup from step 2 or
3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is
normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).

The Under-Time logic always uses the pickup signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The
Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables
high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing.
This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switching
of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit
breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is
done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a pickup from step 4 this logic will
give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time
(default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-
discrepancy protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The
Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.

SOTF

Open
t4U
Closed
SOTFSel
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND t
PUST2

StepForSOTF
PUST3

OperationMode
BLOCK
Disabled
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
Undertime

tUnderTime
2nd Harmonic AND Undertime
EnHarmRestSOTF t

OR

Open
Close OR

t4U
ActUndrTimeSel
Close command AND

PUST4

ANSI06000643-4-en.vsd

ANSI06000643 V4 EN

Figure 65: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 271

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function is shown in figure 66:

signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element

4 step over current

INPol Direction
operatingCurrent element TRIP
Element
3V0 One element for each
ground FaultDirection step
3I0 angleValid

DirModeSel
enableDir

harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint or
Element

pickup step 2 , 3 and 4

Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRIP

CB
DirModeSel pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4

DirectionalMode1-4

en 06000376_ ansi. vsd

ANSI06000376 V1 EN

Figure 66: Functional overview of EF4PTOC (51N/67N)

7.3.8 Technical data

Table 237: EF4PTOC (51N/67N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of In at I ≤ In
±1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of lBase -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
(RCA)
Trip current for directional release (1–100)% of lBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of In at I ≤ In
±2.5% of I at I > In

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

Iset, step 1 - 4 greater

Table continues on next page

272 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
curves, step 1 - 4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see 16 curve types See Table 864, Table 865 and
Table 864, Table 865 and Table Table 866
866
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of In

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of In

Real part of source Z used for (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

current polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
for current polarization
Trip time, pickup non-directional Min. = 15 ms -
at 0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, pickup non- Min. = 15 ms -

directional at 2 to 0 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Trip time, pickup non-directional Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, pickup non- Min. = 20 ms -

directional at 10 to 0 x Iset Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.4 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2)

7.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4

IEC10000053 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 273

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.4.2 Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC, (4612) ) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined characteristic.

The directional function is voltage polarized.

NS4PTOC (4612) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the
steps.

NS4PTOC (4612) can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase
short circuits, phase-phase-ground short circuits and single phase ground faults.

NS4PTOC (4612) can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer
circuit failure.

7.4.3 Function block

NS4PTOC (46I2)
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TRST1
V3P* TRST2
BLOCK TRST3
BLKTR TRST4
BLK1 PICK UP
BLK2 PU_ST1
BLK3 PU_ST2
BLK4 PU_ST3
MULTPU1 PU_ST4
MULTPU2 PUFW
MULTPU3 PUREV
MULTPU4

ANSI10000054-1-en.vsd

ANSI10000054 V1 EN

Figure 67: NS4PTOC (4612) function block

274 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.4.4 Signals
Table 238: NS4PTOC (46I2) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Pickup and trip)
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Pickup and trip)
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Pickup and trip)
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Pickup and trip)
MULTPU1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1
MULTPU2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2
MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3
MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4

Table 239: NS4PTOC (46I2) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRST4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 2
PU_ST3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 3
PU_ST4 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 4
PUFW BOOLEAN Forward directional pickup signal
PUREV BOOLEAN Reverse directional pickup signal

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 275

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.4.5 Settings
Table 240: NS4PTOC (46I2) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
VPolMin 1 - 100 %VB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of
VBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
DirModeSel1 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time char. is
selected
TD1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time
characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
MultPU1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for step 1
Table continues on next page

276 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DirModeSel2 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Negative sequence current op level for step 2
in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time char. is
selected
TD2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected time
characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
MultPU2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for step 2
DirModeSel3 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 277

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Negative sequence current op level for step 3
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time char. is
selected
TD3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected time
characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum current for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
MultPU3 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for step 3
DirModeSel4 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Table continues on next page

278 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I2-4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Negative sequence current op level for step 4
in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time char. is
selected
TD4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected time
characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum current for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
MultPU4 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for step 4

Table 241: NS4PTOC (46I2) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1 (Instantaneous /
IEC Reset IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2 (Instantaneous /
IEC Reset IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 2
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 279

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3 (Instantaneous /
IEC Reset IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4 (Instantaneous /
IEC Reset IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve
for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time
curve for step 4

280 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Table 242: NS4PTOC (46I2) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.4.6 Monitored data

Table 243: NS4PTOC (46I2) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
VPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
VPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between
voltage and current

7.4.7 Operation principle

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function has the
following three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. V3P, input used for “Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.

7.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2) function always
uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence
current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing
block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the
following formula:

1
I2 =
3
(
× IA + a × IB + a × IC
2
)
ANSIEQUATION2266 V1 EN (Equation 17)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 281

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

where:
IA, IB, IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1∠120 deg

a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1∠240 deg

The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC (4612) protection to compare it with
the set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4).
If the negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used
in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal, without delay, activates the output signal PU_STx (x=1 - 4) for this step and a
common PICKUP signal.

7.4.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault
(Forward/Reverse).

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function uses the
voltage polarizing method.

NS4PTOC (4612) uses the negative sequence voltage -V2 as polarizing quantity V3P.
This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates -V2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block
by using the following formula:

1
V2 = (
× VA + a × VB + a × VC
2

)
3
ANSIEQUATION00024 V1 EN

where:
VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine
the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude
of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting VpolMin.

282 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Note that –V2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

7.4.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting
is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx (where x indicates the
relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque
control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED:

• Distance protection directional function

• Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection
function

7.4.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

• Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

• Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence
protection schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

7.4.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as

measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:

• Operating mode (Disabled/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional decision
(Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The direction of
the fault is determined in common “Directional Supervision Element” described in
the next paragraph.
• Negative sequence current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting
it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence overcurrent
function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available.
For the complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter ""

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 283

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this

parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the
complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter ""
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and
parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence
current pickup value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the
following figure:

ANSI09000684 V1 EN

Figure 68: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4

NS4PTOC (4612) can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup
signals from NS4PTOC (4612) for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC (4612) can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.

284 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.4.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function

At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set as
directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision
element and the integrated directional comparison function.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 62, to determine the direction of the fault.

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Vpol=-V2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

ANSI10000031-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000031 V1 EN

Figure 69: Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

• Directional element is internally enable to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of
INDirPU and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 285

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC (4612) output binary signals:

1. PUFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see
fig 62 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting INDirPU)
2. PUREV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 62. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
INDirPU)

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication
schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 63:

|IopDir|
a
a>b PUREV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND PUFW
IDirPU b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
VPolMin
Characteristic
Directional

polMethod=Dual IPolMin
VPol T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
VTPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F
VIPol
RNPol X STAGE1_DIR_Int
Complex T
STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd

ANSI07000067 V4 EN

Figure 70: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step

286 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.4.8 Technical data

Table 244: NS4PTOC (46I2) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip value, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of In at I £ In
±1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
x Iset, step 1 - 4 greater

Minimum operate time for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

inverse curves, step 1 - 4
Inverse time characteristics,
see table 864, table 865 and
table 866
Minimum trip current, step 1 - 4
16 curve types
(1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase
greater
See table 864, table 865 and table
866
±1.0% of In at I ≤ In
±1.0% of I at I > In

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

(RCA)
Trip current for directional (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
release ±2.5% of In at I ≤ In
±2.5% of I at I > In

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of In

Real part of negative sequence (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

source impedance used for
current polarization
Imaginary part of negative (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Trip time, pickup non- Min. = 15 ms -
directional at 0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, pickup non- Min. = 15 ms -

directional at 2 to 0 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Trip time, pickup non- Min. = 5 ms -

directional at 0 to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, pickup non- Min. = 20 ms -

directional at 10 to 0 x Iset Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 287

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.5 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR (49)

7.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

7.5.2 Functionality
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be damaged.
The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a consequence of
this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground faults will increase.

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the
transformer with two time constants, which is based on current measurement.

Two warning pickup levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be
done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase
to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.

The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.

7.5.3 Function block

TRPTTR (49)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
COOLING ALARM1
MULTPU ALARM2
RESET LOCKOUT
WARNING

ANSI06000272-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000272 V2 EN

Figure 71: TRPTTR (49) function block

288 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.5.4 Signals
Table 245: TRPTTR (49) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input Disabled/ Enabled. Changes Ib setting
and time constant
MULTPU BOOLEAN 0 Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 246: TRPTTR (49) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip Signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal
ALARM1 BOOLEAN First level alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Second level alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal: Trip within set warning time

7.5.5 Settings
Table 247: TRPTTR (49) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Reference current in % of IBase
IRefMult 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication Factor for reference current
IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current,IBase1 without Cooling input in %
of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input ON in
% of IBase
Tau1 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant without cooling input in min, with
IBase1
Tau2 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant with cooling input in min, with
IBase2
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1
by TC1-IHIGH
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 289

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is > IHIGH-
TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1
by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is < ILOW-
TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2
by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is >IHIGH-
TC2
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2
by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is < ILOW-
TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level in % of
IBasex
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level in % of heat content trip value
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level in % of heat content trip
value
LockoutReset 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level in % of heat content trip
value
ThetaInit 0.0 - 95.0 % 1.0 50.0 Initial Heat content, in % of heat content trip
value
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would be
set (in min)
tPulse 0.01 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec).

Table 248: TRPTTR (49) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.5.6 Monitored data

Table 249: TRPTTR (49) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
HEATCONT REAL - % Percentage of the heat
content of the transformer
I-MEASUR REAL - % Current measured by the
function in % of the rated
current
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in min)
Table continues on next page

290 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

TRESLO INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset of the
function (in min)
TTRIPCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to trip:
1=Long Time not active/long time/active
2=Active
TRESCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time reset: not active/long time/
2=Active active

7.5.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the true
RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the
protection function.

From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content) is
calculated according to the expression:

2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷
ç I ref
è ø
EQUATION1171 V1 EN (Equation 18)

where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current

If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the pickup output signal PICKUP will
be activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 291

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

If Q final > Q n
EQUATION1172 V1 EN (Equation 19)

æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-

è ø
EQUATION1173 V1 EN (Equation 20)

If Q final < Qn
EQUATION1174 V1 EN (Equation 21)

Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Qn -1 ) × e
-
t

EQUATION1175 V1 EN (Equation 22)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step

Qfinal is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the thermal time constant of the protected circuit given in minutes. There are different time
constants depending on the cooling used. Please refer to manufacturer's manuals for details

The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported from
the function as a real figure HEATCONT.

When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or Alarm2
the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When the
temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to continuous
current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.

There is also a calculation of the time to trip with the present current. This calculation is
only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation
temperature:

  final  trip 
ttrip    ln  
 
 final  n 

ANSIEQUATION1176 V1 EN (Equation 23)

292 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as an
integer output TTRIP.

After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The output
lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is above the set
lockout release temperature setting ResLo.

The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.

æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
EQUATION1177 V1 EN (Equation 24)

In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 18. The
calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as
a real figure, TRESLO.

When the current is so high that it has given a pickup signal PICKUP, the estimated time
to trip is continuously calculated and given as analog output TTRIP. If this calculated time
get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output WARNING is activated.

In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 293

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Final Temp PICKUP

> TripTemp

RESET HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content

I3P
Calculation
ENMULT of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp

Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp

S LOCKOUT
Management of R
COOLING setting
parameters: Tau,
Actual Temp
IBase Tau used
< Recl
Temp

TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING
trip

Calculation
of time to TRESCAL
reset of
lockout

ANSI05000833-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000833 V2 EN

Figure 72: Functional overview of TRPTTR (49)

294 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.5.8 Technical data

Table 250: TRPTTR (49) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Base current 1 and 2 (30–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of In

Trip time: Ip = load current before overload ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is

occurs greater
æ I 2 - I p2 ö Time constant τ = (0.10–500.00)
t = t × ln ç ÷ minutes
ç I 2 - I ref 2 ÷
è ø
EQUATION1356 V2 EN (Equation 25)

I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Iref = reference load current
Alarm pickup 1 and 2 (50–99)% of heat content trip ±2.0% of heat content trip
value
Trip current (50–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of In

Reset level temperature (10–95)% of heat content trip ±2.0% of heat content trip

7.6 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF)

7.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN

7.6.2 Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of the surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF (50BF) can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.

A current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against inadvertent operation.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 295

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

CCRBRF (50BF) can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single pole
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF (50BF) the current criteria
can be set to trip only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase plus the
residual current pickups. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command.

CCRBRF (50BF) function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of

its own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.

7.6.3 Function block

CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
BFI_3P TRRET
BFI_A TRRET_A
BFI_B TRRET_B
BFI_C TRRET_C
52A_A CBALARM
52A_B
52A_C
52FAIL

ANSI06000188-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000188 V2 EN

Figure 73: CCRBRF (50BF) function block

7.6.4 Signals
Table 251: CCRBRF (50BF) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BFI_3P BOOLEAN 0 Three phase breaker failure initiation
BFI_A BOOLEAN 0 Phase A breaker failure initiation
BFI_B BOOLEAN 0 Phase B breaker failure initiation
BFI_C BOOLEAN 0 Phase C breaker failure initiation
52a_A BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase A
52a_B BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase B
52a_C BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase C
52FAIL BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantaneously

296 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Table 252: CCRBRF (50BF) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection
function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET_A BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase A
TRRET_B BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase B
TRRET_C BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase C
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

7.6.5 Settings
Table 253: CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/Contact/
Contact Current&Contact
Current/Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of 3 or 1
1 out of 3 out of 4
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos Check/
CB Pos Check No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Pickup_PH 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Phase current pickup in % of IBase
Pickup_N 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase
pickup
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration

Table 254: CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pickup_BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase block operation using Function
Mode Contact
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay to 27P2TDLY for a
second back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit breaker
indicated

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 297

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Table 255: CCRBRF (50BF) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.6.6 Monitored data

Table 256: CCRBRF (50BF) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IA REAL - A Measured current in phase A
IB REAL - A Measured current in phase B
IC REAL - A Measured current in phase C
IN REAL - A Measured residual current

7.6.7 Operation principle

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF) is initiated from the protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.

The initiate signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective
initiate signals enable single pole re-trip function. The re-trip attempt is made after a set
time delay t1. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the
current check, the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is
larger than the operate current level.

The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
initiate the back-up trip timer. The function detects the successful breaker opening, either
by detection of low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current
algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm enables a very fast
detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement.
If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-
up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip
pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse
2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker.
• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where
it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it
is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current

298 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall
be high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting
of phase current detection.
• It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option
activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is incapable to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

BFI_3P 30 ms

BFI_A OR BFP Started A

AND S 150ms
SR Q
Time out A
R AND
BLOCK 0
OR
Reset A
Retrip Time Out A
BackupTrip A OR

ANSI09000976-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000976 V2 EN

Figure 74: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF) starting logic

Pickup_PH
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset A
OR
Contact
1 Time out A
Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High A

I_A CB Closed A
AND
OR
BFP Started A

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
Pickup_BlkCont b

52a_A Contact Closed A

AND

ANSI09000977-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000977 V1 EN

Figure 75: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF), CB position evaluation

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 299

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

TRRET_C
From other
BFP Started A Retrip Time Out A TRRET_B TRRET
t1 phases OR
0
tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRET_A
OR

1
OR AND

CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed A
52FAIL

ANSI09000978-4-en.vsd

ANSI09000978 V4 EN

Figure 76: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

BFP Started A
BFP Started B AND

BFP Started C

AND
IN
a
a>b
Pickup_N b

BUTripMode Contact Closed A

2 out of 4
1 out of 4 OR
1
1 out of 3 OR
Current High B
From other
Current High C
phases
Current High A AND

52FAIL
AND

BFP Started A t2 Backup Trip A

AND
OR
0
t2MPh
AND
0

AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip B OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip C
From other BFP Started B 2 of 3
phases BFP Started C tPulse

OR
TRBU2
S Q t3
R SR
AND 0

ANSI09000979-4-en.vsd

ANSI09000979 V4 EN

Figure 77: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

The internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when the current in
the respective phase has the magnitude larger than the setting parameter Pickup_PH.

300 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.6.8 Technical data

Table 257: CCRBRF (50BF) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip phase current (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Trip residual current (2-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, residual > 95% -

current
Phase current pickup for (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of In at I £ In
blocking of contact ± 1.0% of I at I > In
function
Reset ratio > 95% -
Trip time for current 20 ms typically -
detection
Reset time for current 25 ms maximum -
detection
Time delay for re-trip at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is
to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for back-up trip (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is

at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for back-up trip (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is

at multi-phase pickup at 0 greater
to 2 x Iset

Additional time delay for a (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is

second back-up trip at 0 to greater
2 x Iset

Time delay for alarm for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is

faulty circuit breaker greater

7.7 Breaker failure protection, single phase version

CCSRBRF (50BF)

7.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, single phase CCSRBRF 50BF
version
I>BF

SYMBOL-II V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 301

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.7.2 Functionality
Breaker failure protection, single phase version (CCSRBRF, 50BF) function ensures fast
back-up tripping of surrounding breakers.

A current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criteria to achieve a high
security against unnecessary operation.

CCSRBRF (50BF) can be programmed to give a re-trip of the own breaker to avoid
unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to mistakes
during testing.

7.7.3 Function block

CCSRBRF (50BF)
ISI* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
BFI TRRET
52A CBALARM
52FAIL

ANSI06000158-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000158 V2 EN

Figure 78: CCSRBRF (50BF) function block

7.7.4 Signals
Table 258: CCSRBRF (50BF) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Single phase group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BFI BOOLEAN 0 Breaker failure initiation
52a BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed
52FAIL BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantaneously

Table 259: CCSRBRF (50BF) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

302 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.7.5 Settings
Table 260: CCSRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/Contact/
Contact Current&Contact
Current/Contact
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos Check/
CB Pos Check No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Pickup_PH 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Pickup level in % of IBase
Pickup_BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase block operation using Function
Mode Contact
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional delay to t2 for a second back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit breaker
indicated
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration

Table 261: CCSRBRF (50BF) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.7.6 Monitored data

Table 262: CCSRBRF (50BF) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I REAL - - Measured phase current

7.7.7 Operation principle

Breaker failure protection, single phase version CCSRBRF (50BF) is initiated from
protection trip command, either from protection functions within the protection IED or
from external protection devices.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 303

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

The initiate signal enables the re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to open
the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. The re-trip
function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip is
only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current
level.

The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal starts the
back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the
function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted algorithm. The
special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast
resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not
detected breaker opening before the set back-up time has elapsed, a back-up trip is
initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated a
settable time after the first back-up trip.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip
pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse
2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker.
• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option
activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal (52FAIL) is high
due to the circuit breaker being unable to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

30 ms
BFI
BFP Started

AND S 150ms
SR Q
Time out
R AND
BLOCK 0
OR
Reset
Retrip Time Out
BackupTrip OR

ANSI15000271-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000271 V1 EN

Figure 79: Simplified logic scheme of the CCSRBRF starting logic

304 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Pickup_PH
a
a>b
b

FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset
OR
Contact
1 Time out
Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High

I CB Closed
AND
OR
BFP Started

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
Pickup_BlkCont b

52a Contact Closed

AND

ANSI15000272-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000272 V1 EN

Figure 80: Simplified logic scheme of the CCSRBRF starting logic, CB position
evaluation

BFP Started Retrip Time Out

t1
0
tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRET
OR

1
OR AND

CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed
52FAIL

ANSI06000150-2-en.vsdx

ANSI06000150 V2 EN

Figure 81: Simplified logic diagram of the retrip function

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 305

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Contact Closed

OR

Current High

52FAIL
AND

BFP Started t2 Backup Trip

AND
OR
0

tPulse

OR
TRBU

tPulse

OR
TRBU2
S Q t3
R
SR
AND 0

ANSI06000156-3-en.vsdx

ANSI06000156 V3 EN

Figure 82: Simplified logic diagram of the back-up trip function

7.7.8 Technical data

Table 263: CCSRBRF (50BF) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip phase current (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Phase current pickup for (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
blocking of contact ± 1.0% of I at I > In
function
Reset ratio > 95% -
Operate time for current 20 ms typically -
detection
Reset time for current 25 ms maximum -
detection
Time delay for re-trip at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is
to 2 x Iset greater

Table continues on next page

306 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for back-up trip (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Additional time delay for a (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is

second back-up trip at 0 to greater
2 x Iset

Time delay for alarm for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is

faulty circuit breaker greater

7.8 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)

7.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN

7.8.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does
not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes
a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system.
This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies
no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it
consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the
rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The
task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

Figure 83 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher
margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted
operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 307

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One
should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator
is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Trip
Q Q
Trip
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Tripping point Tripping point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

ANSI06000315-1-en.vsd

ANSI06000315 V1 EN

Figure 83: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

7.8.3 Function block

GUPPDUP (37)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 PICKUP
BLOCK2 PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

ANSI07000027-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000027 V2 EN

Figure 84: GUPPDUP (37) function block

308 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.8.4 Signals
Table 264: GUPPDUP (37) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

Table 265: GUPPDUP (37) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup
PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 1
PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 2
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBase

7.8.5 Settings
Table 266: GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OpMode1 Disabled - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1 direction
in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power senistivity
stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 309

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpMode2 Disabled - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power senistivity
stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

Table 267: GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TD 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % SBase
IMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates current
error at 5% of Ir
IMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates current
error at 30% of Ir
IMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates current
error at 100% of Ir
VMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage
error at 5% of Ur
VMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage
error at 30% of Ur
VMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage
error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at
5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at
30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at
100% of Ir

310 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Table 268: GUPPDUP (37) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode A, B, C - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and voltage
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

7.8.6 Monitored data

Table 269: GUPPDUP (37) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of SBase

7.8.7 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in
figure 85. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 311

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S( angle)

S( angle ) < t TRIP1
power S( composant)
Chosen voltage Power1 0
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
PICKUP1

S( angle ) < t TRIP2

Power2 0
PICKUP2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

ANSI06000438-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000438 V2 EN

Figure 85: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks.
The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in
table 270.
Table 270: Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A, B, C
S = V A × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 26)
Arone
S = V AB × I A* - VBC × IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 27)
PosSeq
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 28)
AB
S = VAB × ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 29)
BC
S = VBC × ( I B* - IC * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 30)
Table continues on next page

312 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

CA
S = VCA × ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 31)
A
S = 3 × VA × I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 32)
B
S = 3 × VB × I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 33)
C
S = 3 × VC × I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 34)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated.

If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90° the
reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). For
directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional overpower
protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is
larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal
is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a
common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a
common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For
generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller
value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2)
would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 · Power1(2)) is
corrected to the minimal value.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 313

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset after
a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out and that the
timer of the stage will reset.

7.8.7.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will
make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1959-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 35)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay). When
TD is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for TD=0.92 in
case of slow operating functions.

7.8.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class
0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is
constant and linear in between, see example in figure 86.

314 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Magnitude
% of In compensation

+10
IMagComp5 Measured
IMagComp30 current

IMagComp100
5 30 100 % of In
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

+10

IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN

Figure 86: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base
power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of
base power: QPERCENT.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 315

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.8.8 Technical data

Table 271: GUPPDUP (37) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sn at S ≤ Sn
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sn
where
Sr= 1,732*Vn*In

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to trip for (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
Step 1 and Step 2 at 2 to 0.5 x Sn greater
and k=0.000

7.9 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)

7.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN

7.9.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does
not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes
a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system.
This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies
no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it
consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the
rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The
task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

316 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Figure 87 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher
margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted
operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the
underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One
should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator
is higher than 1%.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Trip
Q Q
Trip
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Tripping point Tripping point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

ANSI06000315-1-en.vsd

ANSI06000315 V1 EN

Figure 87: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

7.9.3 Function block

GOPPDOP (32)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 PICKUP
BLOCK2 PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

ANSI07000028-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000028 V2 EN

Figure 88: GOPPDOP (32) function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 317

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.9.4 Signals
Table 272: GOPPDOP (32) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

Table 273: GOPPDOP (32) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup
PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 1
PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 2
P REAL Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in % of SBase

7.9.5 Settings
Table 274: GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OpMode1 Disabled - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1 direction
in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power senistivity
stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
Table continues on next page

318 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpMode2 Disabled - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2 direction
in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power senistivity
stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

Table 275: GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of SBase
IMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates current
error at 5% of Ir
IMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates current
error at 30% of Ir
IMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates current
error at 100% of Ir
VMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage
error at 5% of Ur
VMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage
error at 30% of Ur
VMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage
error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at
5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at
30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at
100% of Ir

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 319

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Table 276: GOPPDOP (32) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode A, B, C - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and voltage
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

7.9.6 Monitored data

Table 277: GOPPDOP (32) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power Q in % of
SBase

7.9.7 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in
figure 89. The function has two stages with individual settings.

320 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
PICKUP1

S(angle) > t TRIP2

Power2
PICKUP2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

ANSI06000567-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000567 V2 EN

Figure 89: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks.
The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in
table 278.
Table 278: Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A,B,C * * *
S = V A × I A + V B × I B + V C × IC
EQUATION2038 V1 EN (Equation 36)
Arone * *
S = V AB × I A - V BC × I C
EQUATION2039 V1 EN (Equation 37)
PosSeq *
S = 3 × V PosSeq × I PosSeq
EQUATION2040 V1 EN (Equation 38)
A,B * *
S = V AB × (I A - I B )
EQUATION2041 V1 EN (Equation 39)
B,C * *
S = V BC × (I B - I C )
EQUATION2042 V1 EN (Equation 40)
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 321

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

C,A * *
S = V CA × (I C - I A )
EQUATION2043 V1 EN (Equation 41)
A *
S = 3 × V A × IA
EQUATION2044 V1 EN (Equation 42)
B *
S = 3 × V B × IB
EQUATION2045 V1 EN (Equation 43)
C *
S = 3 × V C × IC
EQUATION2046 V1 EN (Equation 44)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated.

If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90° the
reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A
pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than
the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated
if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal
PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP
will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) – drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02
p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value.
The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2):
drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) – Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2)
would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 · Power1(2)) is
corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after
a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out ant that the
timer of the stage will reset.

322 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.9.7.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will
make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 45)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k
is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.92 in case
of slow operating functions.

7.9.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class
0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is
constant and linear in between, see example in figure 90.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 323

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Magnitude
% of In compensation

+10
IMagComp5 Measured
IMagComp30 current

IMagComp100
5 30 100 % of In
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

+10

IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN

Figure 90: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.

324 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.9.8 Technical data

Table 279: GOPPDOP (32) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sn at S ≤ Sn
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sn

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Trip time, pickup at 0.5 to 2 x Sr Min. =10 ms
and k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, pickup at 2 to 0.5 x Sr Min. = 35 ms
and k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms
Independent time delay to trip for (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
Step 1 and Step 2 at 0.5 to 2 x Sn greater
and k=0.000

7.10 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC

7.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -

7.10.2 Functionality
Shunt Capacitor Banks (SCB) are used in a power system to provide reactive power
compensation and power factor correction. They are as well used as integral parts of Static
Var Compensators (SVC) or Harmonic Filters installations. Capacitor bank protection
(CBPGAPC) function is specially designed to provide protection and supervision features
for SCBs.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 325

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.10.3 Function block

CBPGAPC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TROC
BLKTR TRUC
BLKOC TRQOL
BLUC TRHOL
BLKUCCUT BFI_3P
BLKQOL PU_OC
BLKHOL PU_UC
PU_QOL
PU_HOL
PU_51_A
PU_51_B
PU_51_C
PU_37_A
PU_37_B
PU_37_C
PU_QOL_A
PU_QOL_B
PU_HOL_C
PU_HOL_DT_A
PU_HOL_DT_B
PU_HOL_DT_C
PU_HOL_IDMT_A
PU_HOL_IDMT_B
PU_HOL_IDMT_C
RECNINH

ANSI14000046-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000500 V2 EN

Figure 91: CBPGAPC function block

7.10.4 Signals
Table 280: CBPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three Phase Current Input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the complete function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip output signals
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block over current functionality
BLUC BOOLEAN 0 Block under current functionality
BLKUCCUT BOOLEAN 0 Block UC function when the capacitor bank is
disconnected
BLKQOL BOOLEAN 0 Block reactive power over load functionality
BLKHOL BOOLEAN 0 Block harmonic overload functionality

326 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Table 281: CBPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal for over current
TRUC BOOLEAN Trip signal for undercurrent
TRQOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for reactive power over load
TRHOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for harmonic over load
BFI_3P BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PU_OC BOOLEAN Pick up signal for Overcurrent
PU_UC BOOLEAN Pick up for undercurrent
PU_QOL BOOLEAN Pick up for reactive power overload
PU_HOL BOOLEAN Pick up for harmonic overload
PU_51_A BOOLEAN Pick up for overcurrent phase A
PU_51_B BOOLEAN pick up for overcurrent phase B
PU_51_C BOOLEAN Pick up for overcurrent phase C
PU_37_A BOOLEAN Pick up for undercurrent phase A
PU_37_B BOOLEAN pick up for undercurrent phase B
PU_37_C BOOLEAN pick up for undercurrent phase c
PU_QOL_A BOOLEAN pick up for reactive power overload phase A
PU_QOL_B BOOLEAN pick up for reactive power overload phase B
PU_HOL_C BOOLEAN Pick up for reactive oveload phase C
PU_HOL_DT_A BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time stage
phase L1
PU_HOL_DT_B BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time stage
phase L2
PU_HOL_DT_C BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time stage
phase L3
PU_HOL_IDMT_A BOOLEAN pick up for harmonic overload IDMT stage pf phase A
PU_HOL_IDMT_B BOOLEAN pick up for harmonic overload IDMT stage pf phase B
PU_HOL_IDMT_C BOOLEAN pick up for harmonic overload IDMT stage pf phase C
RECNINH BOOLEAN Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit signal

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 327

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.10.5 Settings
Table 282: CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OperationRecIn Disabled - - Enabled Inhibit reconnection for operation Off/On
Enabled
IRecInhibit 4 - 1000 %IB 1 10 Current in % of IBase below which the SCB is
disconnected
tReconnInhibit 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 300.00 Time delay for Capacitor Bank voltage to
discharge to <5%
OperationOC Disabled - - Enabled overcurrent enable/disable
Enabled
PU 50 10 - 900 %IB 1 135 Pick up level for overcurrent in % of Ibase
tOC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for overcurrent operation
Operation37 Disabled - - Disabled Operation of undercurrent element enable/
Enabled disable
PU_37 5 - 100 %IB 1 70 Pickup level for under current operation in % of
IBase
tUC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 time delay for undercurrent operation
Operation QOL Disabled - - Enabled Operation reactive power overload enable/
Enabled disable
UP _QOL 10 - 900 % 1 130 pick up for reactive power overload in %
tQOL 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Time delay for reactive power overload
operation
OperationHOL Disabled - - Enabled Operation harmonic over load enable/disable
Enabled
HOL_DT_V 10 - 500 % 1 200 Pickup value of voltage in % for DT harmonic
voltage overload
tHOL_DT 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Time delay for operation of harmonic voltage
overload
PU_HOL_DT_V 80 - 200 % 1 110 Pickup value of voltage in % for IDMT harm.
voltage overload
k_HOL_IDMT 0.50 - 1.50 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for harmonic voltage overload
IDMT curve
tMax_HOL_IDMT 0.05 - 6000.00 s 0.01 2000.00 Maximum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload
tmin_HOL_IDMT 0.05 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload

328 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Table 283: CBPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.10.6 Monitored data

Table 284: CBPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IPEAK_Ph_A REAL - A Equivalent RMS current for
phase A
IPEAK_Ph_B REAL - A Equivalent RMS current for
phase B
IPEAK_Ph_C REAL - A Equivalent RMS current for
phase C
V_RMS_A REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS for
phase A
V_RMS_B REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS for
phase B
V_RMS_C REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS for
phase C
Q_Ph_A REAL - % Reactive Power value for
phase A
Q_Ph_B REAL - % Reactive Power value for
phase B
Q_Ph_C REAL - % Reactive Power value for
phase C

7.10.7 Operation principle

Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function measures the SCB three-phase current.
CBPGAPC has several built-in features:
• Overcurrent stage
• Undercurrent stage
• Reconnection inhibit
• Harmonic overload
• Reactive power overload

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 329

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

7.10.7.1 Measured quantities

Three-phase input current from the SCB is connected via the preprocessing block to
CBPGAPC function. From this preprocessing block CBPGAPC function obtains the
following quantities for every phase:

• Current sample values with sampling rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2
kHz in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system cycle).
These samples correspond to the instantaneous current waveform of the protected
SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol “i~”
• Equivalent RMS current value based on Peak Current measurement. This value is
obtained as maximum absolute current sample value over last power system cycle
divided by √2 and in further text will be marked with symbol “IpeakRMS”
• Equivalent true RMS current value based on the following formula:

åi 2
~m

I TRMS = m =1

N
EQUATION2232 V1 EN (Equation 46)

where N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (that is, 20) and i~m are last
N samples of the current waveform. In further text this equivalent true rms current
quantity will be marked with symbol ITRMS.

Note that the measured IpeakRMS value is available as a service value in primary amperes
for every phase from the function.

From the measured SCB currents, voltage value across every SCB phase is calculated.
This is done by continuous integration of the measured current waveform by using the
following principal equation:

1
v ( t) = × i (t) × ¶t
C ò
EQUATION2233-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 47)

Where:
v(t) is voltage waveform across capacitor
i(t) is capacitor current waveform
C is capacitance in Farads

By using this integration procedure and subsequent filtering the following quantities for
every phase are calculated within the function:

330 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

• Voltage sample values with rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz in 60
Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system cycle). These
samples correspond to the instantaneous voltage waveform across the protected SCB
and in further text will be marked with symbol v~
• Equivalent rms voltage value based on Peak Voltage measurement. This value is
obtained as maximum absolute voltage sample value over last power system cycle
divided by √2 and in further text will be marked with symbol VpeakRMS
• Equivalent true RMS voltage value based on the following formula:

åv 2
~m

v = TRMS
m =1

N
EQUATION2234-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 48)

Where:
N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (for example, 20)
v~m are last N samples of the voltage waveform

In further text this equivalent true RMS voltage quantity will be marked with symbol
VTRMS

Some additional filtering of the calculated voltage quantities is additionally performed

within the function in order to avoid equivalent RMS voltage values overshooting during
capacitor switching.

In order to avoid dependence of the current integration on exact value of the protected
capacitor bank capacitance the whole integration process is done in per unit system. In
order to convert measured current in primary amperes into per unit value the base current
for the protected capacitor bank shall be known. This value is set as parameter IBase and
it represents the rated SCB current in primary amperes at fundamental frequency. This
value is calculated for a three-phase SCB as follows:

1000 × Q [MVAr]
IBase =
3 × V [kV ]
EQUATION2235-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 49)

Where:
IBase is base current for the function in primary amperes
Q[MVAr] is shunt capacitor bank MVAr rating
V[kV] is shunt capacitor bank rated phase-to-phase voltage in kV

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 331

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Once the base current is known the internal voltage calculations can be performed. Note
that the calculated VpeakRMS value is available as a service value in percent for every phase
from the function.

Generated reactive power (Q) by the capacitor bank is calculated within the function for
every phase as given by the following equation:

Q=V TRMS ×I TRMS

EQUATION2236-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 50)

Where:
Q is generated reactive power in per-unit
VTRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS voltage in per-unit

ITRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS current in per-unit

Additional filtering of the calculated Q quantity is performed within the function in order
to avoid overshooting during capacitor switching. Note that the calculated Q value is
available as a service value in percent for every phase from the function.

Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase of the capacitor
bank protection function are shown in figure 92.

I3P I PeakRMS [A]

Overcurrent

Undercurrent

I TRMS[A]
Reconnection Inhibit

TRMS V TRMS[ pu] Reactive Power Overload

FILTER
i~ [A]
IBase
ò v~ [ pu] PEAK VPeakRMS[pu]
Harmonic Overload
FILTER

IEC 09000746- ANSI-1-en. vsd

IEC09000746-ANSI V1 EN

Figure 92: Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase

332 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.10.7.2 Reconnection inhibit feature

This feature determines that capacitor banks are disconnected from the power system and
is used to prevent reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live network. The IRMS
values of the three phase currents are compared with the IRecInhibit parameter in order to
determine when the capacitor bank is energized or disconnected. The simplified logic
diagram is shown in fig 93.

currentRMS a 0.02 s
CapBank Energised
a>b t
b
IRecInhibit

CAPDISC
Phx
NOT

ANSI08000345-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000345 V1 EN

Figure 93: Capacitor bank energization check for one phase. Similar for all three
phases

When SCB is disconnected in all three phases, the reconnection inhibit signal will be
given. This signal will be active until the preset time elapsed and is used to inhibit the
reconnection of charged capacitor bank to live network. The internal logic diagram for the
inhibit feature is shown in figure 94.

CAPDISC

CAPDISC
_ Ph1

CAPDISC Ph2 tReconnInhibit

AND
AND RECNINH
CAPDISC Ph3
AND
Z-2

Z-2

en08000346.vsd
IEC08000346 V1 EN

Figure 94: Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit

7.10.7.3 Overcurrent feature

The overcurrent protection feature protects the capacitor bank from excessive current
conditions. The sub function takes the current peakRMS value from the preprocessing
block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is compared with the setting

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 333

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

of parameter PU 51. Whenever the peakRMS value of the current crosses the set level the
function sends a Pickup signal as output. The signal is passed through the definite timer
for giving the TRIP signal. Each phase will have its own Pickup and TRIP signals for
overcurrent. The internal logic for the overcurrent feature is shown in fig 95.

IPeakRMS a
a>b tOC
PU 51 b TROC
AND t AND

OperationOC=Enabled
PU_OC

BLKTR

BLKOC

BLOCK OR

ANSI08000350-1-en.vsd

ANSI08000350 V1 EN

Figure 95: Capacitor bank overcurrent protection

7.10.7.4 Undercurrent feature

Undercurrent protection feature is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the rest of
the power system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too low for too long
period of time. This sub function uses the current peakRMS value from the preprocessing
block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is compared to the set value
of the parameter PU_37. Whenever the peakRMS value of the current falls below the set
undercurrent level, the function will send a Pickup signal as output. The function can be
blocked when the current falls below the cut off level. The capacitor bank disconnected
signals are used for this blocking. This feature will help to prevent trip operation when the
capacitor bank is disconnected from the power system. The TRIP output signal is delayed
by a definite timer. Each phase will have its own Pickup and TRIP signals for
undercurrent. The internal logic for the undercurrent feature is shown in fig 96.

IPeakRMS
a
b>a
PU_37 b
tUC

AND t
AND TRUC
Operation37=Enabled

BLUC
PU_UC
BLOCK
OR
CAPDISC

BLKTR

ANSI08000351-1-en.vsd

ANSI08000351 V1 EN

Figure 96: Capacitor bank undercurrent protection

334 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.10.7.5 Capacitor harmonic overload feature

Harmonic overload protection feature will protect the capacitor from over load conditions
caused by harmonics. The sub-function protects the capacitor in two stages, first stage is
Inverse time delay (IDMT) based and a second stage is based on Definite Time (DT)
delay.

IDMT curve has adjustable k factor and inverse time characteristic is shown in figure 97,
where k = 1. The IDMT curve starts only when the equivalent RMS voltage value is higher
than set value of parameter PU_HOL_DT_V and stays active until the value falls below
the reset value.

2.3
Voltage Peak RMS [pu]

2.1

1.9

1.7

1.5

1.3

1.1
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Trip Time [s]
ANSI08000352-1-en.vsd

ANSI08000352 V1 EN

Figure 97: IDMT curve for harmonic overload (K_HOL_IDMT=1.0)

Main seven triping points for this IDMT curve are defined by IEC/ANSI standards and
they are shown in above figure and summarized in the following table:
Table 285: Main triping points for IDMT curve

VpeakRMS 1.15 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.2

[pu]
Time [s] 1800 300 60 15 1.0 0.3 0.12

Note the following regarding this IDMT curve:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 335

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

1. When parameter K_HOL_IDMT has different value from 1.0 triping time is
proportionally changed (for example, when K_HOL_IDMT =0.9 triping times will be
90% of the values shown in above figure 97 and table 285)
2. Between the seven main points in table 285, the trip time is calculate by using linear
interpolation in the logarithmic scale
3. Integration process is used to calculate the trip time for varying voltage condition
4. By setting parameter tmin_HOL_IDMT =0.1s standard requirements for minimum
triping time of 100ms for harmonic overload IDMT curve can be fluffed
5. By setting parameter tMax_HOL_IDMT =2000s operation for small harmonics
overload condition when VpeakRMS is in-between 1.1pu and 1.2pu is assured

Harmonic overload definite time curve has settings facilities for independent pickup and
time delay. It can be used as separate tripping stage or as an alarm stage.

Both of these two harmonic overload stages are active during capacitor bank energizing
and are capable to properly measure and trip up to and including 9th harmonic.

The internal logic for harmonic overload feature is shown in figure 98:

PU_HOL_DT_X
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b
HOL_DT_V b

tHOL_DT
t
OperationHOL=Enabled AND
OR TRHOL
AND

BLKHOL

BLOCK
OR OR
PU_HOL

BLKTR

OperationHOL=Enabled AND
TR
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b k_HOL_IDMT IDMT
PU_HOL_DT_V b
tMax_HOL_IDMT
PU_HOL_IDMT_X
tmin_HOL_IDMT ST

UPeakRMS [pu]

ANSI09000752-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000752 V1 EN

Figure 98: Simplified logic diagram for harmonic overload

336 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.10.7.6 Capacitor reactive power overload feature

Reactive power overload protection feature will protect the capacitor bank from reactive
power overload conditions.

The sub-function will use the reactive power values as input. The reactive power input
values are calculated from the true RMS value of voltage and current. The reactive power
value is compared with the QOL> setting. When the reactive power value exceeds the
QOL> setting the STQOL signal will be activated. The pickup signal is delayed by the
definite timer before activating the TRQOL signal. The internal logic diagram for this
feature is shown in figure 99.

Q [pu]
a
a>b
UP_QOL b

tQOL
t
Operation QOL=Enabled AND
TRQOL
AND
BLKTR

BLKQOL
PU_QOL_X
BLOCK
OR

ANSI08000353-1-en.vsd

ANSI08000353 V1 EN

Figure 99: Capacitor bank reactive power overload protection

7.10.8 Technical data

Table 286: CBPGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip value, overcurrent (10-900)% of lBase ±2.0% of In at I ≤ In
±2.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% at (100-900)% of IBase -

Pickup time, overcurrent, at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -
2 x Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, overcurrent, at 2 x Min. = 25 ms -
Iset to 0.5 Max. = 40 ms
Critical impulse time, overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset -
protection pickup 1 ms typically at 0.5 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically
protection pickup
Trip value, undercurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of In

Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 337

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset ratio, undercurrent <105% at (30-100)% of IBase -
Trip value, reconnection inhibit (4-1000)% of IBase ±1.0% of In at I < In
function ±1.0% of I at I > In

Trip value, reactive power (10-900)% ±1.0% of Sn at S < Sn

overload function ±1.0% of S at S > Sn

Trip value, voltage protection (10-500)% ±0.5% of Vn at V < Vn

function for harmonic overload ±0.5% of V at V > Vn
(Definite time)
Trip value, voltage protection (80-200)% ±0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
function for harmonic overload ±0.5% of V at V > Vn
(Inverse time)
Inverse time characteristic According to IEC 60871-1 (2005) and ±20% or ±200 ms
IEEE/ANSI C37.99 (2000) whichever is greater
Maximum trip delay, harmonic (0.05-6000.00) s ±20% or ±200 ms
overload IDMT whichever is greater
Minimum trip delay, harmonic (0.05-60.00) s ±20% or ±200 ms
overload IDMT whichever is greater
Independent time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is greater
Independent time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms
undercurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 whichever is greater
Independent time delay, reactive (1.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms
power overload function at 0 to 2 whichever is greater
x QOL>
Independent time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
harmonic overload at 0 to 2 x whichever is greater
HOL>

338 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

Section 8 Voltage protection

8.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)

8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN

8.1.2 Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. Two
step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-
up to primary protection.

UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

UV2PTUV (27) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 339

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.1.3 Function block

UV2PTUV (27)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLKTR1 TRST1_A
BLK1 TRST1_B
BLKTR2 TRST1_C
BLK2 TRST2
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C

ANSI06000276-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000276 V2 EN

Figure 100: UV2PTUV (27) function block

8.1.4 Signals
Table 287: UV2PTUV (27) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 1
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 2
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 288: UV2PTUV (27) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A
TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase B
TRST1_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase C
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TRST2_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase A
Table continues on next page

340 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

TRST2_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase B
TRST2_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase C
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2
PU_ST2_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase A
PU_ST2_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase B
PU_ST2_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase C

8.1.5 Settings
Table 289: UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of
2 out of 3 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
Pickup1 1.0 - 100.0 %VB 0.1 70.0 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse-
Time curve) in % of VBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Disabled - - Disabled Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %VB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of
VBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for
step 1
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 341

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of
2 out of 3 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
Pickup2 1.0 - 100.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse-
Time curve) in % of VBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 2
TD2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 2
IntBlkSel2 Disabled - - Disabled Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %VB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of
VBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for
step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

Table 290: UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for
Frozen timer step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

342 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage Inverse-
Time curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage Inverse-
Time curve, step 2

Table 291: UV2PTUV (27) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.1.6 Monitored data

Table 292: UV2PTUV (27) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VA REAL - kV Voltage in phase A
VB REAL - kV Voltage in phase B
VC REAL - kV Voltage in phase C

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 343

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.1.7 Operation principle

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding PICKUP
signal is generated. UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains
below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the
related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available,
that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no
PICKUP or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen
for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.

UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-to-

phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS
value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage
related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase
voltage. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) ×VBase(kV )

3
EQUATION1606 V1 EN (Equation 51)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 52)

When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of
three.

8.1.7.1 Measurement principle

Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or

phase-to-phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The
parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP
outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than
the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

344 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

8.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
undervoltage (TUV). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

TD
t=
Vpickup < -V
Vpickup <
ANSIEQUATION1431 V1 EN (Equation 53)

where:
Vpickup Set value for step 1 and step 2
<
V Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

TD × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Vpickup < -V ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Vpickup < ø
EQUATION1608 V1 EN (Equation 54)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

é ù
ê ú
TD × A
t=ê ú+D
ê æ Vpickup < -V ö ú
P

êç B × -C÷ ú
ëè Vpickup ø û
EQUATION1609 V1 EN (Equation 55)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup< down to Vpickup< ·

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 345

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

(1.0 – CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 56)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the
different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 22.3 "Inverse characteristics".

Figure 101: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Voltage

VA
VB
VC

IDMT Voltage

Time
ANSI12000186-1-en.vsd

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user
set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT)
and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode
(TUV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2
for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the
corresponding pickup output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the
signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the
TUV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the
drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is
linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 102 and figure 103.

346 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage Measured
PICKUP Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP

PICKUP1

Time

PICKUP t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased ANSI05000010-3-en.vsd

ANSI05000010 V3 EN

Figure 102: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 347

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Voltage tIReset1
tIReset1
PICKUP
PICKUP
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP

PICKUP 1

Time

PICKUP t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased ANSI05000011-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000011 V2 EN

Figure 103: Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset
types

Definite timer delay

348 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

When definite time delay is selected the function will trip as shown in figure 104. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 105 and
figure 106 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the
definite time delayed stage is ensured.
PU_ST1

V
a
a<b 0 t1 TRST1
Pickup1
b R tReset1 0
AND

ANSI09000785-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000785 V3 EN

Figure 104: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

Pickup1

PU_ST1

TRST1

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000039-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000039 V3 EN

Figure 105: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 349

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Pickup1

PU_ST1

TRST1

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000040-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000040 V3 EN

Figure 106: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

8.1.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) partially or

completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip
output of step 1, or both the trip and the PICKUP outputs of step 1, are blocked. The
characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can
also be set to Disabled resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and
functionality are valid also for step 2.

In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very
low. The event will PICKUP both the under voltage function and the blocking function,
as seen in figure 107. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time
delay of under voltage function.

350 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

V Disconnection

Normal voltage

Pickup1

Pickup2

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000466 V1 EN

Figure 107: Blocking function

8.1.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters
of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value,
and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special
logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the
PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) is
schematically shown in Figure 108.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 351

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

VA Comparator PU_ST1_A
VA < V1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
PU_ST1_B
VB Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
VB < V1< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Pickup PU_ST1_C
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
VC Comparator t1Reset
VC < V1< IntBlkStVal1 & PU_ST1
Trip OR
Output
PICKUP Logic TRST1_A

Step 1 TRST1_B
Time integrator
tIReset1 TRIP
MinVoltSelector
ResetTypeCrv1 TRST1_C

TRST1
OR

Comparator PU_ST2_A
VA < V2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
PU_ST2_B
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
VB < V2< 1 out of 3 Pickup
2 out of 3 t2 PU_ST2_C
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
VC < V2< Trip PU_ST2
Output OR
Logic
PICKUP TRST2_A

Step 2
TRST2_B
Time integrator
tIReset2 TRIP
MinVoltSelector
ResetTypeCrv2 TRST2_C

TRST2
OR
PICKUP
OR

TRIP
OR

ANSI05000012-3-en.vsd

ANSI05000012 V3 EN

Figure 108: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)

352 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

8.1.8 Technical data

Table 293: UV2PTUV (27) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip voltage, low and high (1.0–100.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn
step
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Internal blocking level, (1.0–50.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

step 1 and step 2
Inverse time - See table 876
characteristics for step 1
and step 2, see table 876
Definite time delay, step 1 (0.00-6000.00) s less than 40 ms
at 1.2 to 0 x Vset

Definite time delay, step 2 (0.000-60.000) s less than 40 ms

at 1.2 to 0 x Vset

Minimum trip time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is

characteristics greater
Trip time, pickup at 2 to 0 x Min. = 15 ms -
Vset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, pickup at 0 to 2 Min. = 15 ms -

x Vset Max. = 30 ms

Trip time, pickup at 1.2 to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

x Vset Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, pickup at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -

1.2 x Vset Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)

8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 353

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV

Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden
power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.

Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) function can be used to detect open line
ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to
supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in
reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.

OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.

OV2PTOV (59) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

8.2.3 Function block

OV2PTOV (59)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLKTR1 TRST1_A
BLK1 TRST1_B
BLKTR2 TRST1_C
BLK2 TRST2
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C

ANSI06000277-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000277 V2 EN

Figure 109: OV2PTOV (59) function block

8.2.4 Signals
Table 294: OV2PTOV (59) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 1
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 2
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

354 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

Table 295: OV2PTOV (59) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A
TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase B
TRST1_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase C
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TRST2_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase A
TRST2_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase B
TRST2_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase C
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2
PU_ST2_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase A
PU_ST2_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase B
PU_ST2_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase C

8.2.5 Settings
Table 296: OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of
2 out of 3 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
Pickup1 1.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse-
Time curve) in % of VBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 355

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of
2 out of 3 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
Pickup2 1.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse-
Time curve) in % of VBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 2
TD2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

Table 297: OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for
Frozen timer step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage
TOV curve, step 1
Table continues on next page

356 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage
TOV curve, step 2

Table 298: OV2PTOV (59) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.2.6 Monitored data

Table 299: OV2PTOV (59) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VA REAL - kV Voltage in phase A
VB REAL - kV Voltage in phase B
VC REAL - kV Voltage in phase C

8.2.7 Operation principle

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 357

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

OV2PTOV (59) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of

the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value
for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is
issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage VBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV (59) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-to-

phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) will trip if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the
set base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) ⋅ VBase(kV ) / 3

EQUATION1610 V2 EN (Equation 57)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1992 V1 EN (Equation 58)

When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of
three.

8.2.7.1 Measurement principle

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 for Step 1 and Pickup2 for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2
influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or
3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding PICKUP signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis is included.

358 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

8.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

TD
t=
V − Vpickup >
Vpickup >
EQUATION1625 V2 EN (Equation 59)

where:
Vpickup Set value for step 1 and step 2
>
V Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

TD ⋅ 480
t= + 0.035
V − Vpickup >
32 ⋅ − 0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2287 V3 EN (Equation 60)

The type C curve is described as:

TD ⋅ 480
t= + 0.035
V − Vpickup >
32 ⋅ − 0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN (Equation 61)

The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B, C, D, k

and p are settings:

TD × A
t= P
+D
æ V - Vpickup ö
çB× -C÷
è Vpickup ø
EQUATION1616 V1 EN (Equation 62)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 359

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup · (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 63)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see figure 110. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are
shown in section "Inverse characteristics".

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

VA
VB
VC

Time

ANSI05000016-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000016 V2 EN

Figure 110: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode
(TOV). If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2
for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding
PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be
noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again
and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The
hysteresis value for each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2
respectively) to allow a high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV (59) the

360 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

TOV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the
drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is
linearly decreased during the reset time.

tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
TRIP

PU_Overvolt1

HystAbs1
Measured
Voltage

Time

PICKUP t

TRIP

Time Linearly
Integrator
decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Time
Instantaneous
ANSI05000019-3-en.vsd

ANSI05000019 V3 EN

Figure 111: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 361

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
PICKUP TRIP
PICKUP
HystAbs1

Pickup1

Measured Voltage

Time

PICKUP t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time

Instantaneous Linearly decreased ANSI05000020-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000020 V2 EN

Figure 112: Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset
types

Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will trip as shown in figure 113. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 105 and
figure 106 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s (where n means either 1 or 2
respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

362 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

PU_ST1

V tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TRST1
Vpickup>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

ANSI10000100-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000100 V2 EN

Figure 113: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation

Pickup1

PICKUP

TRIP

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000037-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000037 V2 EN

Figure 114: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 363

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Pickup1

PICKUP

TRIP

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000038 V2 EN

Figure 115: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

8.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV, (59) partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

8.2.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters
of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set
value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A
special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the
PICKUP condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is
schematically described in figure 116.

364 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

VA Comparator PU_ST1_A
VA > Phase A
Pickup 1 Voltage Phase
Selector PU_ST1_B
VB Comparator
OpMode1 Phase B
VB >
Pickup 1 1 out of 3 Pickup
2 out of 3 t1 PU_ ST1_C
3 out of 3 Phase C
VC Comparator t1Reset
VC > &
Pickup 1 Phase C Trip PU_ST1
OR
Output
Logic
PICKUP TRST1-A

Step1
TRST1_B
Time integrator TRIP
MaxVoltSelect
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TRST1_C

TRST1
OR

Comparator
VA > PU_ST2_A
Pickup 2 Voltage Phase Phase A
Selector
PU_ST2_B
Comparator OpMode2 Phase B
VB >
Pickup 2 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 PU_ST2_C
3 out of 3 Pickup
Phase C
Comparator t2
VC > t2Reset
Pickup 2 & PU_ST2
OR
Trip
Output
PICKUP Logic TRST2-A

Step 2 TRST2-B
Time integrator TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRST2-C

TRST2
OR

OR PICKUP

TRIP
OR

ANSI05000013-2-en.vsd
_ .
ANSI05000013 V2 EN

Figure 116: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 365

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.2.8 Technical data

Table 300: OV2PTOV (59) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip voltage, step 1 (1.0-200.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn at V ≤ Vn
and 2 ±0.5% of V at V > Vn

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn at V ≤ Vn

±0.5% of V at V > Vn

Inverse time - See table 875

characteristics for
steps 1 and 2, see
table 875
Definite time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is
low step (step 1) at 0 greater
to 1.2 x Vset

Definite time delay, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is

high step (step 2) at 0 greater
to 1.2 x Vset

Minimum trip time, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

Inverse
characteristics
Trip time, pickup at 0 Min. = 15 ms -
to 2 x Vset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, pickup at Min. = 15 ms -

2 to 0 x Vset Max. = 30 ms

Trip time, pickup at 0 Min. = 20 ms -

to 1.2 x Vset Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, , pickup Min. = 5 ms -

at 1.2 to 0 x Vset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

(59N)

8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0
TRV V1 EN

366 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

8.3.2 Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the
residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a
single voltage input transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.

ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent ground faults.

8.3.3 Function block

ROV2PTOV (59N)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLKTR1 TRST2
BLK1 PICKUP
BLKTR2 PU_ST1
BLK2 PU_ST2

ANSI06000278-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000278 V2 EN

Figure 117: ROV2PTOV (59N) function block

8.3.4 Signals
Table 301: ROV2PTOV (59N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 1
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 2
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 302: ROV2PTOV (59N) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 367

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2

8.3.5 Settings
Table 303: ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Pickup1 1.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV), step
1 in % of VBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Pickup2 1.0 - 100.0 %VB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV), step
2 in % of VBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 2
TD2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

368 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

Table 304: ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for
Frozen timer step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage
TOV curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Definite-Time reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage
TOV curve, step 2

Table 305: ROV2PTOV (59N) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 369

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.3.6 Monitored data

Table 306: ROV2PTOV (59N) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VLevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured
voltage

8.3.7 Operation principle

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect high single-
phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3V0. The residual voltage can be
measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from
a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open
delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-phase voltages and internally in the IED
calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage
to ROV2PTOV (59N). ROV2PTOV (59N) has two steps with separate time delays. If the
single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV,
phase-phase.

8.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, Pickup1
and Pickup2.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

370 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

TD
t=
æ V - Vpickup > ö
ç ÷
è Vpickup > ø
ANSIEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 64)

where:
Vn> Set value for step 1 and step 2
V Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

TD × 480
t= 2.0
- 0.035
æ V - Vpickup > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Vpickup > ø
ANSIEQUATION2423 V1 EN (Equation 65)

The type C curve is described as:

TD × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ V - Vpickup > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Vpickup > ø
ANSIEQUATION2421 V1 EN (Equation 66)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

TD × A
t= P
+D
æ V - Vpickup ö
çB× -C÷
è Vpickup ø
EQUATION1616 V1 EN (Equation 67)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup · (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN (Equation 68)

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 371

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time
mode (TOV).

If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the
definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding PICKUP
output is reset, after the defined reset time has elapsed.

Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must
be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function TOV reset time is constant and does not
depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three
ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen
during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 111 and figure 112.

372 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
TRIP

PU_Overvolt1

HystAbs1
Measured
Voltage

Time

PICKUP t

TRIP

Time Linearly
Integrator
decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Time
Instantaneous
ANSI05000019-3-en.vsd

ANSI05000019 V3 EN

Figure 118: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 373

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
PICKUP TRIP
PICKUP
HystAbs1

Pickup1

Measured Voltage

Time

PICKUP t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time

Instantaneous Linearly decreased ANSI05000020-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000020 V2 EN

Figure 119: Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will trip as shown in figure 120. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 105 and
figure 106 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the
definite time delayed stage is ensured.

374 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

PU_ST1

V tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TRST1
Vpickup>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

ANSI10000100-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000100 V2 EN

Figure 120: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

Pickup1

PICKUP

TRIP

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000037-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000037 V2 EN

Figure 121: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 375

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Pickup1

PICKUP

TRIP

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000038 V2 EN

Figure 122: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

8.3.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)

partially or completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip inputs related to step 2

8.3.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive
Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency. The single input
voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N)
is schematically described in figure 123.

376 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

VN Comparator Phase 1 PU_ ST1

VN >
Pickup 1
Pickup TRST1
PICKUP t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP Logic
ResetTypeCrv1 Step 1

Comparator PU_ST2
Phase 1
VN >
TRST2
Pickup2 Pickup
t2
PICKUP tReset2
& PICKUP
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
tIReset2 TRIP Logic
ResetTypeCrv2 Step 2 TRIP
OR

ANSI05000748-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000748 V2 EN

Figure 123: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV (59N)

8.3.8 Technical data

Table 307: ROV2PTOV (59N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip voltage, step 1 and (1.0-200.0)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
step 2 ± 0.5% of Vn at V > Vn

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn

± 0.5% of Vn at V > Vn

Inverse time - See table 877

characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 877
Definite time delay low (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is
step (step 1) at 0 to 1.2 greater
x Vset

Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 377

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delay high (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is
step (step 2) at 0 to 1.2 greater
x Vset

Minimum trip time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

greater
Trip time, pickup at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -
2 x Vset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, pickup at 2 Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 x Vset Max. = 30 ms

Trip time, pickup at 0 to Min. = 20 ms -

1.2 x Vset Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, pickup at Min. = 5 ms -

1.2 to 0 x Vset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.4 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)

8.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

8.4.2 Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two
three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step.

8.4.3 Function block

VDCPTOV (60)
V3P1* TRIP
V3P2* PICKUP
BLOCK ALARM
V1LOW
V2LOW
VDIFF_A
VDIFF_B
VDIFF_C

ANSI06000528-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000528 V2 EN

Figure 124: VDCPTOV (60) function block

378 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

8.4.4 Signals
Table 308: VDCPTOV (60) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P1 GROUP - Bus voltage
SIGNAL
V3P2 GROUP - Capacitor voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 309: VDCPTOV (60) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection operated
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup of voltage differential protection
ALARM BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection alarm
V1LOW BOOLEAN Loss of V1 voltage
V2LOW BOOLEAN Loss of V2 voltage
VDIFF_A REAL Differential Voltage phase A
VDIFF_B REAL Differential Voltage phase B
VDIFF_C REAL Differential Voltage phase C

8.4.5 Settings
Table 310: VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
BlkDiffAtVLow No - - Yes Block operation at low voltage
Yes
VDTrip 2.0 - 100.0 %VB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of VBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for voltage differential operate, in
seconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for voltage differential reset, in
seconds
VDAlarm 2.0 - 100.0 %VB 0.1 2.0 Alarm level, in % of VBase
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in
seconds
V1Low 1.0 - 100.0 %VB 0.1 70.0 Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of VBase
V2Low 1.0 - 100.0 %VB 0.1 70.0 Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of VBase
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time for undervoltage block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 379

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Table 311: VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RF_A 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L1
U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
RF_B 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L2
U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
RF_C 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L3
U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

Table 312: VDCPTOV (60) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.4.6 Monitored data

Table 313: VDCPTOV (60) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VDIFF_A REAL - kV Differential Voltage phase A
VDIFF_B REAL - kV Differential Voltage phase B
VDIFF_C REAL - kV Differential Voltage phase C

8.4.7 Operation principle

The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison of
the magnitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between
the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with
a ratio correction factors RF_X. The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the
alarm level VDAlarm or trip level VDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip
(TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three
phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings V1Low and V2Low.
The outputs for loss of voltage V1LOW resp V2LOW will be activated. The V1 voltage
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the V2 voltage is supervised for loss
of all three phases.

Loss of all V1 or all V2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking
can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.

VDCPTOV (60) function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can, for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function
FUFSPVC.

380 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service

value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in
normal service.

The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 125.

VDTrip_A
AND

VDTrip_B O
AND 0 0-tTrip TRIP
R 0-tReset 0 AND

VDTrip_C
AND
AND PICKUP

VDAlarm_A
AND

VDAlarm_B O 0-tAlarm
AND ALARM
R 0 AND

VDAlarm_C
AND

V1Low_A

V1Low_B AND 0-tAlarm

AND V1LOW
0

V1Low_C AND
OR
BlkDiffAtULow

V2Low_A

V2Low_B AND 0-t1 V2LOW

0 AND

V2Low_C

BLOCK

en06000382_2_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000382 V3 EN

Figure 125: Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV (60)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 381

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.4.8 Technical data

Table 314: VDCPTOV (60) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and (2.0–100.0) % of VBase ±0.5% of Vn
trip
Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Independent time delay for (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is

voltage differential alarm at 0.8 to greater
1.2 x VDAlarm
Independent time delay for (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
voltage differential trip at 0.8 to greater
1.2 x VDTrip
Independent time delay for (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
voltage differential reset at 1.2 to greater
0.8 x VDTrip

8.5 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)

8.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

8.5.2 Functionality
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) is suitable for use in networks with an automatic
system restoration function. LOVPTUV (27) issues a three-pole trip command to the
circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than the
set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

The operation of LOVPTUV (27) is supervised by the fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.

382 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

8.5.3 Function block

LOVPTUV (27)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
CBOPEN
VTSU

ANSI07000039-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000039 V2 EN

Figure 126: LOVPTUV (27) function block

8.5.4 Signals
Table 315: LOVPTUV (27) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 316: LOVPTUV (27) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal

8.5.5 Settings
Table 317: LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
VPG 1 - 100 %VB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage VBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 383

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

Table 318: LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages are
not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after
restoration

Table 319: LOVPTUV (27) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.5.6 Operation principle

The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV (27) is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes
if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases
are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The PICKUP output signal
indicates pickup.

Additionally, LOVPTUV (27) is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages
have been detected low for more than tBlock.

LOVPTUV (27) operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least
tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit
breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by
setting tPulse.

The operation of LOVPTUV (27) is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKV input)
and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions
of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. LOVPTUV
(27) is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked
from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).

384 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
AND
Blocked = Yes

PICKUP
BLOCK OR

Function Enable tPulse TRIP

PU_V_A AND 0-tTrip
0

PU_V_B AND
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
PU_V_C Enable
AND

OR 0-tBlock
0

CBOPEN Reset Enable

OR
AND
VTSU

OR 0-tRestore
Set Enable
0 OR

Line restored for

at least 3 s

ANSI07000089_2_en.vsd

ANSI07000089 V2 EN

Figure 127: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 385

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.5.7 Technical data

Table 320: LOVPTUV (27) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip voltage (1–100)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Pulse timer when disconnecting (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is

all three phases greater
Time delay for enabling the (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
functions after restoration greater
Trip time delay when (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
disconnecting all three phases greater
Time delay to block when all three (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
phase voltages are not low greater

386 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

Section 9 Frequency protection

9.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81)

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN

9.1.2 Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is
used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.
Separate definite time delays are provided for trip and restore.

SAPTUF (81) is provided with undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-
phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to
connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/
Setting guidelines

9.1.3 Function block

SAPTUF (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
FREQ

ANSI06000279-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000279 V2 EN

Figure 128: SAPTUF (81) function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 387

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Frequency protection

9.1.4 Signals
Table 321: SAPTUF (81L) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

Table 322: SAPTUF (81L) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low voltage amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

9.1.5 Settings
Table 323: SAPTUF (81L) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PUFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 50.10 Restore frequency value
TimerMode Definite timer - - Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode
Volt based timer
VNom 50.0 - 150.0 %VB 1.0 100.0 Nominal voltage for voltage based timer in % of
UBase
VMin 50.0 - 150.0 %VB 1.0 90.0 Lower operation limit for voltage based timer in
% of VBase
Exponent 0.0 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for voltage
based timer
t_MaxTripDelay 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
t_MinTripDelay 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage based
timer

388 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

Table 324: SAPTUF (81L) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.1.6 Monitored data

Table 325: SAPTUF (81L) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VLevel REAL - kV Level of measured voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

9.1.7 Operation principle

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF (81) can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time
delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time delay will be
longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the voltage is lower. If the
frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time
delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than
the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no
PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.

9.1.7.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and
compared with the set value, PUFrequency. The frequency function is dependent on the
voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting
MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is described in the Basic
IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter,
SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings
are made in percent of the setting VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in
kV.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 389

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Frequency protection

9.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay
depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low
voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tDelay sets
the time delay.

For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings VNom,
VMin, Exponent, t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay set the time delay according to
figure 129 and equation 69. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of
time delay to apply.

Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay tDelay. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back
to the hysteresis area.

On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF (81) a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level
corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

9.1.7.3 Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except
some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to
take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very
suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage.
Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure that load
shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant voltage, V, the
voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 69. At non-constant
voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar way as for the inverse time
characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.

390 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

Exponent
é V - VMin ù
t=ê × ( t _ MaxTripDelay - t _ MinTripDelay ) + t _ MinTripDelay
ëVNom - VMin úû
EQUATION1559 V1 EN (Equation 69)

where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
V is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
VMin, VNom are voltage settings corresponding to
t_MaxTripDelay, t_MinTripDelay are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 129, for:

VMin = 90%
= 100%
t_MaxTrip = 1.0 s
Delay
t_MinTripD = 0.0 s
elay
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]

2
3
0.5 4

0
90 95 100

V [% of VBase]
en05000075_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000075 V1 EN

Figure 129: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF (81). The time delay to trip is plotted as a function of
the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 391

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Frequency protection

9.1.7.4 Blocking

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) partially or completely, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

9.1.7.5 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can trip either
due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the
frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued
after the time delay tRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is
schematically described in figure 130.

392 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

Block
BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel

Voltage Time integrator

Pickup
TimerOperation Mode & PICKUP
Selector PICKUP
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < PuFrequency Output
TimeDlyOperate TRIP Logic

TimeDlyReset TRIP

100 ms

Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

en05000726_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000726 V1 EN

Figure 130: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF (81)

9.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 393

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Frequency protection

9.2.2 Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network.
Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over frequency.

SAPTOF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for generation
shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating load
restoring. A definite time delay is provided for trip.

SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-
phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to
connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/
Setting guidelines

9.2.3 Function block

SAPTOF (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
FREQ

ANSI06000280-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000280 V2 EN

Figure 131: SAPTOF (81) function block

9.2.4 Signals
Table 326: SAPTOF (81H) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output

394 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

Table 327: SAPTOF (81H) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

9.2.5 Settings
Table 328: SAPTOF (81H) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PUFrequency 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

Table 329: SAPTOF (81H) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.2.6 Monitored data

Table 330: SAPTOF (81H) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VLevel REAL - kV Level of measured voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

9.2.7 Operation principle

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP
signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at
low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the
preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the
preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 395

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Frequency protection

9.2.7.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously,

and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)
is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the
setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is discussed in the
Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter
VBase, SAPTOF (81) is blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage
settings are made in percent of the VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in
kV. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting tDelay.

TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay, tReset. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must
be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.

The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus minimum
trip time of the pickup function (80 - 90 ms).

9.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) partially or completely, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

396 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

9.2.7.4 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time
integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of overfrequency protection
SAPTOF (81) is schematically described in figure 132.

BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel

Pickup
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay PICKUP PICKUP
Frequency Comparator
f > PuFrequency TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP

en05000735_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000735 V1 EN

Figure 132: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTOF (81)

9.2.8 Technical data

Table 331: SAPTOF (81) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip value, pickup function at (35.00-90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
symmetrical three-phase voltage
Trip time, pickup at fset -0.02 Hz to Min. = 80 ms -
fn = 50Hz
fset +0.02 Hz Max. = 95 ms
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 397

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Frequency protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time, pickup at fset +0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms -
to fset -0.02 Hz Max. = 30 ms

Trip time, definite time function at (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±100 ms

fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz whichever is greater

Reset time, definite time function (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±120 ms,

at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz whichever is greater

9.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)

9.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN

9.3.2 Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC (81) gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) measures frequency with high
accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action
schemes. SAPFRC (81) can discriminate between a positive or negative change of
frequency. A definite time delay is provided for trip.

SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on

positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs,
refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.

398 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

9.3.3 Function block

SAPFRC (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN

ANSI06000281-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000281 V2 EN

Figure 133: SAPFRC (81) function block

9.3.4 Signals
Table 332: SAPFRC (81R) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

Table 333: SAPFRC (81R) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
PICKUP BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low magnitude

9.3.5 Settings
Table 334: SAPFRC (81R) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PUFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient pick up value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 399

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Frequency protection

9.3.6 Monitored data

Table 335: SAPFRC (81R) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STARTDUR REAL - % Start duration in percents of
the total operation time

9.3.7 Operation principle

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes at an early stage. SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the
rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for
a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-
change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time
period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip
due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude a voltage controlled
blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function. If the voltage is
lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function the function is blocked
and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency
decrease, a restore signal is issued.

9.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFreqGrad. Rate-of-change frequency
protection SAPFRC (81) is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function,
which is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC (81) is blocked,
and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad, controls if
SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If SAPFRC (81)
is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting PUFreqGrad has been given a negative
value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE
output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A
positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC (81) to PICKUP and TRIP for frequency
increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.3.7.2 Time delay

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay,
tTrip. .

400 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for
at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back
into the hysteresis area.

The RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the
restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is
only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new
negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings
RestoreFreq and tRestore.

9.3.7.3 Blocking

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) can be partially or totally blocked, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function, both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

9.3.7.4 Design

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) measuring element continuously

measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
PUFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system
switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the
frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued
after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the
setting PUFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or
lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC (81) is schematically described in
figure 134.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 401

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Frequency protection

BLOCK
BLKTRIP

BLKRESET BLOCK
OR

Voltage Comparator BLKDMAGN

V < IntBlockLevel

Pickup
Rate-of-Change Time integrator &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output
[PickupFreqGrad<0 PICKUP Logic PICKUP
AND
TimeDlyOperate
df/dt < PickupFreqGrad]
OR
TimeDlyReset
[PickupFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > PickupFreqGrad]
Then
PICKUP
100 ms

Frequency Comparator RESTORE

TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

en05000835_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000835 V1 EN

Figure 134: Simplified logic diagram for SAPFRC (81)

9.3.8 Technical data

Table 336: SAPFRC (81) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip value, pickup function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
Trip value, restore enable (45.00-65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
frequency
Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
greater
Definite time delay for frequency (0.200-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is
gradient trip greater
Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater

402 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Section 10 Multipurpose protection

10.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -

10.1.2 Function block

CVGAPC
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 PICKUP
BLKUC1TR PU_OC1
BLKUC2 PU_OC2
BLKUC2TR PU_UC1
BLKOV1 PU_UC2
BLKOV1TR PU_OV1
BLKOV2 PU_OV2
BLKOV2TR PU_UV1
BLKUV1 PU_UV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
VDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
VIANGLE

ANSI05000372-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000372 V2 EN

Figure 135: CVGAPC function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 403

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

10.1.3 Signals
Table 337: CVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 338: CVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
Table continues on next page

404 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Type Description

TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PU_OC1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC1
PU_OC2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC2
PU_UC1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC1
PU_UC2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC2
PU_OV1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV1
PU_OV2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV2
PU_UV1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV1
PU_UV2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
VDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
VIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 405

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

10.1.4 Settings
Table 339: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
CurrentInput Phase A - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be measured
Phase B inside function
Phase C
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
Phase AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput Phase A - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be measured
Phase B inside function
Phase C
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
Phase AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable operation of 2nd harmonic
Enabled restrain
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
BlkLevel2nd 10 - 5000 %IB 1 5000 Harm analyse disabled above this current level
in % of fundamental current
EnRestrainCurr Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable current restrain function
Enabled
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be used for
NegSeq current restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
Table continues on next page

406 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of VBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation of OC1
Enabled
PickupCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of IBase
CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay OC1
TD_OC1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for
OC1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of
IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for
OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - - Disabled Control mode for voltage controlled OC1
Disabled function
VDepMode_OC1 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope)
Slope
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC1
is voltage dependent
VLowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of UBase
VHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of UBase
HarmRestr_OC1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain
Enabled
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,
Forward reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&V - - I&V Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC1
IcosPhi&V
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir,
Block Blk, Mem)
Memory
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 407

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operation_OC2 Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation od OC2
Enabled
PickupCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC2 in % of IBase
CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay OC2
TD_OC2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for
OC2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of
IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for
OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - - Disabled Control mode for voltage controlled OC2
Disabled function
VDepMode_OC2 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope)
Slope
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC2
is voltage dependent
VLowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of UBase
VHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of UBase
HarmRestr_OC2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain
Enabled
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,
Forward reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&V - - I&V Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC2
IcosPhi&V
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir,
Block Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_UC1 Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable operation of UC1
Enabled
Table continues on next page

408 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EnBlkLowI_UC1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable internal low current level blocking for
Enabled UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in %
of IBase
PickupCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of
IBase
tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain
Enabled
Operation_UC2 Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable operation of UC2
Enabled
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable internal low current level blocking for
Enabled UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in %
of IBase
PickupCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of
IBase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain
Enabled
Operation_OV1 Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable operation of OV1
Enabled
PickupVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of VBase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use
of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves
for OV1
TD_OV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for
OV1
Operation_OV2 Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable operation of OV2
Enabled
PickupVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of VBase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use
of OV2
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 409

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves
for OV2
TD_OV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for
OV2
Operation_UV1 Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable operation of UV1
Enabled
PickupVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of
VBase
CurveType_UV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use
of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves
for UV1
TD_UV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for
UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable internal low voltage level blocking for
Enabled UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in %
of VBase
Operation_UV2 Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable operation of UV2
Enabled
PickupVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of
VBase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use
of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves
for UV2
TD_UV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for
UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable internal low voltage level blocking for
Enabled UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in %
of VBase

410 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Table 340: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MultPU_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve OC1
P_OC1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC1
C_OC1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for OC1
TR_OC1 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for OC1
CR_OC1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for OC1
MultPU_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve OC2
P_OC2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC2
A_OC2 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OC2
PR_OC2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve for OC2
TR_OC2 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for OC2
CR_OC2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for OC2
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve UC2
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 411

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of
OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time
curves for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for OV1
P_OV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of
OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time
curves for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for OV2
P_OV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of
UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time
curves for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV1
Table continues on next page

412 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

C_UV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for UV1
P_UV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of
UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time
curves for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV2
C_UV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for UV2
P_UV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV2

Table 341: CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

10.1.5 Monitored data

Table 342: CVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIROC1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC1
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
DIROC2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC2
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 413

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

ICOSFI REAL - A Measured current multiplied
with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
VIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage and
current

10.1.6 Operation principle

10.1.6.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to three-
phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always
measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting
tool.

The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 343.
Table 343: Current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter Comment
CurrentInput
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A current phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B current phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
current phasor
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current
phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of
the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase A current phasor and phase B current
phasor (IA-IB)

Table continues on next page

414 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
CurrentInput
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase B current phasor and phase C current
phasor (IB-IC)

12 PhaseC-PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase C current phasor and phase A current
phasor ( IC-IA)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph
current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with
minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 344:
Table 344: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A voltage phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B voltage phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180° in
order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage
phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated
for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when
used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of
the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase A voltage phasor and phase B voltage
phasor (VA-VB)

Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 415

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase B voltage phasor and phase C voltage
phasor (VB-VC)

12 PhaseC-PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase C voltage phasor and phase A voltage
phasor ( VC-VA)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph
voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with
minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 344 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB & VC or three phase-
to-phase voltages VAB, VBC & VCA). This information about actual VT connection is
entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic
care about it.

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 345 for built-in current
restraint feature:
Table 345: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter RestrCurr Comment
1 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
current phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current
phasor multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude

10.1.6.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for pickup
levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for every CVGAPC
function.

416 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 343.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3
(1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 343.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 344.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 344.

10.1.6.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see
table 343) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. However
depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the
overcurrent step pickup signal. Pickup signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in
features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.

Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the
measured current quantity (see table 343). However it shall be noted that this feature is not
applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

• PosSeq (positive sequence current)

• NegSeq (negative sequence current)
• UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
• UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step pickup if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.

Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant phase
angle between measured current phasor (see table 343) and measured voltage phasor (see
table 344). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent and voltage

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 417

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature.
In that case overcurrent protection step will only trip if the current flow is in accordance
with the set direction (Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse,
which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to
understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 344) and measured current phasor
(see table 343) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility
of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper
directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will simply use
the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional
criteria.

Table 346 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for
these two quantities from traditional directional relays.
Table 346: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45° to -90°
depending on the power system voltage level (X/R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45° to -90°
depending on the power system voltage level (X/R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is from 0° to -90° depending on
the power system grounding (that is, solidly grounding,
grounding via resistor)
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature
is enabled.

Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & V and IcosPhi&V. The
first principle, referred to as "I & V" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

• the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
• the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay
trip angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 136).

418 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

V=-3V0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000252_anis.vsd
IEC05000252-ANIS V1 EN

Figure 136: I & V directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

where:
RCADir is -75°
ROADir is 50°

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&V" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:

• that the product I·cos(Φ) is bigger than the set pick-up level, where Φ is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
• that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
I·cos(Φ) straight line and the relay trip angle, ROADir parameter setting; see
figure 136).

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 419

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

V=-3V0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000253 V1 EN

Figure 137: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&V directional operating principle

where:
RCADir is -75°
ROADir is 50°

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall
behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-set value.
User can select one of the following three options:

• Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

• Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
• Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After
that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time
and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set
voltage memory limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured voltage
quantity (see table 344). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not
constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

• Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

420 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

PickupCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * PickupCurr_OC1

VLowLimit_OC1 VHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000324 V1 EN

Figure 138: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

PickupCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 *
PickupCurr_OC1

VHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000323 V1 EN

Figure 139: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well
affect the pickup current value for calculation of trip times for IDMT curves (overcurrent
with IDMT curve will trip faster during low voltage conditions).

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 421

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining current
quantity (see table 345). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not
constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.

IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
ra *Ir
e eff
Op t rCo
es
I>R
IsetHigh

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)

Restraint
en05000255.vsd

IEC05000255 V1 EN

Figure 140: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to pickup if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of
trip times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve trip time will not be
influenced by the restrain current magnitude.

When set, the pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.

10.1.6.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 343) with the set pickup level. The
undercurrent step will pickup and set its pickup signal to one if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The pickup signal will start
definite time delay with set time delay. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time

422 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.

10.1.6.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see
table 344) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of
the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.

The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.

10.1.6.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see
table 344) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of
the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level.

The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.

10.1.6.7 Logic diagram

The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 423

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

IED
ADM CVGAPC function

Current and voltage selection

settings

Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio

individual currents
52

A/D conversion
Selection of which current Selected current
and voltage shall be given to

Phasors &
samples
the built-in protection Selected voltage
elements

Restraint current selection

Selected restraint current

A/D conversion scaling

Phasor calculation of Selection of restraint current

individual voltages
with CT ratio

Phasors &
samples

ANSI05000169_2_en.vsd

ANSI05000169 V2 EN

Figure 141: Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function

Figure 141 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose
protection function

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function.
They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.

1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current
and one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function:

424 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 343) for internally
measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 344) for internally
measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 345) for internally
measured restraint current.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 425

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
PU_UC2
UC2
nd TRUC2
2 Harmonic
restraint

PU_OC1
OC1 TROC1

2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint OR
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

PU_OC2
OC2 TROC2

2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint OR
VDIRLOW

Directionality DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

PU_OV1
OV1 TROV1

PU_OV2
OV2 TROV2

PU_UV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1

PU_UV2
UV2 TRUV2

VOLTAGE

426 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

en05000170_ansi.vsd Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

ANSI05000170 V1 EN

Figure 142: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements

Logic in figure 142 can be summarized as follows:

1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its PICKUP
and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures
3. Common PICKUP and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Enable
second
harmonic Second
NOT
harmonic check DEF time BLKTROC1
selected 0-DEF TROC1
AND
0 OR
Selected current a
a>b
b
OC1=On PU_OC1
AND
PickupCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse

Voltage Directionality DIR_OK Inverse

control or time
check selected
restraint
feature

Selected voltage
Current
Restraint
Feature
Selected restrain current Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000831 V1 EN

Figure 143: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the same
internal logic)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 427

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current a TRUC1

b>a
0-DEF
AND
b
PickupCurr_UC1
AND 0

Operation_UC1=On
PU_UC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000750 V1 EN

Figure 144: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the same
internal logic)

DEF time BLKTROV1

selected 0-DEF TROV1
AND
0 OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b PU_OV1
PickupVolt_OV1
AND

Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected

en05000751_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000751 V1 EN

Figure 145: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal
logic)

428 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

DEF time BLKTRUV1

selected 0-DEF TRUV1
AND
0 OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b PU_UV1
AND
PickupVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected

en05000752_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000752 V1 EN

Figure 146: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal
logic)

10.1.7 Technical data

Table 347: CVGAPC technical data
Function
Measuring current input
Measuring voltage input
Pickup overcurrent, step 1
-2
Range or value Accuracy
Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, - -
NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase
B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, - -
NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase
B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
(2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of In at I ≤ In
±1.0% of I at I > In

Pickup undercurrent, step (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of In at I ≤ In

1-2 ±1.0% of I at I > In

Independent time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset, greater
step 1 - 2
Independent time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
undercurrent at 2 to 0 x greater
Iset, step 1 - 2

Overcurrent (non-
directional):
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 429

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Pickup time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Pickup time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Undercurrent:
Pickup time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Overcurrent:
Inverse time 16 curve types See table 864, 865 and table 866
characteristics, see table
864, 865 and table 866
Overcurrent:
Minimum operate time for (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
inverse curves, step 1 - 2 greater
Voltage level where (0.0 - 5.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn
voltage memory takes
over
Pickup overvoltage, step 1 (2.0 - 200.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn at V ≤ Vn
-2 ±0.5% of V at V > Vn

Pickup undervoltage, step (2.0 - 150.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn at V ≤ Vn

1-2 ±0.5% of V at V > Vn

Independent time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x greater
Vset, step 1 - 2

Independent time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

undervoltage at 1.2 to 0.8 greater
x Vset, step 1 - 2

Overvoltage:
Pickup time at 0.8 to 1.2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Vset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Min. = 15 ms -

Vset Max. = 30 ms

Undervoltage:
Pickup time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Min. = 15 ms -
Vset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Min. = 15 ms -

Vset Max. = 30 ms

Overvoltage:
Table continues on next page

430 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inverse time 4 curve types See table 875
characteristics, see table
875
Undervoltage:
Inverse time 3 curve types See table 876
characteristics, see table
876
High and low voltage limit, (1.0 - 200.0)% of VBase ±1.0% of Vn at V ≤ Vn
voltage dependent ±1.0% of V at V > Vn
operation, step 1 - 2
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay trip angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 431

Technical manual
432
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

Section 11 Secondary system supervision

11.1 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC

11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

11.1.2 Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage measuring
functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED
in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods,
negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage and
delta current detection.

The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or
high-impedance grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities.

The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance
grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.

The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to

take into account the particular grounding of the network.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse
failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice
is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 433

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

11.1.3 Function block

FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
V3P* BLKV
BLOCK 3PH
52A DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
89B PU_DI
BLKTRIP PU_DI_A
PU_DI_B
PU_DI_C
PU_DV
PU_DV_A
PU_DV_B
PU_DV_C

ANSI14000065-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000065 V1 EN

Figure 147: FUFSPVC function block

11.1.4 Signals
Table 348: FUFSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
52a BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external Miniature Circuit Breaker opens
protected voltage circuit
89b BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnect switch is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active

Table 349: FUFSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKV BOOLEAN General pickup
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase pickup
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
PU_DI BOOLEAN Common pickup signal of sudden change in current
PU_DI_A BOOLEAN Pickupof sudden change in current, phase A
Table continues on next page

434 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

Name Type Description

PU_DI_B BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase B
PU_DI_C BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase C
PU_DV BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
PU_DV_A BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase A
PU_DV_B BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase B
PU_DV_C BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase C

11.1.5 Settings
Table 350: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OpModeSel Disabled - - V0I0 Operating mode selection
V2I2
V0I0
V0I0 OR V2I2
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs
3V0PU 1 - 100 %VB 1 30 Pickup of residual overvoltage element in % of
VBase
3I0PU 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of residual undercurrent element in % of
IBase
3V2PU 1 - 100 %VB 1 30 Pickup of negative sequence overvoltage
element in % of VBase
3I2PU 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of negative sequence undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDVDI Disabled - - Disabled Operation of change based function Disable/
Enabled Enable
DVPU 1 - 100 %VB 1 60 Pickup of change in phase voltage in % of
VBase
DIPU 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Pickup of change in phase current in % of
IBase
VPPU 1 - 100 %VB 1 70 Pickup of phase voltage in % of VBase
IPPU 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of phase current in % of IBase
SealIn Disabled - - Enabled Seal in functionality Disable/Enable
Enabled
VSealInPU 1 - 100 %VB 1 70 Pickup of seal-in phase voltage in % of VBase
IDLDPU 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Pickup for phase current detection in % of
IBase for dead line detection
VDLDPU 1 - 100 %VB 1 60 Pickup for phase voltage detection in % of
VBase for dead line detection

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 435

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

Table 351: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

11.1.6 Monitored data

Table 352: FUFSPVC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero sequence
current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3V0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero sequence
voltage
3V2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage

11.1.7 Operation principle

11.1.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages
in all three phases and calculates, see figure 148:

• the zero-sequence voltage 3V0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3V2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU,
3V2PU and 3I2PU.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0PU.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative sequence
current is below the set value 3I2PU.

436 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current
will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.

Sequence Detection
3I0PU CurrZeroSeq
IA
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter CurrNegSeq
a
IB a>b 100 ms
b 0
Negative 3I2
sequence
IC filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
a
a>b 100 ms
3I2PU b 0
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3V0PU
VoltZeroSeq
VA
Zero
sequence
a 3V0
a>b
b
filter
VB VoltNegSeq

Negative
sequence a 3V2
a>b
VC filter b

3V2PU

ANSI10000036-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000036 V2 EN

Figure 148: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3V0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3V2 are available as service values on local HMI
and monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH
from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur:

• The input BLOCK is activated

• The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not present
• The operation mode selector OpModeSel is set to Disable
• The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions.
Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 437

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for 100
ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of
the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might
operate.

The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.

The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.
The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block all the
voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel
selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal
to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous
closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since
there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If
89b=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the 89b=1 it signifies
that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKV is generated.

The output BLKV can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.

The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.

11.1.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 149. The calculation of the
changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The calculated
delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DIPU and DVPU. The
algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change
in current is detected in each phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in
all three phases:

• The change in voltage DV

• The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDVDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled:

438 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

• The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above VPPU for more than 1.5
cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
• The magnitude of DV in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting
DVPU
• The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<

In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDVDI signal:

• The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting IPPU
• The circuit breaker is closed (52A = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high current
for the three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the
risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop
in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be followed by current change lower than
the setting DIPU, and therefore a false fuse failure might occur.

The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time as
circuit breaker is closed. If this is an important disadvantage, connect the 52A input to
FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable the delta function.If the DVDI detection
of three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDVDI at the level high, then the signal
FuseFailDetDVDI will remain high as long as the voltage of three phases are lower then
the setting VPPU.

In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaV and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DVDI detection algorithm. The internal
signals DelatV and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage, or respectively
current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on a sample analysis
algorithm. In particular DelatV is activated if at least three consecutive voltage samples
are higher then the setting DVPU. In a similar way DelatI is activated if at least three
consecutive current samples are higher then the setting DIPU.When DeltaV or DeltaI are
active, the output signals PU_DV_A, PU_DV_B, PU_DV_C and respectively PU_DI_A,
PU_DI_B, PU_DI_C, based on a sudden change of voltage or current detection, are
activated with a 20 ms time off delay. The common pickup output signals PU_DV or
PU_DI are activated with a 60 ms time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or
current is detected.

The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Disabled.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 439

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

DVDI Detection
DVDI detection Phase 1
IA
IB
IC DI detection based on sample analysis
DIPU DeltaIA

VA

DV detection based on sample analysis

AND
DVPU
1.5 cycle 20 ms
a DeltaVA
a>b t t
VPPU b

IA DeltaIB
DVDI detection Phase 2
IB DeltaVB
IC
VB Same logic as for phase 1

IA DVDI detection Phase 3 DeltaIC

IB
DeltaVC
IC
VC Same logic as for phase 1

VA
a
a<b
b

IA
a
a>b
50P b AND

OR AND
52A AND OR

VB
a
a<b
b

IB
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR

VC
a
a<b
b

IC
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDVDI
AND

ANSI12000166-3-en.vsd

ANSI12000166 V3 EN

Figure 149: Simplified logic diagram for the DV/DI detection part

440 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

intBlock
PU_DI
AND

DeltaIA 0
20 ms OR AND PU_DI_A

DeltaIB
0
20 ms PU_DI_B
AND
DeltaIC 0
20 ms
PU_DI_C
AND

AND PU_DV

DeltaVA 0 PU_DV_A
20 ms OR AND

DeltaVB 0
20 ms PU_DV_B
AND
DeltaVC 0
20 ms
PU_DV_B
AND

ANSI12000165-2-en.vsd

ANSI12000165 V2 EN

Figure 150: Internal signals DeltaV or DeltaI and the corresponding output signals

11.1.7.3 Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 151. A dead phase condition
is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting
values VDLDPU and IDLDPU. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output
DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are
considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 441

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

Dead Line Detection

IA
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IB
a
a<b
b

IC
a
a<b
b

IDLDPU
DeadLineDet1Ph
VA
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
VB
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
VC AND
a AND
a<b
b

VDLDPU

intBlock

ANSI0000035-1-en.vsd
ANSI0000035 V1 EN

Figure 151: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

11.1.7.4 Main logic

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 152. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to Enabled or Disabled.

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode

selector, OpModeSel, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating
modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation
modes are:

• Disabled. The negative and zero sequence function is disabled.

• V2I2. Negative sequence is selected.
• V0I0. Zero sequence is selected.
• V0I0 OR V2I2. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel in
an OR-condition.
• V0I0 AND V2I2. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in series
(AND-condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).

442 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Enabled. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDVDI, and the specific functionality is released, the
function will activate the output signal BLKV. The output signal BLKZ will be activated
as well if the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same
time. The output BLKV can be used for blocking voltage related measuring functions
(under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used
to block the impedance protection functions.

If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to Enabled it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltage is below
the set value VSealInPU. This will keep the BLKV and BLKZ signals activated as long as
any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU. If all three phase voltages drop below
the set value VSealInPU and the setting parameter SealIn is set to Enabled the output
signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ signals will now be
active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU.

If SealIn is set to Enabled the fuse failure condition is stored in the non-volatile memory
in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due to
configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory and re-
establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must
be greater than VSealInPU before fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU,
BLKZ and 3PH.

The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3V0PU and 3V2PU for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents
are below the setting IDLDPU (criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker
is closed (input 52a is activated).

If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.
The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block all the
voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel
or OpDVDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP
signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non
simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will be no line
currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 443

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted

All VL < VSealInPU

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = Enabled AND

AND
Any VL < VSealInPU

FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDVDI = Enabled
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND

V2I2 OR
V0I0 OR
V0I0 OR V2I2
OpModeSel
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b

AND

200 ms
DeadLineDet1Ph AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t

AND BLKV
60 s
t OR OR
All VL > VSealInPU
AND

VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t

AllCurrLow
52a

89b
ANSI10000033-3-en.vsd

ANSI10000033 V3 EN

444 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

Figure 152: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic

11.1.8 Technical data

Table 353: FUFSPVCtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Trip current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of In

Trip voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Trip current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of In

Trip voltage change pickup (1-100)% of VBase ±10.0% of Vn

Trip current change pickup (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of In

Trip phase voltage (1-100)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Trip phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of In

Trip phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn

Trip phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of In

Pickup time, 1 ph, pickup at 1 to 0 x Vn Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, 1 ph, pickup at 0 to 1 x Vn Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

11.2 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60)

11.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

11.2.2 Functionality
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of measured
voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 445

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

• Distance protection function.

• Undervoltage function.
• Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits
between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations can
be prevented by VDSPVC.

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit,

based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits. VDSPVC
blocking output can be configured to block functions that need to be blocked in case of
faults in the voltage circuit.

11.2.3 Function block

VDSPVC (60)
V3P1* MAINFUF
V3P2* PILOTFUF
BLOCK V1AFAIL
V1BFAIL
V1CFAIL
V2AFAIL
V2BFAIL
V2CFAIL

ANSI14000057-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000142 V2 EN

Figure 153: VDSPVC function block

11.2.4 Signals
Table 354: VDSPVC (60) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
V3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 355: VDSPVC (60) Output signals

Name Type Description
MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure
V1AFAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase A
Table continues on next page

446 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

Name Type Description

V1BFAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase B
V1CFAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase C
V2AFAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase A
V2BFAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase B
V2CFAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase C

11.2.5 Settings
Table 356: VDSPVC (60) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable operation of the function
On
Vdif Main block 10.0 - 80.0 %VB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in % of VBase
when main fuse fails
Vdif Pilot alarm 10.0 - 80.0 %VB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of VBase
when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Disabled - - On Seal in functionality Disable/Enable
On
VSealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %VB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of VBase

Table 357: VDSPVC (60) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Table 358: VDSPVC (60) Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConTypeMain Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for main fuse
Ph-Ph group
ConTypePilot Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for pilot fuse
Ph-Ph group

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 447

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

11.2.6 Monitored data

Table 359: VDSPVC (60) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VADIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase A
for alarm functionality
VBDIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase B
for alarm functionality
VCDIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase C
for alarm functionality
VADIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase A
for block functionality
VBDIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase B
for block functionality
VCDIF_C REAL - kV Differential voltage phase C
for block functionality

11.2.7 Operation principle

VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main and pilot
fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is theoretical zero in the
healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be due to a fuse failure.

If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainA < vPilotA
or vMainB < vPilotB or vMainC < vPilotC) and the voltage difference exceeds the
operation level (Vdif Main block), a blocking signal will be initiated to indicate the main
fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent functions. In addition, the function also
indicates the phase in which the voltage reduction has occurred.

If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotA < vMainA
or vPilotB < vMainB or vPilotC < vMainC) and the voltage difference exceeds the
operation level (Vdif Pilot alarm), an alarm signal will be initiated to indicate the pilot fuse
failure and also the faulty phase where the voltage reduction occurred.

When SealIn is set to Enabled and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are
restored above the VSealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when normal
voltage conditions are restored.

448 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

a 5s
a<b AND OR t
0
VSealIn b

SealIn=0

vPilotA
+
vMainA -
 MAX a V1AFAIL
OR
a>b AND
Vdif Main block b MAINFUF
OR
0

MIN ABS a
a>b AND V2AFAIL
Vdif Pilot alarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFUF

vPilotB V1BFAIL
vMainB Phase B, same as Phase A V2BFAIL

vPilotC V1CFAIL
vMainC Phase C, same as Phase A V2CFAIL

ANSI12000144-3-en.vsd

ANSI12000144 V3 EN

Figure 154: Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC (60)

11.2.8 Technical data

Table 360: technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, block of main fuse (10.0-80.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn
failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse Min. = 5 ms –
failure at 1 to 0 x Vr
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse Min. = 15 ms –
failure at 0 to 1 x Vr
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot (10.0-80.0)% of VBase ±0.5% of Vn
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110% –
Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse Min. = 5 ms –
failure at 1 to 0 x Vr
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse Min. = 15 ms –
failure at 0 to 1 x Vr
Max. = 30 ms

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 449

Technical manual
450
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Section 12 Control

12.1 Synchronism check, energizing check, and

synchronizing SESRSYN (25)

12.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN

12.1.2 Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25) function checks that
the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one
side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.

SESRSYN (25) function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
breaker-and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.

For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided. The
main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit
breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The synchronizing
function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and
frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker
closing time is a parameter setting.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 451

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.1.3 Function block

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
VBUS
VLINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

ANSI14000060-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000046 V2 EN

Figure 155: SESRSYN (25) function block

12.1.4 Signals
Table 361: SESRSYN (25) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3PB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to ground voltage input Phase A,
SIGNAL busbar 1
V3PB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to ground voltage input Phase A,
SIGNAL busbar 1
V3PL1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to ground voltage input phase A,
SIGNAL line 1
V3PL2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to ground voltage input phase A,
SIGNAL line 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
Table continues on next page

452 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
BUS1_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
BUS1_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus1
BUS2_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
BUS2_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus2
LINE1_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LINE1_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line1
LINE2_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LINE2_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line2
VB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
VB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
VB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
VB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
VL1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
VL1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
VL2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
VL2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 362: SESRSYN (25) Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchronism-check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchronism-check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchronism-check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchronism-check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 453

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Description

VSELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
L1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
L2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
VOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
VDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
VOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage magnitudes above set limits
VDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
VDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set voltage
base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
VBUS REAL Bus voltage
VLINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

454 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.1.5 Settings
Table 363: SESRSYN (25) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
OperationSynch Disabled - - Disabled Operation for synchronizing function Off/On
Enabled
VHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of
VBaseBus
VHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of
VBaseLine
VDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in p.u
of set voltage base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.500 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made before
set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Disabled - - Enabled Operation for synchronism-check function
Enabled Off/On
VHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of
VBaseBus
VHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of
VBaseLine
VDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck in p.u
of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus and
line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus and
line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus and
line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus and
line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for manual synchrocheck
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 455

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

AutoEnerg Disabled - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Disabled - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Disabled - - Disabled Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
Enabled
VLiveBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in %
of VBaseBus
VLiveLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing check in %
of VBaseLine
VDeadBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in %
of VBaseBus
VDeadLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing check in %
of VBaseLine
VMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %VB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in % of VBase,
Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check

Table 364: SESRSYN (25) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SelPhaseBus1 Phase A - - Phase A Select phase for busbar1
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase A - - Phase A Select phase for busbar2
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Table continues on next page

456 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SelPhaseLine1 Phase A - - Phase A Select phase for line1
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase A - - Phase A Select phase for line2
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB

Table 365: SESRSYN (25) Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line voltage

12.1.6 Monitored data

Table 366: SESRSYN (25) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set voltage
base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of phase
angle
VBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
VLINE REAL - kV Line voltage

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 457

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.1.7 Operation principle

12.1.7.1 Basic functionality

The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to
both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured
quantities match the set conditions.

The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions
are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure
at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit.

For double bus single circuit breaker and breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements,
the SESRSYN (25) function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct
voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For breaker-and-a-half
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of
the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.

The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the setting
parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For
application related information, please refer to the application manual.

12.1.7.2 Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function
components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage
selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchronism check function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1,
SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically
for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle difference caused if different
setting values are selected for both sides of the breaker. If needed an additional phase angle
adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

458 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

When the function is set to OperationSC = Enabled, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC.

If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the set
values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA,
FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and VDiffSC. If additional phase angle adjustment
is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is deducted from the line voltage
before the comparison of the phase angle values.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must
not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between
the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value
FreqDiff.

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and
used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN
(25) function and selective block of the Synchronism check function respectively. Input
TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to
a separate test output.

The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.

VOKSC shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA,
PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle
difference conditions are out of limits.

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit breaker
has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if the voltage
conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line
is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 459

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchronism check.

OperationSC = Enabled
AND TSTAUTSY
AND

TSTSC

BLKSC AND
BLOCK OR
AUTOSYOK
AND
tSCA
AND 0-60 ms
0

VDiffSC
AND 50 ms
0
VHighBusSC
VOKSC
AND
VHighLineSC
VDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1

PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1

VDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

100 ms
AND 0 INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60° 32 ms AND

PhDiff < 5°

ANSI07000114-4-en.vsd
ANSI07000114 V4 EN

Figure 156: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchronism function

Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = Enabled the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for
VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are both
live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for
VDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than
the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured
values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and

460 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to
be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.

Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be
sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release
internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be
activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets. The function will also reset if
the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This
prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting
for conditions to be fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
output.

SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH=ON

TEST MODE=ON

STARTSYN SYNPROGR
AND
AND
S
BLKSYNCH
OR R

VDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
VHighBusSynch AND t

VHighLineSynch OR

FreqDiffMax
AND
TSTSYNOK
FreqDiffMin OR

tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND

fBus&fLine ± 5Hz tMax

Phase Diff < 15 deg Synch
SYNFAIL
AND
PhaseDiff=closing angle

FreqDiff
Close pulse
tBreaker in advance

ANSI06000636-3-en.vsd

ANSI06000636 V3 EN

Figure 157: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 461

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Synchronism check function.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live
or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values VLiveBusEnerg and
VDeadBusEnerg for bus energizing and VLiveLineEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg for line
energizing.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must
not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic
functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and
MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled.
The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK
conditions. The Energizing direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE
respective MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer
function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The
active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are
0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN (25) function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
test output.

462 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

VLiveBusEnerg
AND 0 – 60 s
DLLB OR tManEnerg
VDeadLineEnerg AND
OR 0
AND
BOTH
ManEnerg

VDeadBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
VLiveLineEnerg

TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND

VMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz

ANSI14000031-1-en.vsd

ANSI14000031 V1 EN

Figure 158: Manual energizing

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

VLiveBusEnerg
DLLB 0 – 60 s
AND
OR tAutoEnerg
AND OR
0 AUTOENOK
VDeadLineEnerg AND

AutoEnerg BOTH

VDeadBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

VLiveLineEnerg

TSTENOK
VMaxEnerg AND

fBus and fLine ±5 Hz

ANSI14000030-1-en.vsd

ANSI14000030 V1 EN

Figure 159: Automatic energizing

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 463

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND

ManEnerg

1½ bus CB
CBConfig AND

B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND

LN2QOPEN

1½ bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR

B2QCLD
AND

Tie CB
AND
AND
OR

AND

IEC14000032-1-en.vsd

IEC14000032 V1 EN

Figure 160: Open bays

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to
binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN (25) function in the IED.
Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when
available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be
connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs
labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is
faulty.

The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the
VLNOK and VLNFF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary
input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar
and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked.
The synchronism check function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at
fuse failure is needed.

464 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers for
the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN (25) function and determines
the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions.
This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB
supervision.

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.

If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be V-Line1 and V-Bus1. This setting is also
used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for
the used inputs must also be connected.

The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for the
Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to
supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter
for one of the positions.

If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is allowed,
it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed for manual
energizing in breaker-and-a-half and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual energization of a
completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by internal logic.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for single
CB and double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors
auxiliary contacts BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL for Bus 1, and BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL for Bus 2 to
select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed
and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other
combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate
the selected Bus voltage.

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers.
Inputs VB1OK-VB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and VB2OK-VB2FF supervises the
MCB for Bus 2. VL1OK and VL1FF supervises the MCB for the Line voltage
transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on
the available signal. If a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output
signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have
a VT failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal
BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 161.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 465

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

BUS1_OP
B1SEL
BUS1_CL AND

BUS2_OP B2SEL
NOT
BUS2_CL AND

invalidSelection
AND

bus1Voltage busVoltage

bus2Voltage

VB1OK AND
VB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
VB2OK AND
VB2FF OR VSELFAIL
AND

VL1OK
VL1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000779 V2 EN

Figure 161: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with breaker-and-a-half schemes three Synchronism check functions must be
used for the complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie
breaker is described.

With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1 1/2 circuit
breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt. Bus CB or Tie CB.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit
breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN function. For the
bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other
side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the best selection
of voltage circuit.

Inputs LINE1_OP-LINE1_CL, BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL, BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL,

LINE2_OP-LINE2_CL are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively
the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs L1SEL, L2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of

466 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage, which indicates
B1SEL.

The fuse supervision is connected to VL1OK-VL1FF, VL2OK-VL2FF and with

alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse
(MCB).

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the
other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output combinations
are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit
breaker is closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit
breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a VT
failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output
signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for
the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 162 and for the tie circuit
breaker in figure 163.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 467

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

LINE1_OP
AND
L1SEL
LINE1_CL

BUS1_OP
L2SEL
BUS1_CL AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LINE2_OP
LINE2_CL AND invalidSelection
AND

BUS2_OP AND

BUS2_CL AND

line1Voltage lineVoltage

line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

VB1OK
VB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
VB2OK AND
AND
VB2FF OR

VSELFAIL
VL1OK AND
AND
VL1FF OR

VL2OK
AND
VL2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780_2_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000780 V2 EN

Figure 162: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker-and-a-
half arrangement

468 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

LINE1_OP
AND
L1SEL
LINE1_CL
B1SEL
NOT

BUS1_OP AND
AND
BUS1_CL AND

line1Voltage busVoltage

bus1Voltage

LINE2_OP
L2SEL
LINE2_CL AND
B2SEL
NOT
invalidSelection
OR
BUS2_OP AND
AND
BUS2_CL AND

line2Voltage lineVoltage

bus2Voltage

VB1OK AND
VB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
VB2OK AND
AND
VB2FF OR

VSELFAIL
VL1OK AND
AND
VL1FF OR

VL2OK
AND
VL2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781_2_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000781 V2 EN

Figure 163: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker-and-a-
half arrangement.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 469

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.1.8 Technical data

Table 367: SESRSYN (25) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage high limit for synchronism ±0.5% of Vn at V ≤ Vn

check ±0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio, synchronism check > 95% -

Frequency difference limit (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
between bus and line for
synchronism check
Phase angle difference limit (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
between bus and line for
synchronism check
Voltage difference limit between (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Vn
bus and line for synchronism check
Time delay output for synchronism (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
check greater
Frequency difference minimum (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz
limit for synchronizing
Frequency difference maximum (0.050-0.500) Hz ±2.5 mHz
limit for synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency rate (0.000-0.500) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
of change
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
tMaxSynch, which resets (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
synchronizing function if no close greater
has been made before set time
Minimum time to accept (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
synchronizing conditions greater
Voltage high limit for energizing ±0.5% of Vn at V ≤ Vn
check ±0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for energizing ±0.5% of Vn
check
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -
Maximum voltage for energizing ±0.5% of Vn at V ≤ Vn
±0.5% of V at V > Vn

Table continues on next page

470 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for energizing check (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% greater
of Vrated
Trip time for synchrocheck function Min. = 15 ms –
when angle difference between Max. = 30 ms
bus and line jumps from
“PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Trip time for energizing function Min. = 70 ms –
when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% Max. = 90 ms
of Vrated

12.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC (79)

12.2.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 SMBRREC 79
phase
O->I

SYMBOL-L V1 EN

12.2.2 Functionality
The autorecloser SMBRREC (79) function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-
reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.

Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The first
attempt can be single-, two and/or three pole for single pole or multi-pole faults
respectively.

Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority

circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault
proved to be transient.

Each autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchronism check

function.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 471

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed three pole autoreclosing.
The autoreclosing can be used for delayed busbar restoration. Two Autoreclosers
(SMBRREC ,79) one for each busbar can be provided.

12.2.3 Function block

SMBRREC (79)
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
RI INPROGR
RI_HS 1PT1
TRSOTF 2PT1
SKIPHS 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
TR2P 3PT3
TR3P 3PT4
THOLHOLD 3PT5
CBREADY PERMIT1P
52A PREP3P
PLCLOST CLOSECMD
SYNC WFMASTER
WAIT COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT COUNT2P
MODEINT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE

ANSI06000189-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000189 V2 EN

Figure 164: SMBRREC (79) function block

12.2.4 Signals
Table 368: SMBRREC (79) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ON BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR On (at ExternalCtrl = On)
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR Off (at ExternalCtrl = On)
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
RI BOOLEAN 0 Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal
RI_HS BOOLEAN 0 Start High Speed reclosing without Synchronism-
Check: t13PhHS
Table continues on next page

472 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF
SKIPHS BOOLEAN 0 Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed
shots
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordination between local AR and down stream
devices
TR2P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a two-pole tripping occurred
TR3P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a three-pole tripping occurred
THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Holds the AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start /
close
52a BOOLEAN 0 Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST BOOLEAN 0 Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal lost
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronism-check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets all counters
MODEINT INTEGER 0 Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative
to setting

Table 369: SMBRREC (79) Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The AR is in blocked state
SETON BOOLEAN The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new
sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim
time
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open reset
1PT1 BOOLEAN Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1 BOOLEAN Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
PERMIT1P BOOLEAN Permit single-pole trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P BOOLEAN Prepare three-pole trip, control of the next trip operation
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 473

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Description

CLOSECMD BOOLEAN Closing command for CB
WFMASTER BOOLEAN Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential
reclosing
COUNT1P INTEGER Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P INTEGER Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1
COUNT3P2 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2
COUNT3P3 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3
COUNT3P4 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4
COUNT3P5 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5
COUNTAR INTEGER Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE INTEGER Integer output for reclosing mode

12.2.5 Settings
Table 370: SMBRREC (79) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
ExternalCtrl Disabled - - Disabled To be set On if AR is to be used with external
Enabled control; Off / On
ARMode 3 phase - - 1/2/3ph The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, single-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 6.000 Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing 3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.400 Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing 3ph
tReset 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Duration of the reset time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for synchronism-check OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum trip pulse duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Duration of the circuit breaker closing pulse
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Minimum time that CB must be closed before
new sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Wait time for CB before indicating
Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority None - - None Priority selection between adjacent terminals
Low None/Low/High
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from Master

474 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 371: SMBRREC (79) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfShots 1 - - 1 Max number of reclosing shots 1-5
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Disabled - - Disabled To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB open
Enabled position
CBAuxContType NormClosed - - NormOpen Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for 52a
NormOpen input
CBReadyType CO - - CO Select type of circuit breaker ready signal
OCO CO/OCO
t1 2Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, two-phase
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 2, three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 3, three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 4, three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 5, three-phase
Extended t1 Disabled - - Disabled Extended open time at loss of permissive
Enabled channel Off/On
tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 3Ph Dead time is extended with this value at
loss of perm ch
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Inhibit reclosing reset time
CutPulse Disabled - - Disabled Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On
Enabled
Follow CB Disabled - - Disabled Advance to next shot if CB has been closed
Enabled during dead time
AutoCont Disabled - - Disabled Continue with next reclosing-shot if breaker did
Enabled not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Wait time after close command before
proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck - - NoCBCheck Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by
CB check checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl Disabled - - Disabled Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
Enabled
ZoneSeqCoord Disabled - - Disabled Coordination of down stream devices to local
Enabled prot unit’s AR

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 475

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.2.6 Operation principle

12.2.6.1 Logic Diagrams

The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of the
functionality.

12.2.6.2 Auto-reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and
through external control. With the setting Operation = Enabled, the function is activated
while with the setting Operation = Disabled the function is deactivated. With the setting
Operation = Enabled and ExternalCtrl = On , the activation/deactivation is made by input
signal pulses to the inputs ON/OFF, for example, from a control system.

When the function is set Enabled and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).
If the input conditions 52a and CBREADY also are fulfilled, the automatic recloser is
prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on the SMBRREC (79)
function block is activated (high).

12.2.6.3 Auto-reclosing mode selection

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode = 3phase, 1/2/3ph, 1/2ph, 1ph
+1*2ph, 1/2ph+1*3ph, 1ph+1*2/3ph.

As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example
from function block B16I to input MODEINT.

Following integers shall be used: 1=3phase, 2=1/2/3ph, 3=1/2ph, 4=1ph+1*2ph,

5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 6=1ph+1*2/3ph.

When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected ARMode setting
will be invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The selected mode is
reported as an integer on the output MODE.

12.2.6.4 Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle

The usual way to initiate a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to initiate it when a selective
line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the RI input. It should be
necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different power
system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages. The input RI_HS
(reclose initiation of high-speed reclosing) can also be used.

476 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

To start a new auto-reclosing cycle, a number of conditions of input signals need to be met.
The inputs are:

• CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
• 52a: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and initiation was
applied
• No BLKON or INHIBIT signal shall be present.

After the initiate has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal “Started” is set.
It can be interrupted by a signal to the INHIBIT input.

To initiate auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals, one
has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs 52a and RI and set a parameter
StartByCBOpen = Enabled and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally closed, 52b).
One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to input
INHIBIT.

The logic for switching the auto-recloser Enabled/Disabled and the starting of the
reclosing is shown in figure 165. The following should be considered:

• Setting Operation can be set to Disabled or Enabled. ExternalCtrl offers the

possibility of switching by external signals to inputs ON and OFF.
• SMBRREC (79) is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and
Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives
the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function. RI makes a first
attempt with synchronism-check, RI_HS makes its first attempt without
synchronism-check. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
• Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a time before the opening
occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing
sequence and is connected to inputs 52a and CBREADY.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 477

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Operation:Enabled

AND
External Ctrl: Enabled

OR S
ON AND SETON

OR R
AND

RI
RI_HS OR
initiate
autoInitiate OR

Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND

PICKUP
CBREADY AND
0 AND S
0-t120 AND
52a CB Closed 0-tCBClosedMin R
0

AND
Blocking conditions READY
AND
OR
Inhibit conditions

count 0

ANSI05000782-4-en.vsd

ANSI05000782 V4 EN

Figure 165: Auto-reclosing Disabled/Enabled and start

12.2.6.5 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one extension
time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase auto-reclosing open
times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If only the RI input signal is applied, and an auto-reclosing
program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-reclosing open time t1 1Ph will
be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in conjunction with the input RI,
the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also
a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS
available for use when required. It is activated by input RI_HS.

An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal
shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive
line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault
clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time can then be useful. This
extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 = Enabled and the input
PLCLOST.

478 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.2.6.6 Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user
can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the auto-
reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Disabled, a long trip
signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.

Extended t1

PLCLOST Extend t1
initiate AND OR AND
AND

0-tTrip
pickup 0 AND

long duration
AND
(block SMBRREC)

ANSI05000783_2_en.vsd

ANSI05000783 V2 EN

Figure 166: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection

Reclosing checks and the reset timer

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must
be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are
exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-
phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a
synchronism check function in the same physical device or an external one. The release
signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing
without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set high). At
confirmation from the synchronism check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-
phase type, the signal passes on. At three-phase high-speed reclosing started by RI_HS,
synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of

the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has
a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close-Open

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 479

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

sequence) this condition may not be fulfilled during the dead time and at the moment of
reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the
reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close-Open sequence.

The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval,
tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and
blocked.

The reset timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the
reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a
continuation of the first fault. The reset timer is started when the CB closing command is
given.

A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the
reclosing sequence.

480 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

"SMBRREC Open time"

0-t1 1Ph timers
0
1P2PTO
From logic for OR
reclosing 0-t1 2Ph
0
programs
1P2PTO
0-t1 3Ph HS 3PHSTO
3PHSTO 0
3PT1TO
3PT2TO 0-t1 3Ph 3PT1TO
3PT3TO OR 0
AND
3PT4TO OR Pulse AR
3PT5TO AND

SYNC
initiate Blocking out
AND
CBREADY AND OR

SMBRREC State
0-tSync Control
AND
0 COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL
Shot 1
1
Shot 2
2
Shot 3
3
Pulse SMBRREC (above) 0-tReset Shot 4
AND R 4
OR 0 Shot 5
5
TR2P LOGIC Reset Timer On
TR3P reclosing
1PT1
programs
PICKUP 2PT1

RI 3PHS
INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Blocking out
0 Inhibit (internal)
INHIBIT OR
tInhibit

ANSI05000784_2_en.vsd

ANSI05000784 V2 EN

Figure 167: Reclosing Reset and Inhibit timers

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 481

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Pulsing of the CB closing command

The CB closing command, CLOSECMD is a pulse with a duration set by parameter
tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting
described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter CutPulse=Enabled.
In case of a new AR start pulse, the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The
minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 168

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is

incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of
reclosing commands issued.

tPulse
pulse
initiate **) AND CLOSECMD
OR
50 ms

1PT1 AND COUNT1P

counter

2PT1 AND COUNT2P

counter

3PT1 AND COUNT3P1

counter

3PT2 AND COUNT3P2

counter

3PT3 AND COUNT3P3

counter

3PT4 AND COUNT3P4

counter

3PT5 AND COUNT3P5

counter

counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT

**) Only if "CutPulse" = Enabled

ANSI05000785_2_en.vsd

ANSI05000785 V2 EN

Figure 168: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reset timer tReset starts running for the set time. If no
tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

482 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and number of set reclosing shot have
been done, a new input signal connected to RI or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL
(unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer be started.
Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or
the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the reset time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing
function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the 52a input will be
missing. Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.

Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and initiate is received after the
last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal
resets once the reset time has elapsed. The “unsuccessful“ signal can also be made to
depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to
CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the
closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high
after time tUnsucCl.

initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S

shot 0 R

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse AR (Closing) OR
AND
AND 0-tUnsucCl
52a CBclosed 0

en05000786_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000786 V1 EN

Figure 169: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing
shots (if selected) even if the initiate signals are not received from the protection functions,
but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = Enabled
and to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new initiate.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 483

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

0-tAutoContWait
0

AND

CLOSECMD
AND S Q

AND

52a CBClosed
OR

initiate
RI OR

en05000787_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000787 V1 EN

Figure 170: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Initiation of reclosing from CB open information

If a user wants to apply initiation of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from
protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is selected
by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = Enabled. One needs then to block reclosing at all
manual trip operations. Typically, one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and
connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b) to inputs 52a and RI.
When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse of
limited length is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then
the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual
tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

484 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

StartByCBOpen= Enabled

NOT

RI AND

RI_HS AND
PICKUP
³1
100 ms
AND

100 ms
AND

ANSI05000788_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000788 V2 EN

Figure 171: Pulsing of the pickup inputs

12.2.6.7 Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and
permanent faults are shown below in figures 172 to 175.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 485

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY

RECL. INT. (Trip)

SYNC
tReset
READY

INPROG

1PT1

ACTIVE
CLOSE CMD t1 1Ph tPulse

PREP3P

SUCCL

Time

en04000196-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000196 V2 EN

Figure 172: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

486 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Fault
CB POS Open
Closed Open C C
CB READY

RECL. INT. (Trip)

TR3P
SYNC

READY

INPROGR

3PT1 t1 3Ph

3PT2 t2 3Ph

ACTIVE tReset

CLOSE CMD tPulse tPulse

PREP3P

UNSUCCL
Time

en04000197_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000197 V1 EN

Figure 173: Permanent fault. Three-pole trip. Two-shot reclosing

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 487

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-RI

AR01-TR3P

AR01-SYNC

AR01-READY

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-1PT1

AR01-T1

AR01-T2

AR01-CLOSECMD t1s

AR01-P3P

AR01-UNSUC
tReset

en04000198_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000198 V1 EN

Figure 174: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single-

shot reclosing

488 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-RI

AR01-TR3P

AR01-SYNC

AR01-READY

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-1PT1

AR01-T1

AR01-T2
t2
AR01-CLOSECMD t1s

AR01-P3P

AR01-UNSUC
tReset

en04000199_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000199 V1 EN

Figure 175: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-
shot reclosing

12.2.7 Technical data

Table 372: SMBRREC (79) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots 1-5 -
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 1Ph (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 1 - t1 2Ph whichever is greater
shot 1 - t1 3PhHS
shot 1 - t1 3Ph
shot 2 - t2 3Ph (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 3 - t3 3Ph whichever is greater
shot 4 - t4 3Ph
shot 5 - t5 3Ph
Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
whichever is greater
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle whichever is greater
Maximum trip pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Reset time (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 489

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater
Wait time after close command before proceeding (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
to next shot whichever is greater

12.3 Interlocking (3)

12.3.1 Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching
devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
damage and/or accidental human injury.

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each
handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is not
dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the system
at any given time.

12.3.2 Operation principle

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The
function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication
between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.

The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV

apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises
between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system,
reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition of the
intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed.

490 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the
status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices
that may affect it.

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The
interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the
switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or breaker-and-a-half bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:

• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line grounding switch)
• Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown
in figure 176.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR 152
module

Apparatus control
modules
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

en04000526_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000526 V1 EN

Figure 176: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 491

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

• Ungrounded busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 177 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc 189 and 289 closed Disc 189 and 289 closed WA1 ungrounded
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not grounded WA1 not grounded
WA2 not grounded WA2 not grounded WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1

WA2
189 289 189 289 189 289 189G 289G
152

152 152

989 989

en05000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000494 V1 EN

Figure 177: Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board error
are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the
function will not be given.

On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking
function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and grounding

switches are always identical.
• Grounding switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid grounding switches,
are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they
are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line
voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line
voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no
voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
• Grounding switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without
load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is, the

492 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the grounding switch operation is
concerned.
• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit
breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed
connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated,
or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are
grounding on both sides.
• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or
additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and grounding switch on
the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and
transformer.
• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer
is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized

and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions
are available:

• Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE (3)

• Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC (3)
• Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO (3)
• Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS (3)
• Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC (3)
• Busbar grounding switch, BB_ES (3)
• Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A(3), DB_LINE(3), DB_BUS_B(3)
• Breaker-and-a-half diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B (3)

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements, by
adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600. The
inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR
are intended for transfer to other bays.

12.3.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)

12.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 493

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.3.2 Functionality

The Logical node for interlocking SCILO(3) function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO (3) function itself does not provide
any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate
function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

12.3.3.3 Function block

SCILO (3)
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

ANSI05000359-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000359 V1 EN

Figure 178: SCILO (3) function block

12.3.3.4 Signals
Table 373: SCILO (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 374: SCILO (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or intermediate or bad position
is enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or intermediate or bad position
is enabled

12.3.3.5 Logic diagram

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end
position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is
false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in
the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function.
The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/

494 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are
connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching
device is needed.

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE XOR NOT
AND EN_OPEN
OR
AND

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN AND EN_CLOSE
OR
AND
en04000525_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000525 V1 EN

Figure 179: SCILO (3) function logic diagram

12.3.4 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)

12.3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar grounding BB_ES - 3
switch

12.3.4.2 Functionality

The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one busbar
grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 180.

89G

en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN

Figure 180: Switchyard layout BB_ES (3)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 495

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.4.3 Function block

BB_ES (3)
89G_OP 89GREL
89G_CL 89GITL
BB_DC_OP BBGSOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBGSCLTR
EXDU_BB

ANSI05000347-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000347 V2 EN

Figure 181: BB_ES (3) function block

12.3.4.4 Logic diagram

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC 89GREL
BB_DC_OP AND 89GITL
EXDU_BB NOT

89G_OP BBGSOPTR
89G_CL BBGSCLTR

en04000546_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000546 V1 EN

12.3.4.5 Signals
Table 375: BB_ES (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
89G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar grounding switch 89G is in open position
89G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar grounding switch 89G is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part

Table 376: BB_ES (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
89GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 89G is allowed
89GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 89G is not allowed
BBGSOPTR BOOLEAN 89G on this busbar part is in open position
BBGSCLTR BOOLEAN 89G on this busbar part is in closed position

496 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)

12.3.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3

12.3.5.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 182. The function can
be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

189G 189 289 289G

152

389G 489G

A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN

Figure 182: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS (3)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 497

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.5.3 Function block

A1A2_BS (3)
152_OP 152OPREL
152_CL 152OPITL
189_OP 152CLREL
189_CL 152CLITL
289_OP 189REL
289_CL 189ITL
389G_OP 289REL
389G_CL 289ITL
489G_OP 389GREL
489G_CL 389GITL
S189G_OP 489GREL
S189G_CL 489GITL
S289G_OP S1S2OPTR
S289G_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP 189OPTR
VP_BBTR 189CLTR
EXDU_12 289OPTR
EXDU_89G 289CLTR
152O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
152O_EX2 VP189TR
152O_EX3 VP289TR
189_EX1
189_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2

ANSI05000348-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000348 V2 EN

Figure 183: A1A2_BS (3) function block

498 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.5.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_BS
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
489G_OP
489G_CL XOR VP489G
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL XOR VPS1189G
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL XOR VPS2289G
VP189
189_OP AND OR 152OPREL
152O_EX1 152OPITL
NOT
VP289
289_OP AND
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP AND
EXDU_12
152O_EX3

VP189 152CLREL
VP289 AND 152CLITL
NOT
VP152
VP389G AND OR 189REL
VP489G 189ITL
NOT
VPS1189G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1

VP389G
VPS1189G AND
389G_CL
S1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2

en04000542_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000542 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 499

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

VP152
VP389G AND OR 289REL
VP489G 289ITL
NOT
VPS2289G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S2289G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1

VP489G
VPS2289G AND
489G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2

VP189 389GREL
VP289 AND 389GITL
189_OP NOT
489GREL
289_OP
489GITL
NOT

189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR

289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR
189_OP S1S2OPTR
289_OP OR S1S2CLTR
152_OP NOT

VP189 VPS1S2TR
VP289 AND
VP152

en04000543_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000543 V1 EN

12.3.5.5 Signals
Table 377: A1A2_BS (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
489G_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
489G_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
S189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in open position
S189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position
S289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in open position
Table continues on next page

500 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

S289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar
transfer
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and
2
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing ground sw.
S189G or S289G
152O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289

Table 378: A1A2_BS (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is allowed
152OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is not allowed
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
489GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is allowed
489GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is not allowed
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2
exists
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 501

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Description

VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the apparatuses between bus section 1 and 2
are valid
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

12.3.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)

12.3.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

12.3.6.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one bus-
section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 184. A1A2_DC (3)
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

52

189G 289G

A1A2_DC en04000492_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000492 V1 EN

Figure 184: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC (3)

502 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.6.3 Function block

A1A2_DC (3)
089_OP 089OPREL
089_CL 089OPITL
S189G_OP 089CLREL
S189G_CL 089CLITL
S289G_OP DCOPTR
S289G_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BB
089C_EX1
089C_EX2
089O_EX1
089O_EX2
089O_EX3

ANSI05000349-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000349 V2 EN

Figure 185: A1A2_DC (3) function block

12.3.6.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_DC
89_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
89_CL XOR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1189G_OP
VPS1189G
S1189G_CL XOR
S2289G_OP
VPS2289G
S2289G_CL XOR

VPS1189G
VPS2289G AND OR
VPS1_DC 89OPREL
S1189G_OP NOT
89OPITL
S2289G_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_89G

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1189
VPS2289G AND
VPS2_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_89G

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1189G
VPS2289G AND
S1189G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
QBOP_EX3

en04000544_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000544 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 503

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

IEC04000545 V1 EN

12.3.6.5 Signals
Table 379: A1A2_DC (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
089_OP BOOLEAN 0 089 is in open position
089_CL BOOLEAN 0 089 is in closed position
S189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in open position
S189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position
S289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in open position
S289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing ground sw.
S189G or S289G
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1
and 2
089C_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector 089
089C_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector 089
089O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089
089O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089
089O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089

504 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 380: A1A2_DC (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
089OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 089 is allowed
089OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 089 is not allowed
089CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 089 is allowed
089CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 089 is not allowed
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of 089 is valid (open or closed)

12.3.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)

12.3.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3

12.3.7.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler bay
connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 186. The function can also
be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 2089 789

189G

152

289G

en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN

Figure 186: Switchyard layout ABC_BC (3)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 505

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.7.3 Function block

ABC_BC (3)
152_OP 152OPREL
152_CL 152OPITL
189_OP 152CLREL
189_CL 152CLITL
289_OP 189REL
289_CL 189ITL
789_OP 289REL
789_CL 289ITL
2089_OP 789REL
2089_CL 789ITL
189G_OP 2089REL
189G_CL 2089ITL
289G_OP 189GREL
289G_CL 189GITL
1189G_OP 289GREL
1189G_CL 289GITL
2189G_OP 189OPTR
2189G_CL 189CLTR
7189G_OP 22089OTR
7189G_CL 22089CTR
BBTR_OP 789OPTR
BC_12_CL 789CLTR
VP_BBTR 1289OPTR
VP_BC_12 1289CLTR
EXDU_89G BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
152O_EX1 BC17CLTR
152O_EX2 BC27OPTR
152O_EX3 BC27CLTR
189_EX1 VP189TR
189_EX2 V22089TR
189_EX3 VP789TR
289_EX1 VP1289TR
289_EX2 VPBC12TR
289_EX3 VPBC17TR
2089_EX1 VPBC27TR
2089_EX2
789_EX1
789_EX2

ANSI05000350-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000350 V2 EN

Figure 187: ABC_BC (3) function block

506 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.7.4 Logic diagram

ABC_BC
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
2089_OP
2089_CL XOR VP2089
789_OP
789_CL XOR VP789
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
7189G_OP
7189G_CL XOR VP7189G
VP189
189_OP AND
152OPREL
OR
152O_EX1 152OPITL
NOT
VP2089
2089_OP AND
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP AND
EXDU_12
152O_EX3
VP189 152CLREL
VP289 AND 152CLITL
VP789 NOT
VP2089
en04000533_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000533 V1 EN

VP152
VP289 AND OR 189REL
VP189G 189ITL
VP289G NOT
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP_BC_12 AND
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G AND
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3

en04000534_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000534 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 507

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

VP152
VP189 AND OR 289REL
VP189G 289ITL
VP289G NOT
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP_BC_12 AND
189_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G AND
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3

en04000535_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000535 V1 EN

VP152
VP2089 AND OR 789REL
VP189G 789ITL
VP289G NOT
VP7189G
152_OP
2089_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
789_EX1
VP289G
VP7189G AND
289G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX2
VP152
VP789 AND OR
2089REL
VP189G 2089ITL
VP289G NOT
VP2189G
152_OP
789_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
2089_EX1
VP289G
VP2189G AND
289G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
2089_EX2

en04000536_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000536 V1 EN

508 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

VP189 189GREL
VP2089 AND 189GITL
VP789 NOT
289GREL
VP289
189_OP NOT
289GITL
2089_OP
789_OP
289_OP
189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR
2089_OP 22089OTR
289_OP AND 22089CTR
VP2089 NOT
V22089TR
VP289 AND
789_OP 789OPTR
789_CL 789CLTR
VP789 VP789TR
189_OP 1289OPTR
289_OP OR 1289CLTR
VP189 NOT
VP1289TR
VP289 AND
152_OP BC12OPTR
189_OP OR BC12CLTR
2089_OP NOT
VP152
VPBC12TR
VP189 AND
VP2089
152_OP BC17OPTR
189_OP OR BC17CLTR
789_OP NOT
VP152
VPBC17TR
VP189 AND
VP789
152_OP BC27OPTR
289_OP OR BC27CLTR
789_OP NOT
VP152
VPBC27TR
VP289 AND
VP789

en04000537_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000537 V1 EN

12.3.7.5 Signals
Table 381: ABC_BC (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
789_OP BOOLEAN 0 789 is in open position
789_CL BOOLEAN 0 789 is in closed position
2089_OP BOOLEAN 0 2089 is in open position
2089_CL BOOLEAN 0 2089 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 509

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Default Description

189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in closed
position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar 2 is in open position
2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar 2 is in closed
position
7189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar 7 is in open position
7189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar 7 is in closed
position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar Bus1
and Bus2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar
transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between Bus1
and Bus2 are valid
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing grounding
switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2
busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
152O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
2089_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 2089
2089_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 2089
789_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
789_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789

510 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 382: ABC_BC (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is allowed
152OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is not allowed
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
789REL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is allowed
789ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is not allowed
2089REL BOOLEAN Switching of 2089 is allowed
2089ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 2089 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
22089OTR BOOLEAN 289 and 2089 are in open position
22089CTR BOOLEAN 289 or 2089 or both are not in open position
789OPTR BOOLEAN 789 is in open position
789CLTR BOOLEAN 789 is in closed position
1289OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
1289CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between Bus1
and Bus2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between
Bus1 and Bus2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between Bus1
and Bus 7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between
Bus1 and Bus7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between Bus 2
and bus 7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between
Bus2 and Bus7
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 511

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Description

V22089TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid (open or closed)
VP789TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed)
VP1289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between Bus1
and Bus2 are valid
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7
are valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7
are valid

12.3.8 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)

12.3.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half BH_CONN - 3
diameter
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half BH_LINE_A - 3
diameter
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half BH_LINE_B - 3
diameter

12.3.8.2 Functionality

The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3),

BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter
according to figure 188.

512 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189 289
189G 189G

152 152
289G 289G

689 689

389G 389G
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

6189 6289
152

989 989
189G 289G
989G 989G

BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN

Figure 188: Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and
BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard
layout.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 513

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.8.3 Function blocks

BH_LINE_A (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
689_OP 689REL
689_CL 689ITL
189_OP 189REL
189_CL 189ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
389G_OP 389GREL
389G_CL 389GITL
989_OP 989REL
989_CL 989ITL
989G_OP 989GREL
989G_CL 989GITL
C152_OP 189OPTR
C152_CL 189CLTR
C6189_OP VP189TR
C6189_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7

ANSI05000352-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000352 V2 EN

Figure 189: BH_LINE_A (3) function block

514 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

BH_LINE_B (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
689_OP 689REL
689_CL 689ITL
289_OP 289REL
289_CL 289ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
389G_OP 389GREL
389G_CL 389GITL
989_OP 989REL
989_CL 989ITL
989G_OP 989GREL
989G_CL 989GITL
C152_OP 289OPTR
C152_CL 289CLTR
C6289_OP VP289TR
C6289_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7

ANSI05000353-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000353 V2 EN

Figure 190: BH_LINE_B (3) function block

BH_CONN (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
6189_OP 6189REL
6189_CL 6189ITL
6289_OP 6289REL
6289_CL 6289ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
6289_EX1
6289_EX2

ANSI05000351-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000351 V2 EN

Figure 191: BH_CONN (3) function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 515

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.8.4 Logic diagrams

BH_CONN
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
6189_OP
6189_CL XOR VP6189
6289_OP
6289_CL XOR VP6289
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
1389G_OP
1389G_CL XOR VP1389G
2389G_OP
2389G_CL XOR VP2389G
VP6189 152CLREL
VP6289 AND 152CLITL
NOT
VP152
VP189G AND OR 6189REL
VP289G 61891ITL
NOT
VP1389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP189G
VP1389G AND
189G_CL
1389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G AND OR 6289REL
VP289G 6289ITL
NOT
VP2389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP289G
VP2389G AND
289G_CL
2389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP6189 189GREL
VP6289 AND NOT 189GITL
6189_OP 289GREL
6289_OP NOT
289GITL

en04000560_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000560 V1 EN

516 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

BH_LINE_A
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
689_OP
689_CL XOR VP689
989G_OP
989G_CL XOR VP989G
989_OP
989_CL XOR VP989
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
C152_OP
C152_CL XOR VPC152
C189G_OP
C189G_CL XOR VPC189G
C289G_OP
C289G_CL XOR VPC289G
C6189_OP
C6189_CL XOR VPC6189
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON XOR VPVOLT
VP189 152CLREL
VP689 152CLITL
AND NOT
VP989
VP152
VP189G 689REL
AND OR
VP289G 689ITL
NOT
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
AND
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
en04000554_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000554 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 517

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

VP152
VP189G AND OR 189REL
VP289G 189ITL
NOT
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1

VP189G
VP1189G AND
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2

VP189 189GREL
VP689 AND 189GITL
NOT
189_OP 289GREL
689_OP 289GITL
VP689 NOT
VP989 AND 389GREL
VPC6189 389GITL
NOT
689_OP
989_OP
C6189_OP
VP152 989REL
VP689 AND OR 989ITL
NOT
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6189
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2 OR
152_OP
189G_OP AND
289G_OP
989_EX3

en04000555_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000555 V1 EN

C6189_OP
989_EX4
OR AND OR
C152_OP
C189G_OP AND
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G AND
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989 989GREL
VPVOLT AND 989GITL
NOT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR

en04000556_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000556 V1 EN

518 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

BH_LINE_B
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
689_OP
689_CL XOR VP689
989G_OP
989G_CL XOR VP989G
989_OP
989_CL XOR VP989
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
C152_OP
C152_CL XOR VPC152
C189G_OP
C189G_CL XOR VPC189G
C289G_OP
C289G_CL XOR VPC289G
C6289_OP
C6289_CL XOR VPC6289
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON XOR VPVOLT
VP289 152CLREL
VP689 AND 152CLITL
NOT
VP989
VP152
VP189G AND OR 689REL
VP289G 689ITL
VP389G NOT
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G AND
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
en04000557_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000557 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 519

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

VP152
VP189G 289REL
VP289G AND OR
NOT 289ITL
VP2189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1

VP189G
VP2189G AND
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2

VP289 189GREL
VP689 189GITL
AND NOT
289_OP 289GREL
689_OP 289GITL
VP689 NOT
VP989 389GREL
VPC6289 AND
NOT 389GITL
689_OP
989_OP
C6289_OP
VP152 989REL
VP689
AND OR 989ITL
VP989G NOT
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6289
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
OR
152_OP
189G_OP
AND
289G_OP
989_EX3

en04000558_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000558 V1 EN

C6289_OP
989_EX4
OR AND OR
C152_OP
C189G_OP
AND
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G AND
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989 989GREL
VPVOLT AND NOT 989GITL
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR

en04000559_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000559 V1 EN

520 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.8.5 Signals
Table 383: BH_LINE_A (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
689_OP BOOLEAN 0 689 is in open position
689_CL BOOLEAN 0 689 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
989_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
989G_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
989G_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
C152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C6189_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C6189_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing grounding switch
1189G
689_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
689_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 521

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Default Description

189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
989_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989

Table 384: BH_LINE_A (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
689REL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is allowed
689ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

522 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 385: BH_LINE_B (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
689_OP BOOLEAN 0 689 is in open position
689_CL BOOLEAN 0 689 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
989_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
989G_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
989G_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
C152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar 2 is in open position
2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar 2 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing grounding switch
2189G
689_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
689_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
989_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 523

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Default Description

989_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989

Table 386: BH_LINE_B (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
689REL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is allowed
689ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

Table 387: BH_CONN (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
6189_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
6189_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

524 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
1389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 1389G on line 1 is in open position
1389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 1389G on line 1 is in closed position
2389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 2389G on line 2 is in open position
2389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 2389G on line 2 is in closed position
6189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
6189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
6289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
6289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289

Table 388: BH_CONN (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
6189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is allowed
6189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is not allowed
6289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is allowed
6289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed

12.3.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 525

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3

12.3.9.2 Functionality

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A
(3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a double
busbar arrangement according to figure 192.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G 489G

DB_BUS_A 152 252 DB_BUS_B

289G 589G

6189 6289
389G

DB_LINE
989

989G

en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN

Figure 192: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A (3) handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the
disconnectors and grounding switches of this section. DB_BUS_B (3) handles the circuit
breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and grounding
switches of this section.

526 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.9.3 Logic diagrams

DB_BUS_A
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
6189_OP
6189_CL XOR VP6189
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
VP6189 152CLREL
VP189 AND 152CLITL
NOT
VP152
VP189G AND OR 6189REL
VP289G 6189ITL
NOT
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP289G
VP389G AND
289G_CL
389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G AND OR 189REL
VP289G 189ITL
NOT
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1

VP189G
VP1189G AND
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2

en04000547_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000547 V1 EN

VP6189 189GREL
VP189 AND NOT 189GITL
6189_OP 289GREL
189_OP NOT
289GITL
189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR

en04000548_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000548 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 527

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

DB_BUS_B
252_OP
252_CL XOR VP252
6289_OP
6289_CL XOR VP6289
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
489G_OP
489G_CL XOR VP489G
589G_OP
589G_CL XOR VP589G
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
VP6289 252CLREL
VP289 AND 252CLITL
NOT
VP252
VP489G AND OR 6289REL
VP589G 6289ITL
NOT
VP389G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP589G
VP389G AND
589G_CL
389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP252
VP489G AND OR 289REL
VP589G 289ITL
NOT
VP2189G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1

VP489G
VP2189G AND
489G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2

en04000552_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000552 V1 EN

VP6289 489GREL
VP289 AND NOT 489GITL
6289_OP 589GREL
289_OP 589GITL
NOT
289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR

en04000553_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000553 V1 EN

528 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

DB_LINE
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
252_OP
252_CL XOR VP252
6189_OP
6189_CL XOR VP6189
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
6289_OP
6289_CL XOR VP6289
489G_OP
489G_CL XOR VP489G
589G_OP
589G_CL XOR VP589G
989_OP
989_CL XOR VP989
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
989G_OP
989G_CL XOR VP989G
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON XOR VPVOLT
VP152
VP252 AND OR 989REL
VP189G 989ITL
NOT
VP289G
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
152_OP
252_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1

AND
en04000549_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000549 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 529

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

VP152
VP189G AND OR
VP289G
VP389G
VP989G
VP6289
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
989G_OP
6289_OP
989_EX2
VP252
VP6189 AND
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
252_OP
6189_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX3
VP389G
VP989G AND
VP6189
VP6289
389G_OP
989G_OP
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_EX4
VP389G
VP989G AND
389G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX5

en04000550_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000550 V1 EN

VP6189
VP6289 AND 389GREL
VP989 389GITL
NOT
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_OP
VP989
VPVOLT AND 989GREL
989_OP 989GITL
NOT
VOLT_OFF

en04000551_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000551 V1 EN

530 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.9.4 Function block

DB_BUS_A (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
189_OP 6189REL
189_CL 6189ITL
6189_OP 189REL
6189_CL 189ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
389G_OP 189OPTR
389G_CL 189CLTR
1189G_OP VP189TR
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2

ANSI05000354-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000354 V2 EN

Figure 193: DB_BUS_A (3) function block

DB_LINE (3)
152_OP 989REL
152_CL 989ITL
252_OP 389GREL
252_CL 389GITL
6189_OP 989GREL
6189_CL 989GITL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5

ANSI05000356-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000356 V2 EN

Figure 194: DB_LINE (3) function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 531

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

DB_BUS_B (3)
252_OP 252CLREL
252_CL 252CLITL
289_OP 6289REL
289_CL 6289ITL
6289_OP 289REL
6289_CL 289ITL
489G_OP 489GREL
489G_CL 489GITL
589G_OP 589GREL
589G_CL 589GITL
389G_OP 289OPTR
389G_CL 289CLTR
2189G_OP VP289TR
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2

ANSI05000355-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000355 V2 EN

Figure 195: DB_BUS_B (3) function block

12.3.9.5 Signals
Table 389: DB_BUS_A (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
6189_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
6189_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in closed
position
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing grounding switch
1189G
6189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
Table continues on next page

532 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

6189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189

Table 390: DB_BUS_A (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
6189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is allowed
6189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

Table 391: DB_BUS_B (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
252_OP BOOLEAN 0 252 is in open position
252_CL BOOLEAN 0 252 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
489G_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
489G_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
589G_OP BOOLEAN 0 589G is in open position
589G_CL BOOLEAN 0 589G is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar 2 is in open position
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 533

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Default Description

2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar 2 is in closed
position
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing grounding switch
2189G
6289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
6289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289

Table 392: DB_BUS_B (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
252CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 252 is allowed
252CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 252 is not allowed
6289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is allowed
6289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
489GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is allowed
489GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is not allowed
589GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 589G is allowed
589GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 589G is not allowed
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

Table 393: DB_LINE (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
252_OP BOOLEAN 0 252 is in open position
252_CL BOOLEAN 0 252 is in closed position
6189_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
6189_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
Table continues on next page

534 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
489G_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
489G_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
589G_OP BOOLEAN 0 589G is in open position
589G_CL BOOLEAN 0 589G is in closed position
989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
989_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
989G_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
989G_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
989_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989

Table 394: DB_LINE (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed

12.3.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 535

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3

12.3.10.2 Functionality

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 196. The function
can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single
busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 789

189G

152
289G

989
989G

en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN

Figure 196: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE (3)

536 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.10.3 Function block

ABC_LINE (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
989_OP 989REL
989_CL 989ITL
189_OP 189REL
189_CL 189ITL
289_OP 289REL
289_CL 289ITL
789_OP 789REL
789_CL 789ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
989G_OP 989GREL
989G_CL 989GITL
1189G_OP 189OPTR
1189G_CL 189CLTR
2189G_OP 289OPTR
2189G_CL 289CLTR
7189G_OP 789OPTR
7189G_CL 789CLTR
BB7_D_OP 1289OPTR
BC_12_CL 1289CLTR
BC_17_OP VP189TR
BC_17_CL VP289TR
BC_27_OP VP789TR
BC_27_CL VP1289TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
989_EX1
989_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
789_EX1
789_EX2
789_EX3
789_EX4

ANSI05000357-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000357 V2 EN

Figure 197: ABC_LINE (3) function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 537

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.10.4 Logic diagram

ABC_LINE
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
989_OP
989_CL XOR VP989
189_OP 152CLREL
189_CL XOR VP189 AND NOT
152CLITL
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
789_OP
789_CL XOR VP789
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
989G_OP
989G_CL XOR VP989G
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
7189G_OP
7189G_CL XOR VP7189G
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON XOR VPVOLT
VP152
VP189G AND OR 989REL
VP289G 989ITL
NOT
VP989G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
VP289G
VP989G AND
289G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX2

en04000527_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000527 V1 EN

538 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

VP152 189REL
AND OR
VP289
VP189G 189ITL
NOT
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G

189_EX1

VP289 AND
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

189_EX2

VP189G
AND
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G

189EX3

en04000528_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000528 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 539

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

VP152 289REL
AND OR
VP189
VP189G 289ITL
NOT
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G

289_EX1

VP189 AND
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

289_EX2

VP189G
AND
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G

289_EX3

en04000529_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000529 V1 EN

540 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

VP989G 789REL
AND OR
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D 789ITL
NOT
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
989G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
789_EX1

VP152
VP189 AND
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
152_CL
189_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

789_EX2

en04000530_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000530 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 541

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

VP152
VP289
AND OR
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
152_CL
289_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX3
VP989G
VP7189G AND
989G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX4
VP189 189GREL
VP289 189GITL
AND NOT
VP989
289GREL
189_OP
289_OP 289GITL
NOT
989_OP
VP789
VP989 989GREL
AND
VPVOLT 989GITL
789_OP NOT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000531 V1 EN

542 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR
289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR
789_OP 789OPTR
789_CL 789CLTR
VP789 VP789TR
189_OP 1289OPTR
289_OP OR 1289CLTR
VP189 NOT
VP1289TR
VP289 AND

en04000532_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000532 V1 EN

12.3.10.5 Signals
Table 395: ABC_LINE (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
989_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
789_OP BOOLEAN 0 789 is in open position
789_CL BOOLEAN 0 789 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
989G_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
989G_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in open position
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 543

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Default Description

1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in closed
position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar 2 is in open position
2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar 2 is in closed
position
7189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar 7 is in open position
7189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar 7 is in closed
position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar bus7 except in the own bay
are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar Bus1
and Bus2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar 1 and
Bus 7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar Bus1
and Bus7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar 2 and
Bus 7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar Bus2
and Bus7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are
valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between Bus1
and Bus2 are valid
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7
are valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7
are valid
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing grounding
switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on
WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
989_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
Table continues on next page

544 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

289_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
789_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
789_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
789_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
789_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789

Table 396: ABC_LINE (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
789REL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is allowed
789ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
789OPTR BOOLEAN 789 is in open position
789CLTR BOOLEAN 789 is in closed position
1289OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
1289CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
VP789TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed)
VP1289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 545

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)

12.3.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3

12.3.11.2 Functionality

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a transformer
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 198. The function is
used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise,
the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be used. This function can also
be used in single busbar arrangements.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G

152 AB_TRAFO

289G

389G

252 252 and 489G are not

used in this interlocking
489G

389 489

en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN

Figure 198: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO (3)

546 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.11.3 Function block

AB_TRAFO (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
189_OP 189REL
189_CL 189ITL
289_OP 289REL
289_CL 289ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
389_OP 189OPTR
389_CL 189CLTR
489_OP 289OPTR
489_CL 289CLTR
389G_OP 1289OPTR
389G_CL 1289CLTR
1189G_OP VP189TR
1189G_CL VP289TR
2189G_OP VP1289TR
2189G_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BC
152_EX1
152_EX2
152_EX3
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3

ANSI05000358-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000358 V2 EN

Figure 199: AB_TRAFO (3) function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 547

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.11.4 Logic diagram

AB_TRAFO
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
389_OP
389_CL XOR VP389
489_OP
489_CL XOR VP489
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
VP189 152CLREL
VP289 AND 152CLITL
VP189G NOT
VP289G
VP389
VP489
VP389G
152_EX2
389G_OP
152_EX3 OR
189G_CL
289G_CL AND
389G_CL
152_EX1

en04000538_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000538 V1 EN

548 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

VP152
VP289 AND OR 189REL
VP189G
189ITL
VP289G NOT
VP389G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP389G AND
VP_BC_12
289_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP289G AND
VP389G
VP1189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3

en04000539_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000539 V1 EN

VP152
VP189 252REL
AND OR
VP189G 252ITL
VP289G NOT
VP389G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP389G
AND
VP_BC_12
189_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
AND
VP389G
VP2189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3

en04000540_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000540 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 549

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

VP189 189GREL
VP289 AND 189GITL
NOT
VP389 289GREL
VP489
189_OP 289GITL
NOT
289_OP
389_OP
489_OP
189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR
289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR
189_OP 1289OPTR
289_OP OR 1289CLTR
NOT
VP189 VP1289TR
VP289 AND

en04000541_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000541 V1 EN

12.3.11.5 Signals
Table 397: AB_TRAFO (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
389_OP BOOLEAN 0 389 is in open position
389_CL BOOLEAN 0 389 is in closed position
489_OP BOOLEAN 0 489 is in open position
489_CL BOOLEAN 0 489 is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar Bus1
and Bus2
Table continues on next page

550 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between Bus1
and Bus2 are valid
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing grounding
switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
152_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
152_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
152_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289

Table 398: AB_TRAFO (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
1289OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
1289CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
VP1289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 551

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.3.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL

12.3.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

12.3.12.2 Functionality

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or
CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

12.3.12.3 Function block

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd

IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 200: POS_EVAL function block

12.3.12.4 Logic diagram

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker intermediate) Good 0 0
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

552 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.12.5 Signals
Table 399: POS_EVAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

Table 400: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

12.4 Apparatus control APC

12.4.1 Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to trip is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism check,
operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

Apparatus control features:

• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability
• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position and quality indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position

Two types of command models can be used:

• Direct with normal security
• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 553

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an
additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The command sequence
with enhanced security is always terminated by a CommandTermination service primitive
and an AddCause telling if the command was successful or if something went wrong.

Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.

12.4.2 Operation principle

A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank.
The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus
control functions directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.

Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation

Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles the
interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process
information used by higher-level control functions.

Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by
one function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for the
control of a breaker respectively a disconnector are almost the same, the same function
block type is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.

The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for circuit
breakers) or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and grounding switches). The
physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two function blocks via binary
inputs and outputs.

Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision
within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function
reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard
configuration. These four types are:

• Bay control QCBAY

• Switch controller SCSWI
• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI

The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL),
to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and
Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus
control function. The principles of operation, function blocks, input and output signals and
setting parameters for all these functions are described below.

554 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.3 Error handling

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be
set with a value. Table 401 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The translation
to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 402. For IEC 61850-8-1
edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition 1 also a number of
vendor specific causes are used. The values are available in the command response to
commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for
Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI)
indicates the value of the cause during the latest command.
Table 401: Values for "cause" signal
Cause Name Description Supported
number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready state X
2 Blocked-by- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches X
switching-hierarchy like in CSWI has the value TRUE
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) X
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos X
in XCBR or XSWI)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR or X
XSWI)
6 Parameter-change- Control action is blocked due to running parameter change X
in-execution
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has X
reached the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR/ X
XSWI)is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow any switching
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at X
process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or XSWI)
10 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching X
interlocking devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=”FALSE” or
EnaCls.stVal=”FALSE”
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to exceed X
synchrocheck of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because X
in-execution control action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event that X
prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked, because another control action in X
a domain (for example substation) is already running (in
any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the
DPC.stSeld=”TRUE”)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 555

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time X
limit
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=”TRUE”)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was not X
selected
19 Object-already- Select action is not executed, because the addressed X
selected object is already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority X
21 Ended-with- Control action executed but the end position has overshoot
overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with
communication-loss the client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to the data attribute X
command CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services are X
parameters not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select and
Operate service are different
27 Locked-by-other- Another client has already reserved the object X
client
-22 Wrong_CTL_Model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-24 Blocked_for_Open_C Blocked for Open command X
md
-25 Blocked_For_Close_ Blocked for Close Command X
Cmd
-30 longOperationTime Operation time too long X
-31 switchNotStartMovin Switch did not start moving X
g
-32 persistantIntermediat Switch stopped in intermediate state X
eState
-33 switchReturnedToInit Switch returned to the initial position X
Pos
-34 switchInBadState Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 notExpectedFinalPos Switch did not reach the expected final position X
ition

556 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 402: Translation of cause values for IEC61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
21 21 - Ended-with-overshoot
22 22 - Abortion-due-to-deviation
23 23 - Abortion-by-communication-loss
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong_CTL_Model
-24 24 -24 Blocked_for_Open_Cmd
-25 24 -25 Blocked_For_Close_Cmd
-30 24 -30 longOperationTime
-31 16 -31 switchNotStartMoving
-32 16 -32 persistantIntermediateState
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 557

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
-33 22 -33 switchReturnedToInitPos
-34 4 -34 switchInBadState
-35 22 -35 notExpectedFinalPosition

12.4.4 Bay control QCBAY

12.4.4.1 Functionality

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote
control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also
provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.

12.4.4.2 Function block

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM

IEC10000048-2-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V2 EN

Figure 201: QCBAY function block

12.4.4.3 Signals
Table 403: QCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

558 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 404: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

12.4.4.4 Settings
Table 405: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators, commands
No priority from both local, station and remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are allowed
Yes but not Local when local remote switch is in
remote

12.4.4.5 Operation principle

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY)
function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the IEC61850-8-1 edition 2 standard,
applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the functionality is not described by the LLN0
node or any other node, therefore the Bay control function is represented as a vendor
specific node in edition 1.

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The positions are
here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station and/or remote
level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED level. The local/remote
switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the
switch and its validity information are connected internally, not via I/O boards. When the
switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/
O boards.

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this)
is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 559

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state
(3), which means no possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To
Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position
according to Table 406. In addition, there are two parameters that affect the value of the
PSTO signal.

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote state,
the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local and remote
level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO
value shows the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control
anything

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set and the LR-switch position is in Remote state, the
PSTO value is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to operate from both
station and remote level without any priority.
Table 406: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel PSTO AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVal Possible
switch positions value (setting Station (command) locations that
parameter) (setting shall be able to
parameter) operate
0 = Off 0 - - - Not possible
to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority - - Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority - - Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote 6 Priority No TRUE Station level
2 = Remote 7 Priority No FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 2 Priority Yes - Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority - - Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty 3 - - - Not possible
to operate

560 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a
complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to
apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined
in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control
without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.

12.4.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY function
block. The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the
switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch
connected via binary inputs.

12.4.5.1 Function block

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID

IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
IEC05000360 V2 EN

Figure 202: LOCREM function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 561

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

IEC05000361-2-en.vsd
IEC05000361 V2 EN

Figure 203: LOCREMCTRL function block

12.4.5.2 Signals
Table 407: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

Table 408: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

Table 409: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
Table continues on next page

562 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

Table 410: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

12.4.5.3 Settings
Table 411: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-switch
External LR-switch

12.4.5.4 Operation principle

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/
remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 204, where the inputs on function block
LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local
HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between external and local HMI
source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The outputs from the LOCREM

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 563

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control
(QCBAY).

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12

IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN

Figure 204: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays
and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be
different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/
remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that
is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL)
controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and
screen page.

The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined
in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control
without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.

564 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.6 Switch controller SCSWI

12.4.6.1 Functionality

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select
and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate
on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.

12.4.6.2 Function block

SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENPOS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOS1 POS_INTR
XPOS2 XOUT
XPOS3

IEC05000337-3-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V3 EN

Figure 205: SCSWI function block

12.4.6.3 Signals
Table 412: SCSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 565

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Default Description

SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted by the synchronism-check
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL2 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL3 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL

Table 413: SCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute Open command
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute Close command
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function, started
through START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles A, B and C are not equal after a
set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands as

e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively closing to the SCSWI
function. They work without regard to how the operator place selector,
PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on the outputs EXE_OP and

566 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input, EN_OPEN respectively

EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is active.

L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence
connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place
selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote with no priority. If the
control model used is Select before operate, Also the corresponding
enable input must be set, and no interlocking is active. The L_SEL input
must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the control model
is Select before operate.

12.4.6.4 Settings
Table 414: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at 00/11 position
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and execute
signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchronism-check to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution to
termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy between the
poles
SuppressMidPos Disabled - - Enabled Mid-position is suppressed during the time
Enabled tIntermediate
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be done in
Op phase select phase

12.4.6.5 Operation principle

The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 567

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchronism-check.

Control handling
.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal
security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter
CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct
with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security"
command model requires a select before execution. The command sequence for a
command with control mode SBO with enhanced security is shown in figure 206, with
control mode direct with normal security is shown in figure 207.

Reservation SXCBR /
Client SCSWI
logic SXSWI
select

selectAck/AddCause = 0

RES_RQ = TRUE
tReservation
Response

tSelect

RES_GRT = TRUE

SELECTED = TRUE

requestedPosition = 10

opRcvd = TRUE
EXE_CL

opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0
operateAck/AddCause = 0
tExecutionFB

POSITION = 00, timeStamp

POSITION = 00, timeStamp
POSITION = 10, timeStamp
cmdTermination/
AddCause = 0
POSITION = 10, timeStamp
cmdTermination/AddCause = 0

RES_RQ = FALSE

RES_GRT = FALSE

SELECTED = FALSE

IEC15000416-1-EN.vsdx

IEC15000416 V1 EN

Figure 206: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when
the control model SBO with enhanced security is used

568 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Reservation SwitchCtrl Switch

client
core core core

requestedPosition = 10

opRcvd = TRUE

RES_RQ

tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
EXE_CL

opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0 operateAck/AddCause = 0

POSITION = 00, timeStamp POSITION = 00, timeStamp

POSITION = 10, timeStamp

cmdTermination/
POSITION = 10, timeStamp AddCause = 0

RES_RQ = FALSE

RES_GRT = FALSE

IEC15000417-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000417 V1 EN

Figure 207: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when
the control model direct with normal security is used

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in
three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step
ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence
is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence
is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be read from the function block and used for
example at commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual

position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution
command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of
the position value.

Evaluation of position
The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the switch
controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive the position,
time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 569

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting
three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-phase switches,
following principles will be applied:

All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in close position:
One switch =open, two switches= close (or
inversely):
Any switch in intermediate position:
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = close
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time
stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.

In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discrepancy and is
supervised by this function. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, that is, the positions
of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for a time longer than the setting
tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from
the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the
"cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and
via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.

The different blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position.

• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

570 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Dependence on Operator place

For commands from communication protocol, such as IEC61850-8-1 and DNP, and
through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is evaluated, and
only commands from enabled operator places are accepted, see Table 406. Commands
through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are always from the local operator
place. For commands through the inputs AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is
not evaluated, thus also accepted when the operator place selector is set to Faulty or Off.

Interaction with synchronism-check and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchronism-check and the
synchronizing function (SESRSYN, 25). It is assumed that the synchronism-check
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the
synchronism-check function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchronism-check, the evaluation of the synchronism-check
state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchronism-check
function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit
breaker (SXCBR).

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, SCSWI

will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the
closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see
Figure 208. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the
"synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing
function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-synchronism-check" in the
"cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 212.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 571

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK

START_SY

SY_INPRO
SESRSYN

CLOSECMD
Synchro Synchronizing
check function

ANSI09000209-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000209 V1 EN

Figure 208: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (25) (synchronism

check and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after
the selection of the object to operate.

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd

IEC05000092 V1 EN

Figure 209: tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

572 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

select

reservation request RES_RQ

reservation granted RES_GRT

t1>tResResponse, then 1-
tResResponse
of-n-control in 'cause' is
timer t1
set
IEC05000093-2-en.vsd

IEC05000093 V2 EN

Figure 210: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 211.

execute command

phase A open

close

phase B open

close

phase C open

close

command termination
phase A
command termination
phase B
command termination
phase C
command termination *

circuit breaker open

close

tExecutionFB t1>tExecutionFB, then

timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The command termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000094 V1 EN

Figure 211: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the
time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start.
The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism-check conditions are
not fulfilled.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 573

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in progress.

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing
t2>tSynchronizing, then
t2 blocked-by-synchronism
check in 'cause' is set
en05000095_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000095 V1 EN

Figure 212: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

12.4.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR

12.4.7.1 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and
to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in
the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching
operation and position.

574 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.7.2 Function block

SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENPOS
POSOPEN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE TR_POS
CBOPCAP CNT_VAL
TR_OPEN L_CAUSE
TR_CLOSE EEHEALTH
RS_CNT CBOPCAP
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN*

IEC05000338-3-en.vsd

IEC05000338 V4 EN

Figure 213: SXCBR function block

12.4.7.3 Signals
Table 415: SXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4
= OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 575

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Table 416: SXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for CB
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4
= OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More

12.4.7.4 Settings
Table 417: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to move
after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end position
Adaptive is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count value)

12.4.7.5 Operation principle

The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all
conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution

576 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause"

value, see Table 401.

SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value
can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local HMI, a binary
input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point
Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The health of the external
equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to IEC61850-8-1. The operation
counter functionality and the external equipment health supervision are independent sub-
functions of the circuit breaker function.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE
it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set
to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal
is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) are rejected, even trip commands
from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is
described in Figure 214.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 214: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals
is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller,
protection functions and autoreclosure.

The blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 577

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because
that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the
manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position

indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution
is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is
released, the position value is kept the same as the last substitution value,
but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the
value is old and not reliable.

When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1 data

object is marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but
the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the
substitution indication in the quality, so it does not show that it is derived
from a substituted value.

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse
is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position.
Figure 215 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

578 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 215: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be
sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command
can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 216 shows the principle of the execute
output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd

IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 216: Execute output pulse

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 579

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse time
has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for the end
of the execution pulse before telling the activating function that the
command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position
and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close
command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets
when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false
the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS

=1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only
when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown
in Figure 217 .

580 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 217: Open command with open position indication

12.4.8 Circuit switch SXSWI

12.4.8.1 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or grounding switches via binary output boards
and to supervise the switching operation and position.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 581

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.4.8.2 Function block

SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENPOS
POSOPEN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE CNT_VAL
SWOPCAP L_CAUSE
RS_CNT EEHEALTH
EEH_WARN SWOPCAP
EEH_ALM
XIN

IEC05000339-3-en.vsd
IEC05000339 V3 EN

Figure 218: SXSWI function block

12.4.8.3 Signals
Table 418: SXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C, 4 = O
and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

582 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 419: SXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for DIS
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
SWOPCAP INTEGER Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C, 4 = O
and C

12.4.8.4 Settings
Table 420: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to move
after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end position
Adaptive is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector Load Break, Disconnector, Grounding Switch,
Disconnector HS Grounding. Switch
Grounding Switch
HS Groundg.
Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count value)

12.4.8.5 Operation principle

The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 583

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block
conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution command. In
case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see
Table 401.

SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value
can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or
remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic
Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC), for example.

Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC61850-8-1.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote switch
position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means
that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE
it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to
TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even
trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/
remote switch is described in Figure 219.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 219: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals
is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller,
protection functions and autorecloser.

The blocking possibilities are:

584 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because
the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually
entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position

indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution
is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is
released, the position value is kept the same as the last substitution value,
but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the
value is old and not reliable.

When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1 data

object is marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but
the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the
substitution indication in the quality, so it does not show that it is derived
from a substituted value.

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse
is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position.
Figure 220 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 585

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 220: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be
sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command
can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 221 shows the principle of the execute
output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd

IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 221: Execute output pulse

586 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position
and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close
command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets
when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false
the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS

=1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only
when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown
in Figure 222.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 587

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 222: Open command with open position indication

12.4.9 Bay reserve QCRSV

12.4.9.1 Functionality

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information

between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or
complete substation.

12.4.9.2 Function block

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

IEC05000340-2-en.vsd
IEC05000340 V2 EN

Figure 223: QCRSV function block

588 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.9.3 Signals
Table 421: QCRSV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different BayRes
blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals are
reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 422: QCRSV Output signals

Name Type Description
RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 1 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT2 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 2 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT3 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 3 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT4 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 4 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT5 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 5 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT6 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 6 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT7 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 7 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT8 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 8 is allowed to
operate
RES_BAYS BOOLEAN Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B BOOLEAN Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED BOOLEAN Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different BayRes
blocks

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 589

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.4.9.4 Settings
Table 423: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of
Only own bay res. apparatus 1
ParamRequest2 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of
Only own bay res. apparatus 2
ParamRequest3 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of
Only own bay res. apparatus 3
ParamRequest4 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of
Only own bay res. apparatus 4
ParamRequest5 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of
Only own bay res. apparatus 5
ParamRequest6 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of
Only own bay res. apparatus 6
ParamRequest7 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of
Only own bay res. apparatus 7
ParamRequest8 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of
Only own bay res. apparatus 8

12.4.9.5 Operation principle

The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts to
operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if
there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the
function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input
signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller (SCWI). The signals for request
from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN.
These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to
RES_DATA in QCRSV.

The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only
(TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation
request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know
which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input
signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the
requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be
permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or
another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED.

590 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch
controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and
the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that
requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will
send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their
response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the
output RES_BAYS.

When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output
RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-control"
in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the
output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in
QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from
output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the
reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked.
That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for
example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another
operator place at the same time.

The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input
signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight apparatuses, the
input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.

If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV.
The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through the input
EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 224. If more than one QCRSV are used,
the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first
QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 591

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_ GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_ GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_ GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_ GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_ GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_ GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_ GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_ GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_ BAYS
BLK_ RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_ DATA EXCH_ OUT

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_ GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_ GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_ GRT3 RES_ BAYS
OR
RES_RQ3 RES_ GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_ GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_ GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_ GRT7 OR
RES_RQ7 RES_ GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_ BAYS
BLK_ RES ACK_TO_B RESERVED
OR
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_ DATA EXCH_ OUT

ANSI05000088_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000088 V2 EN

Figure 224: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

12.4.10 Reservation input RESIN

12.4.10.1 Functionality

The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from other
bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60
instances are available).

592 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.10.2 Function block

RESIN1
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
IEC05000341 V2 EN

Figure 225: RESIN1 function block

RESIN2
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd
IEC09000807 V1 EN

Figure 226: RESIN2 function block

12.4.10.3 Signals
Table 424: RESIN1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknowledged the reservation request
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reservervation and acknowledge signals from
another bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 425: RESIN1 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknowledged the reservation
request from this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation
request from this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reservation and acknowledge signals from other
bays are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 593

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Table 426: RESIN2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 5 Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknowledged the reservation request
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reservervation and acknowledge signals from
another bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 427: RESIN2 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknowledged the reservation
request from this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation
request from this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reservation and acknowledge signals from other
bays are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks

12.4.10.4 Settings
Table 428: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
Bay future use

Table 429: RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
Bay future use

12.4.10.5 Operation principle

The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The
logic diagram in Figure 227 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the

594 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred
over the station bus from another bay.

EXCH_IN INT

BIN

ACK_F_B
AND
FutureUse
OR

ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK OR

VALID_TX
AND

BAY_VAL OR

RE_RQ_B
OR

BAY_RES AND
V _RE_RQ
OR

BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT

INT……..Integer
BIN……..Binary en05000089_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000089 V1 EN

Figure 227: Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 228 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the
current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation
mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions are connected to
the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles the reservation function in the own bay.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 595

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN

Figure 228: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

12.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC

12.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

12.5.2 Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC (or the
selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality
compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches
are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set

596 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all
these problems.

12.5.3 Function block

SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC14000005-1-en.vsd
IEC14000005 V1 EN

Figure 229: SLGAPC function block

12.5.4 Signals
Table 430: SLGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 597

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Table 431: SLGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)

598 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.5.5 Settings
Table 432: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

12.5.6 Monitored data

Table 433: SLGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

12.5.7 Operation principle

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP
input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the
UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN
input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
descending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the
DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the
output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active
till the time it receives next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the
settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive
front and the output activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a “select before execute” dialog. One can block the function operation, by
activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further
operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 599

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal
function block can be connected. SLGAPC function block has also an integer value
output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are
fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the
position names instead of a number.

12.5.7.1 Graphical display

There are two possibilities for SLGAPC

• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position
names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only
the first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the
following sequence of commands will ensure:

600 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Control
Control Single Line Diagram
Measurements Commands
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Change to the "Switches" page Reset
of the SLD by left-right arrows. Authorization
Select switch by up-down Language
arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch Open Close ../Control/SLD/Switch

SMBRREC control SMBRREC control
Select switch. Press the
WFM WFM
Open or Close key. A
dialog box appears.
Pilot setup Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch

SMBRREC control
WFM

Pilot setup
OFF

Damage control
DFW

ANSI06000421-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000421 V2 EN

Figure 230: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.

12.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC

12.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - -

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 601

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.6.2 Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used for a
variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on the single line diagram
(SLD) on the local HMI or from Binary inputs

12.6.3 Function block

VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC14000066-1-en.vsd
IEC14000066 V1 EN

Figure 231: VSGAPC function block

12.6.4 Signals
Table 434: VSGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

Table 435: VSGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

602 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.6.5 Settings
Table 436: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model according
SBO Enh to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

12.6.6 Operation principle

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way
as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and
POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from
the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from
the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated

with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the
screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators
place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE
connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local
HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation,
where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of
the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 603

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

12.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC

12.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

12.7.2 Functionality
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function block is
used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in the substation
through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is especially used in the
interlocking station-wide logics.

12.7.3 Function block

IEC13000081 V1 EN

Figure 232: DPGAPC function block

604 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.7.4 Signals
Table 437: DPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

Table 438: DPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

12.7.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

12.7.6 Operation principle

When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals. To be
able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools,
described in the Engineering manual and define which function block in which systems,
equipment or functions should receive this information.

12.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC

12.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

12.8.2 Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a collection of 8
single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LED's

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 605

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result
of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and
SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse
time.

12.8.3 Function block

SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

ANSI07000143-3-en.vsd
ANSI07000143 V1 EN

Figure 233: SPC8GAPC function block

12.8.4 Signals
Table 439: SPC8GAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 440: SPC8GAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

606 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.8.5 Settings
Table 441: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 1
Latched
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
PulseMode2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 2
Latched
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 2
PulseMode3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 3
Latched
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 3
PulseMode4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 4
Latched
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 4
PulseMode5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 5
Latched
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 5
PulseMode6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 6
Latched
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 6
PulseMode7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 7
Latched
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 7
PulseMode8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 8
Latched
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 8

12.8.6 Operation principle

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight
outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The
settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the
signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block
the operation of the function – in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 607

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.

12.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS

12.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

12.9.2 Functionality
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into the
configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS
function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and
MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

608 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.9.3 Function block

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN

Figure 234: AUTOBITS function block

12.9.4 Signals
Table 442: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

Table 443: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 609

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Description

CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

12.9.5 Settings
Table 444: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

610 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 445: DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

Table 446: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baud-rate for serial port
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
115200 Bd

Table 447: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DLinkConfirm Never - - Never Data-link confirm
Sometimes
Always
tDLinkTimeout 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Data-link confirm timeout in s
DLinkRetries 0 - 255 - 1 3 Data-link maximum retries
tRxToTxMinDel 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size
StopBits 1-2 - 1 1 Stop bits
Parity No - - Even Parity
Even
Odd
tRTSWarmUp 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 RS485 back-off delay in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 611

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Table 448: CH1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP portfor initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 449: CH1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

Table 450: CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 451: CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

612 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 452: CH3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 453: CH3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

Table 454: CH4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 455: CH4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 613

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Table 456: MSTSER Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
ChToAssociate RS485 - - RS485 Channel to associate to
Optical
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

614 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 457: MSTSER Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Disabled - - Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line
retry mode
tVRRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tVROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - Yes Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 615

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after timeout
Yes
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout

Table 458: MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continues on next page

616 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 459: MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Disabled - - Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line
retry mode
tVRRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tVROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 617

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tVREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after timeout
Yes
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 460: MST2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Table continues on next page

618 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 461: MST2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 619

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Disabled - - Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line
retry mode
tVRRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tVROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after timeout
Yes
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

620 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Table 462: MST3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 621

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 463: MST3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Disabled - - Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line
retry mode
tVRRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tVROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
Table continues on next page

622 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tVREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after timeout
Yes
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 464: MST4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 623

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 465: MST4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
Table continues on next page

624 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Disabled - - Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line
retry mode
tVRRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tVROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tVREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after timeout
Yes
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 625

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

12.9.6 Operation principle

AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To
operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-
On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an
overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of
BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again,
momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place. The
command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in “Local” then no
change is applied to the outputs.

12.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

12.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

12.10.2 Functionality
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the
local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to
control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

626 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.10.3 Function block

SINGLECMD
BLOCK ^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
IEC05000698 V3 EN

Figure 235: SINGLECMD function block

12.10.4 Signals
Table 466: SINGLECMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function

Table 467: SINGLECMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Single command output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Single command output 13
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 627

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Control

Name Type Description

OUT14 BOOLEAN Single command output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Single command output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Single command output 16

12.10.5 Settings
Table 468: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Steady
Pulsed

12.10.6 Operation principle

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals. The
outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the
local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in
PCM600.

The output signals can be of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block.
The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function has
a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK
input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.

The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in functions
or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

628 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Section 13 Logic

13.1 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC

13.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

13.1.2 Functionality
The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to
physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or
steady output.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 629

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.1.3 Function block

TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32

IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN

Figure 236: TMAGAPC function block

13.1.4 Signals
Table 469: TMAGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
Table continues on next page

630 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

Table 470: TMAGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 631

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.1.5 Settings
Table 471: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

13.1.6 Operation principle

The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output
signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide
grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the
third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime, OnDelay

and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is always
active and will delay the input to output transition by the set time. The ModeOutput for
respective output decides whether the output shall be steady with an drop-off delay as set
by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed
operation and that the inputs are connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be
given on the output if all related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. For steady
operation the OffDelay will pickup when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical
diagram is shown in figure 237

632 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

PulseTime
t
AND
ModeOutput1
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
OR
0-OnDelay 0 AND
OR
0 0-OffDelay
INPUT 16

PulseTime
t
AND
ModeOutput2
INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
OR
0-OnDelay 0 AND
OR
0 0-OffDelay
INPUT 32

PulseTime
t
AND

ModeOutput3
OUTPUT 3
OR
0-OnDelay 0 AND
OR
0 0-OffDelay

ANSI10000055-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000055 V3 EN

Figure 237: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly
to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the
pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum
duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

13.1.7 Technical data

Table 472: Number of TMAGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 633

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.2 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH

13.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

13.2.2 Functionality
The group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

13.2.3 Function block

ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN

13.2.4 Signals
Table 473: ALMCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
Table continues on next page

634 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 474: ALMCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

13.2.5 Settings
Table 475: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

13.2.6 Operation principle

The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one
ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the
function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the ALARM
output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 635

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

Input 1
ALARM
1 200 ms
0
Input 16

ANSI13000191-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000191 V1 EN

Figure 238: Group alarm logic

13.2.7 Technical data

Table 476: Number of ALMCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5

13.3 Logic for group warning WRNCALH

13.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

13.3.2 Functionality
The group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

636 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.3.3 Function block

WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN

13.3.4 Signals
Table 477: WRNCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 637

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

Table 478: WRNCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

13.3.5 Settings
Table 479: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

13.3.6 Operation principle

The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1
WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order
to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the
function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.

INPUT1
WARNING
1 200 ms
0
INPUT16

ANSI13000192-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000192 V1 EN

13.3.7 Technical data

Table 480: Number of WRNCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5

638 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.4 Logic for group indication INDCALH

13.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

13.4.2 Functionality
The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication signals
to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

13.4.3 Function block

INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN

13.4.4 Signals
Table 481: INDCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 639

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 482: INDCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

13.4.5 Settings
Table 483: INDCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

13.4.6 Operation principle

The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1
IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from the function
block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND
output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.

640 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

INPUT1
IND
1 200 ms
0
INPUT16

ANSI13000193-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000193 V1 EN

13.4.7 Technical data

Table 484: Number of INDCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -

13.5 Basic configurable logic blocks

The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of signals
(have no suffix QT at the end of their function name). A number of logic blocks and timers
are always available as basic for the user to adapt the configuration to the specific
application needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their
features.

These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the same
number of instances.

• AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from
the input to the output.

• INVERTER function block that inverts one input signal to the output.

• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.

• OR function block. Each block has up to six inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 641

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state
it had before the power interruption. RESET input has priority.

• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state
it had before the power interruption. The SET input has priority.

• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input
signal. The timer has a settable time delay.

• XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

13.5.1 AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

13.5.1.1 Function block

AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN

Figure 239: AND function block

642 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.5.1.2 Signals
Table 485: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 486: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

13.5.1.3 Technical data

Table 487: Number of AND instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 108 60 160

13.5.2 Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should be
able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

13.5.2.1 Function block

GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
IEC04000410 V2 EN

Figure 240: GATE function block

13.5.2.2 Signals
Table 488: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 643

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

Table 489: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate

13.5.2.3 Settings
Table 490: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

13.5.2.4 Technical data

Table 491: Number of GATE instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 34 10 20

13.5.3 Inverter function block INV

13.5.3.1 Function block

INV
INPUT OUT

IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
IEC04000404 V2 EN

Figure 241: INV function block

13.5.3.2 Signals
Table 492: INV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input

Table 493: INV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output

644 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.5.3.3 Technical data

Table 494: Number of INV instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 114 114 240

13.5.4 Loop delay function block LLD

The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output signal one
execution cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.

13.5.4.1 Function block

LLD
INPUT OUT

IEC15000144.vsd
IEC15000144 V1 EN

Figure 242: LLD function block

13.5.4.2 Signals
Table 495: LLD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 496: LLD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

13.5.4.3 Technical data

Table 497: Number of LLD instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 645

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.5.5 OR function block OR

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

13.5.5.1 Function block

OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN

Figure 243: OR function block

13.5.5.2 Signals
Table 498: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate

Table 499: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

13.5.5.3 Technical data

Table 500: Number of OR instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 204 108 160

646 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.5.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting the operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length. When the
input is 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then it returns
to 0.

13.5.6.1 Function block

PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC04000407-3-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V3 EN

Figure 244: PULSETIMER function block

13.5.6.2 Signals
Table 501: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer

Table 502: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer

13.5.6.3 Settings
Table 503: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function

13.5.6.4 Technical data

Table 504: Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 647

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.5.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function
block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power
interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption.
For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
Table 505: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block
RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

13.5.7.1 Function block

RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 245: RSMEMORY function block

13.5.7.2 Signals
Table 506: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 507: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

648 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.5.7.3 Settings
Table 508: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Disabled - - Enabled Operating mode of the memory function
Enabled

13.5.7.4 Technical data

Table 509: Number of RSMEMORY instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20

13.5.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that
can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power
interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption.
The input SET has priority.
Table 510: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

13.5.8.1 Function block

SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN

Figure 246: SRMEMORY function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 649

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.5.8.2 Signals
Table 511: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 512: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

13.5.8.3 Settings
Table 513: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Disabled - - Enabled Operating mode of the memory function
Enabled

13.5.8.4 Technical data

Table 514: Number of SRMEMORY instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20

13.5.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay of the
input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an
Operation setting Enabled and Disabled that controls the operation of the timer.

650 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

t
IEC08000289-2-en.vsd

IEC08000289 V2 EN

Figure 247: TIMERSET status diagram

13.5.9.1 Function block

TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
IEC04000411 V2 EN

Figure 248: TIMERSET function block

13.5.9.2 Signals
Table 515: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer

Table 516: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pickup delay
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, dropout delay

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 651

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.5.9.3 Settings
Table 517: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

13.5.9.4 Technical data

Table 518: Number of TIMERSET instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 39 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

13.5.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
Table 519: Truth table for XOR function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

13.5.10.1 Function block

XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
IEC04000409 V2 EN

Figure 249: XOR function block

652 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.5.10.2 Signals
Table 520: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate

Table 521: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

13.5.10.3 Technical data

Table 522: Number of XOR instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20

13.6 Extension logic package

When extra configurable logic blocks are required, an additional package can be ordered.
Table 523: Number of instances in the extension logic package
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 40 40 100
GATE - - 49
INV 40 40 100
LLD - - 49
OR 40 40 100
PULSETIMER 5 5 49
SLGAPC 10 10 54
SRMEMORY - - 110
TIMERSET - - 49
VSGAPC 10 10 110
XOR - - 49

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 653

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.7 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

13.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

13.7.2 Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be
used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function
blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating
point, string types of signals are available.

One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.

13.7.3 Function block

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN

Figure 250: FXDSIGN function block

13.7.4 Signals
Table 524: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
Table continues on next page

654 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Name Type Description

REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

13.7.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control
IED Manager (PCM600).

13.7.6 Operation principle

There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

13.8 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

13.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary

(logical) signals into an integer.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 655

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.8.2 Function block

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN

Figure 251: B16I function block

13.8.3 Signals
Table 525: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

656 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Table 526: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

13.8.4 Monitored data

Table 527: B16I Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

13.8.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

13.8.6 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to
16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according
to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where
1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output
OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an
integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT
on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 657

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16)
are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to
an integer by the B16I function block.

13.8.7 Technical data

Table 528: Number of B16I instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8

13.9 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation BTIGAPC

13.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logic node representation

658 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.9.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function BTIGAPC is
used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will
freeze the output at the last value.

BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator position
input (PSTO).

13.9.3 Function block

BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN

Figure 252: BTIGAPC function block

13.9.4 Signals
Table 529: BTIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 659

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

Name Type Default Description

IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 530: BTIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

13.9.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

13.9.6 Monitored data

Table 531: BTIGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

13.9.7 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to
an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This
follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the
activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the
inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the
output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a
station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.

660 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT
on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16)
are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to
an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

13.9.8 Technical data

Table 532: Number of BTIGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 661

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.10 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16

13.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

13.10.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into a set
of 16 binary (logical) signals.

13.10.3 Function block

IB16
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

ANSI06000501-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000501 V1 EN

Figure 253: IB16 function block

13.10.4 Signals
Table 533: IB16 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

662 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Table 534: IB16 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

13.10.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

13.10.6 Operation principle

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance
with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2
has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx
is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.

This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 663

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a value
between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs
OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer
on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below. When an
OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving the
integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at
the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT
on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where x = 1
to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by
the IB16 function block.

664 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.10.7 Technical data

Table 535: Number of IB16 instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 6 4 8

13.11 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC

13.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation

13.11.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is used
to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function
to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.

ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for the
operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the corresponding
signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block. The input BLOCK will
freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new integer values to be received
and converted to binary coded outputs.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 665

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.11.3 Function block

ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC14000012-1-en.vsd
IEC14000012 V1 EN

Figure 254: ITBGAPC function block

13.11.4 Signals
Table 536: ITBGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 537: ITBGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
Table continues on next page

666 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

13.11.5 Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.

13.11.6 Operation principle

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and
received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1 on
each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16) remains 0. The
boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values of each of the outputs
OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these OUTx (1≤x≤4)
is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0
for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance
with the Table 538. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae: OUTx = 2x-1
The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be equal to the
integer value received over IEC61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via
IEC61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated
outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The values represented by the different OUTx are
according to Table 538. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 538: Outputs and their values when activated
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 667

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16) are
active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the
ITBGAPC function block.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number
that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO
is in position “Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”, then no changes are
applied to the outputs.

13.11.7 Technical data

Table 539: Number of ITBGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8

668 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.12 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

13.12.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

13.12.2 Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed
time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 255.

BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain

q-1

a
OVERFLOW
AND
a>b
999 999 s b

a
WARNING
AND
a>b
tWarning b

a
ALARM
AND
a>b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-2-en.vsd

IEC13000290 V2 EN

Figure 255: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC

• Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

• Supervision of overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds
• Retain the integration value
• Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• Report of the integrated time

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 669

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.12.3 Function block

TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME

IEC14000014-1-en.vsd
IEC14000014 V1 EN

Figure 256: TEIGAPC function block

13.12.4 Signals
Table 540: TEIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed
time, when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time

Table 541: TEIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the warning
limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the alarm
limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the overflow
limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds

13.12.5 Settings
Table 542: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

670 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.12.6 Operation principle

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides

• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been
high
• blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
• retaining of the integrated value

Figure 257 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time
Integration“ covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
“Transgression Supervision Plus Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-3-en.vsd

IEC12000195 V3 EN

Figure 257: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities

• integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high
• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)
• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
• integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation value for
the integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 671

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

• unconditionally on the input IN value

• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow, tAlarm
and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there is
no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending on
the level of the defined values for the parameters.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs freeze if
an overflow occurs.

13.12.6.1 Operation accuracy

The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

• function cycle time
• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses
may lead to reduced accuracy.

13.12.6.2 Memory storage

The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

672 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.12.7 Technical data

Table 543: TEIGAPC Technical data
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms
whichever is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms
whichever is greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms
whichever is greater

Table 544: Number of TEIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4

13.13 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP

13.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>

13.13.2 Functionality
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used
for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

13.13.3 Function block

INTCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

IEC15000052-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000052 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 673

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.13.4 Signals
Table 545: INTCOMP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT INTEGER 0 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF INTEGER 0 Reference value to be compared with input value

Table 546: INTCOMP Output signals

Name Type Description
INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value

13.13.5 Settings
Table 547: INTCOMP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed comparison
Absolute
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either input or
Input REF setting
SetValue -2000000000 - - 1 100 Set value for reference
2000000000

13.13.6 Operation principle

The comparison can be done in two ways,

• Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

• Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue.

The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second
input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as SetValue then the reference value for
comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).

The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and it
depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and
reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is
selected as Signed then the comparison is done without any conversion.

674 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

The function has three state outputs high, low and equal to condition. It will check the
following condition and give corresponding outputs.

• If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH will set
• If the input is below the reference value then INLOW will set
• If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL will set

EnaAbs
INPUT ABS T a
F INHIGH
a>b
b

a INEQUAL
a=b
b
RefSource

REF ABS T
T
SetValue
F a INLOW
F a<b
b
IEC15000129-2-en.vsdx

IEC15000129 V2 EN

Figure 258: Function logic diagram for INTCOMP

13.13.7 Technical data

Table 548: Number of INTCOMP instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INTCOMP 4 4 4

13.14 Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP

13.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 675

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

13.14.2 Functionality
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used
for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

13.14.3 Function block

REALCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

IEC15000053-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000053 V1 EN

13.14.4 Signals
Table 549: REALCOMP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT REAL 0.000 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF REAL 0.000 Reference value to be compared with input value

Table 550: REALCOMP Output signals

Name Type Description
INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value

13.14.5 Settings
Table 551: REALCOMP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed comparison
Absolute
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either input or
Input REF setting
SetValue -999.999 - 999.999 - 0.001 0.001 Set value for reference
Table continues on next page

676 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetValPrefix milli - - unit Multiplication factor for SetValue
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
EqualBandHigh 0.10 - 10.00 % 0.01 0.50 Equal band high limit in % of reference value
EqualBandLow 0.10 - 10.00 % 0.01 0.50 Equal band low limit in % of reference value

13.14.6 Operation principle

The comparison can be done in two ways,

1. Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

2. Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue

The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second
input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as SetValue then the reference value for
comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).

Generally the inputs to the function are in SI units, but when the comparison is to be done
with respect to set level, then the user can set a value in any unit out of Milli to Giga range
in setting SetValue. The unit can be separately set with setting RefPrefix. Internally the
function handles the reference value for comparator as SetValue*RefPrefix.

Additionally the comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values
and it depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and
reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is
selected as Signed then the comparison is done without any conversion.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 677

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Logic

EnaAbs
INPUT
ABS T
F
High
Comparator
EqualBandHigh INHIGH

RefSource XOR INEQUAL

REF ABS T
T Low
F
SetValue F comparator
INLOW
RefPrefix

EqualBandLow

IEC15000130-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000130 V1 EN

Figure 259: Logic diagram for REALCOMP

This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow to provide margins
from reference value for equal to condition. When the INPUT value is within high and low
band, output INEQUAL will get set.

If the INPUT is above the equal high level margin then output INHIGH will set. Similarly
if the INPUT is below the equal low level margin then output INLOW will set. In order to
avoid oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit, hysteresis
has been provided

INEQUAL Reset / INHIGH Set INEQUAL Set / INHIGH Reset

EqualBandHigh

Internal
Equal Band REF or SetValue Hysteresis for
equal band

EqualBandLow

INEQUAL Reset / INLOW Set INEQUAL Set / INLOW Reset

IEC15000261-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000261 V1 EN

Figure 260: Operation principle of REALCOMP

678 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 13
Logic

When EnaAbs is set as absolute comparison and SetValue is set less than
0.2% of the set unit then INLOW output will never pickups. During the
above mentioned condition, due to marginal value for avoiding
oscillations of function outputs, the INLOW output will never set.

13.14.7 Technical data

REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level
and the maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ.
Table 552: REALCOMP Technical data
Function Accuracy
Operate value, ±0.5% of set value
EqualBandHigh
and EqualBandLow
Reset value, > 0.1% of set RefPrefix
EqualBandHigh
Reset value, < 0.1% of set RefPrefix
EqualBandLow

Table 553: Number of REALCOMP instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
REALCOMP 4 4 4

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 679

Technical manual
680
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Section 14 Monitoring

14.1 Measurements

14.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 681

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.1.2 Functionality
Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for
efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the
system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (CTs
and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the
IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement
chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for
distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low
limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is,
the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of
noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when
change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since
the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based
on periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
• I: phase current magnitude
• F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

682 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The
measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities
or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected
settings.

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,

(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

• V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

14.1.3 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and
the logic configuration made in PCM600.

CVMMXN
I3P* S
V3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
V
V_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
ANSI10000016-1-en.vsd

ANSI10000016 V1 EN

Figure 261: CVMMXN function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 683

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

CMMXU
I3P* I_A
IA_RANGE
IA_ANGL
I_B
IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL
I_C
IC_RANGE
IC_ANGL

ANSI05000699-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000699 V2 EN

Figure 262: CMMXU function block

VMMXU
V3P* V_AB
VAB_RANG
VAB_ANGL
V_BC
VBC_RANG
VBC_ANGL
V_CA
VCA_RANG
VCA_ANGL

ANSI05000701-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000701 V2 EN

Figure 263: VMMXU function block

CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
IEC05000703 V2 EN

Figure 264: CMSQI function block

VMSQI
V3P* 3V0
3V0RANG
3V0ANGL
V1
V1RANG
V1ANGL
V2
V2RANG
V2ANGL

ANSI05000704-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000704 V2 EN

Figure 265: VMSQI function block

684 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

VNMMXU
V3P* V_A
VA_RANGE
VA_ANGL
V_B
VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL
V_C
VC_RANGE
VC_ANGL

ANSI09000850-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000850 V1 EN

Figure 266: VNMMXU function block

14.1.4 Signals
Table 554: CVMMXN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 555: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
V REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
V_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 685

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 556: CMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL

Table 557: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
IA REAL Phase A current magnitude of reported value
IA_RANGE INTEGER Phase A current magnitude range
IA_ANGL REAL Phase A current magnitude angle
IB REAL Phase B current magnitude of reported value
IB_RANGE INTEGER Phase B current magnitude range
IB_ANGL REAL Phase B current magnitude angle
IC REAL Phase C current magnitude of reported value
IC_RANGE INTEGER Phase C current magnitude range
IC_ANGL REAL Phase C current magnitude angle

Table 558: VMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 2
SIGNAL

Table 559: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
VAB REAL VAB Reported magnitude value
VAB_RANG INTEGER VAB Magnitude range
VAB_ANGL REAL VAB Angle, magnitude of reported value
VBC REAL VBC Reported magnitude value
VBC_RANG INTEGER VBC Magnitude range
VBC_ANGL REAL VBC Angle, magnitude of reported value
VCA REAL VCA Reported magnitude value
VCA_RANG INTEGER VCA Magnitude range
VCA_ANGL REAL VCA Angle, magnitude of reported value

686 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Table 560: CMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 3
SIGNAL

Table 561: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Magnitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Magnitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL I2 Magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Magnitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 562: VMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 4
SIGNAL

Table 563: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3V0 REAL 3V0 Reported magnitude value
3V0RANG INTEGER 3V0 Magnitude range
3V0ANGL REAL 3V0 Magnitude angle
V1 REAL V1 Reported magnitude value
V1RANG INTEGER V1 Magnitude range
V1ANGL REAL V1 Magnitude angle
V2 REAL V2 Reported magnitude value
V2RANG INTEGER V2 Magnitude range
V2ANGL REAL V2 Magnitude angle

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 687

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 564: VNMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 565: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
VA REAL VA Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VA_RANGE INTEGER VAAmplitude range
VA_ANGL REAL VA Angle, magnitude of reported value
VB REAL VB Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VB_RANGE INTEGER VB Amplitude range
VB_ANGL REAL VB Angle, magnitude of reported value
VC REAL VC Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VC_RANGE INTEGER VC Amplitude range
VC_ANGL REAL V_C Angle, magnitude of reported value

14.1.5 Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available in
the first setting group.

The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:

• VBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised
object.
• IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised
object.
• SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.

688 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Table 566: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VMin 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase
VMax 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
VRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 689

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Mode A, B, C - - A, B, C Selection of measured current and voltage
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
PowMagFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Magnitude factor to scale power calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift between
measured I & V
k 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I

Table 567: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all
limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all
limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all
limits)
Table continues on next page

690 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all
limits)
VDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
VLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
VLowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
VLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all
limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all
limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all
limits)
VGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %VB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
VMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of
Vn
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 691

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of
Vn
VMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%
of Vn
IMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of
In
IMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%
of In
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

Table 568: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IA_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
Enabled
IA_Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IA_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
IA_AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
IB_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
IB_Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IB_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IB_AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
IC_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
IC_Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IC_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IC_AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s

692 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Table 569: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IA_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IA_HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IA_HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of
In
IA_LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IA_LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%
of In
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IA_Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In
IA_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
IB_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IB_HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IB_HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IB_LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IB_LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IB_Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IB_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
IC_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IC_HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IC_HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IC_LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IC_LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IC_Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IC_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 693

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 570: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VAB_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
Enabled
VAB_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
VAB_Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
VAB_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
VAB_AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VBC_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VB_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
VBC_Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
VBC_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VBC_AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VCA_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VC_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
VCA_Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
VCA_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VCA_AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s

Table 571: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VAB_HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VAB_HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
VAB_LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
VAB_LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
VMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%
of Vn
Table continues on next page

694 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VAB_Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in in % of VBase
VAB_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
VBC_HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VBC_HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
VBC_LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
VBC_LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
VBC_Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase
VBC_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
VCA_HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VCA_HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
VCA_LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
VCA_LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
VCA_Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase
VCA_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits

Table 572: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
Enabled
3I0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3I0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 695

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

3I0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
I1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
I1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
I2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 573: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
3I0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
Table continues on next page

696 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
I1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
I1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
I2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value

Table 574: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3V0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
3V0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3V0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase
3V0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
3V0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
3V0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
3V0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
Enabled
3V0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
3V0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3V0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3V0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 697

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

V1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
V1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
V1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase
V1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
V1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
V1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
V2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
V2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
V2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase
V2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
V2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
V2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
V2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
V2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
V2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at 5%
of Vr
UAmpPreComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at
30% of Vr
UAmpPreComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at
100% of Vr

Table 575: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3V0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3V0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
3V0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
Table continues on next page

698 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

3V0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
V1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
V1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
V1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
V1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
V1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
V1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
V1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
V1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
V2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
V2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
V2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
V2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

Table 576: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VA_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
Enabled
VA_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
VA_Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
VA_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
VA_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
VA_AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VB_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VB_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
VB_Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 699

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VB_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VB_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
VB_AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VC_DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
VC_ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
VC_Max 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
VC_RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VC_LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common
for all limits
VC_AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s

Table 577: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VA_HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VA_HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
VA_LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
VA_LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
VMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%
of Vn
VA_Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase
VB_HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VB_HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
VB_LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
VB_LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
VB_Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase
VC_HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VC_HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
VC_LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
VC_LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
VC_Min 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of VBase

700 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.1.6 Monitored data

Table 578: CVMMXN Monitored data
Name Type
S REAL
P REAL
Q REAL
PF REAL
V REAL
I REAL
F REAL
Values (Range) Unit Description
- MVA Apparent Power magnitude of
deadband value
- MW Active Power magnitude of
deadband value
- MVAr Reactive Power magnitude of
deadband value
- - Power Factor magnitude of
deadband value
- kV Calculated voltage magnitude
of deadband value
- A Calculated current magnitude
of deadband value
- Hz System frequency magnitude
of deadband value

Table 579: CMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IA REAL - A Phase A current magnitude of
reported value
IA_ANGL REAL - deg Phase A current magnitude
angle
IB REAL - A Phase B current magnitude of
reported value
IB_ANGL REAL - deg Phase B current magnitude
angle
IC REAL - A Phase C current magnitude of
reported value
IC_ANGL REAL - deg Phase C current magnitude
angle

Table 580: VMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VAB REAL - kV VAB Reported magnitude
value
VAB_ANGL REAL - deg VAB Angle, magnitude of
reported value
VBC REAL - kV VBC Reported magnitude
value
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 701

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

VBC_ANGL REAL - deg VBC Angle, magnitude of
reported value
VCA REAL - kV VCA Reported magnitude
value
VCA_ANGL REAL - deg VCA Angle, magnitude of
reported value

Table 581: CMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0IMAG REAL - - 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGIM REAL - - 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I1IMAG REAL - - I1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1 REAL - A I1magnitude of reported value
I1ANGIM REAL - - I1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I2IMAG REAL - - I2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2 REAL - A I2 Magnitude of reported value
I2ANGIM REAL - - I2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

Table 582: VMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0IMAG REAL - - 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3V0 REAL - kV 3V0 Reported magnitude
value
3U0ANGIM REAL - - 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3V0ANGL REAL - deg 3V0 Magnitude angle
Table continues on next page

702 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

U1IMAG REAL - - U1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V1 REAL - kV V1 Reported magnitude value
U1ANGIM REAL - - U1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V1ANGL REAL - deg V1 Magnitude angle
U2IMAG REAL - - U2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V2 REAL - kV V2 Reported magnitude value
U2ANGIM REAL - - U2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V2ANGL REAL - deg V2 Magnitude angle

Table 583: VNMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VA REAL - kV VA Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VA_ANGL REAL - deg VA Angle, magnitude of
reported value
VB REAL - kV VB Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VB_ANGL REAL - deg VB Angle, magnitude of
reported value
VC REAL - kV VC Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VC_ANGL REAL - deg V_C Angle, magnitude of
reported value

14.1.7 Operation principle

14.1.7.1 Measurement supervision

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and
built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 703

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference.

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise
in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting
(XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB, VBC,
VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the measurement
values within CVMMXN.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function block by
means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 267. The monitoring has two
different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-
high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim)
or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 267.

704 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

IEC05000657-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000657 V2 EN

Figure 267: Presentation of operating limits

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-
high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be
connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement
supervision as binary signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 267.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the
value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic
reporting modes are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Magnitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 705

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000500 V2 EN

Figure 268: Periodic reporting

Magnitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is
larger than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the measuring
channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a
minimum necessary. Figure 269 shows an example with the magnitude dead-band
supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are
evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

706 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1

IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000529 V2 EN

Figure 269: Magnitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around
it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by
the ±ΔY set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 270, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 270 serves as a basic value for further measurement.
A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is
multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral
values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is
reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values
Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 707

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000530 V2 EN

Figure 270: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

14.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN

Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and
calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available
VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting,
which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function.
Available options are summarized in the following table:

708 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
1 A, B, C Used when three
S = VA × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C* (
V = VA + VB + VC )/ 3 phase-to-ground
voltages are
I =( I )/3
EQUATION1561 V1 EN
+ IB + IC available
A

EQUATION1562 V1 EN

2 Arone Used when three

S = VAB × I A - VBC × I C
* *
(
V = VAB + VBC / 2 ) two phase-to-
phase voltages

I =( I )
are available
(Equation 70)
EQUATION1563 V1 EN

A
+ IC / 2
EQUATION1564 V1 EN (Equation 71)
3 PosSeq Used when only
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq
*
V = 3 × VPosSeq symmetrical three
phase power shall
(Equation 72) be measured
EQUATION1565 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
EQUATION1566 V1 EN (Equation 73)

( )
4 AB Used when only
S = VAB × I A - I B
* *
V = VAB VAB phase-to-
phase voltage is
EQUATION1567 V1 EN (Equation 74) (
I = IA + IB / 2 ) available

EQUATION1568 V1 EN (Equation 75)

( )
5 BC Used when only
S = VBC × I B - I C
* *
V = VBC VBC phase-to-
phase voltage is
EQUATION1569 V1 EN (Equation 76) (
I = I B + IC / 2 ) available

EQUATION1570 V1 EN (Equation 77)

( )
6 CA Used when only
S = VCA × I C - I A
* *
V = VCA VCA phase-to-
phase voltage is
EQUATION1571 V1 EN (Equation 78) (
I = IC + I A / 2 ) available

EQUATION1572 V1 EN (Equation 79)

7 A Used when only
S = 3 × VA × I A
*
V = 3 × VA VA phase-to-
ground voltage is
(Equation 80) available
EQUATION1573 V1 EN
I = IA
EQUATION1574 V1 EN (Equation 81)
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 709

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
8 B Used when only
S = 3 × VB × I B
*
V = 3 × VB VB phase-to-
ground voltage is
(Equation 82) available
I = IB
EQUATION1575 V1 EN

EQUATION1576 V1 EN (Equation 83)

9 C Used when only
S = 3 × VC × I C
*
V = 3 × VC VC phase-to-
ground voltage is
(Equation 84) available
I = IC
EQUATION1577 V1 EN

EQUATION1578 V1 EN (Equation 85)

* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement
function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9
it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are
calculated in accordance with the following formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN (Equation 86)

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN (Equation 87)

S = S = P2 + Q2
EQUATION1405 V1 EN (Equation 88)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN (Equation 89)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are
provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors.
Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage
phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the
voltage phasor.

710 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at
5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above
100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 271.

Magnitude
% of In compensation

+10
IMagComp5 Measured
IMagComp30 current

IMagComp100
5 30 100 % of In
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

+10

IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN

Figure 271: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I and
power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 711

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive

formula:

X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN (Equation 90)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k
is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be
determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitudeIGenZeroDb level for current
and voltage measurement VGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage
measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (P, Q and S)
and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision
functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these values the zero clamping will
influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping
within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply
the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (setting
parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex constant
has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for example,
around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration it is
necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.

712 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Directionality
If CT grounding parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the
following figure 272.

Busbar

52
IED

P Q

Protected
Object
ANSI05000373_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000373 V2 EN

Figure 272: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they
flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when
they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the
power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually
opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be
easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such
setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the
protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from
the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.

14.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase

current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can
be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs
and IEC 61850. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100%

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 713

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in
between, see figure 271.

Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

14.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration
tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to
class 0.5 calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(Vxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section
"Measurement supervision".

14.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage

(VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG,
are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals.
Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding
output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs
(voltage and current, magnitude and angle). Each magnitude output has a corresponding
supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4,
see section "Measurement supervision".

14.1.8 Technical data

Table 584: CVMMXN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fn ±2.0 mHz

Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of V at V≤ 50 V

±0.2% of V at V> 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x In ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x In< I < 0.2 x In
± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x In< I < 0.5 x In
±0.2% of I at 0.5 x In< I < 4.0 x In

Table continues on next page

714 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Active power, P (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sn at S ≤0.5 x Sn
(0.1-4.0) x In ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sn

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x In
cos φ< 0.7
Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sn at S ≤0.5 x Sn
(0.1-4.0) x In ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sn

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x In
cos φ> 0.7
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sn at S ≤0.5 x Sn
(0.1-4.0) x In ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sn

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x In

Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x In

(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x In

Table 585: CMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × In ±0.3% of In at I ≤ 0.5 × In
±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × In

Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × In ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × In < I ≤ 0.5 ×
In
±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × In < I ≤ 4.0 ×
In

Table 586: VMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of V at V ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5° at V ≤ 50 V
±0.2° at V > 50 V

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 715

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 587: CMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × In ±0.3% of In at I ≤ 0.5 × In
Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × In

Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × In ±0.3% of In at I ≤ 0.5 × In

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × In

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × In ±0.3% of In at I ≤ 0.5 × In

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × In

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × In ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × In < I ≤ 0.5 ×

In
±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × In < I ≤ 4.0 ×
In

Table 588: VMSQItechnical data

Function
Voltage positive sequence, V1
Voltage zero sequence, 3V0
Voltage negative sequence, V2
Phase angle
Range or value Accuracy
(10 to 300) V ±0.5% of V at V ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of V at V > 50 V
(10 to 300) V ±0.5% of V at V ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of V at V > 50 V
(10 to 300) V ±0.5% of V at V ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of V at V > 50 V
(10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at V ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at V > 50 V

Table 589: VNMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of V at V ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle (5 to 175) V ±0.5° at V ≤ 50 V
±0.2° at V > 50 V

14.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63)

14.2.1 Functionality
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input signals
to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received information.

716 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.2.2 Function block

SSIMG (63)
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

ANSI09000129-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000129 V1 EN

Figure 273: SSIMG (63) function block

14.2.3 Signals

Table 590: SSIMG (63) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
PRESSURE REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout

Table 591: SSIMG (63) Output signals

Name Type Description
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 717

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.2.4 Settings
Table 592: SSIMG (63) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PressAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

14.2.5 Operation principle

Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63) is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure signal
PRESSURE, are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and PRES_LO.
When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_ALM is
high then the gas pressure alarm, PRES_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if pressure input
PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_LO is high or
temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit then the gas pressure
lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tPressureAlarm or
tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than
these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm PRES_ALM or lockout PRES_LO
will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout.
The PRES_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input
RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting for relative and
absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the
BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

718 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal
is monitored to detect high temperature.

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature alarm
TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater than
TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tTempAlarm
or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above the settings for more
than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout
TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the
temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting
for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the
alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

14.2.6 Technical data

Table 593: SSIMG (63) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
lockout greater

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 719

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71)

14.3.1 Functionality
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as input
signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received
information.

14.3.2 Function block

SSIML (71)
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

ANSI09000128-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000128 V1 EN

Figure 274: SSIML (71) function block

14.3.3 Signals

Table 594: SSIML (71) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
LEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout

720 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Table 595: SSIML (71) Output signals

Name Type Description
LEVEL REAL Level service value
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
LVL_LO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

14.3.4 Settings
Table 596: SSIML (71) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

14.3.5 Operation principle

Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71) is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal LEVEL
are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO. When LEVEL is
less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is high, then the oil level
indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if oil level input LEVEL is less
than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_LO is high or temperature input TEMP
is above lockout level TempLOLimit, then the oil level indication lockout, LVL_LO will
be initiated.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 721

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the function need
not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or tLevelLockOut have
been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for more than these time delays, then
only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or lockout LVL_LO will be initiated. The
SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output
retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The
binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can
block both alarms and the lockout indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal
is monitored to detect high temperature.

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature alarm
TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater than
TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tTempAlarm
or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above the settings for more
than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout
TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the
temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting
for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking
the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

14.3.6 Technical data

Table 597: SSIML(71) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Table continues on next page

722 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
lockout greater

14.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

14.4.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

14.4.2 Functionality
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of the
breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations
reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential
to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel
time, number of operation cycles and estimate the accumulated energy during arcing
periods.

14.4.3 Function block

SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO
ANSI14000061-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000061 V1 EN

Figure 275: SSCBR function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 723

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.4.4 Signals
Table 598: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time

Table 599: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time
exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time
exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level

724 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.4.5 Settings
Table 600: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
PhSel Phase A - - Phase A Phase selection
Phase B
Phase C
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated fault
current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation selection
Trip Signal
CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for energy
calculation
AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter

Table 601: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 725

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary and
main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status of trip
output and start of main contact separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent integr
over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in hours

14.4.6 Monitored data

Table 602: SSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during
opening operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during
closing operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of
respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB has
been inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open travel
time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the CB
spring

14.4.7 Operation principle

The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The
subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are Enabled and Disabled.

The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in Figure
276. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

726 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT

OPENPOS

CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS

CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR

TRCMD

Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW

CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER

CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS

SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT

CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
IEC12000624-3-en.vsd

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 727

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

IEC12000624 V3 EN

Figure 276: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

14.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time

The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact travel
time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact travel time
measurement is described in Figure 277.

POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT

TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd

IEC12000615 V2 EN

Figure 277: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time

Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of
change of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the opening of
the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts. Similarly, the closing
travel time is measured between the opening of the POSOPEN and closing of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation factor has been added to consider the
time difference between auxiliary contact operation and the actual physical opening of the
breaker main contact.

728 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Main Contact

0
POSCLOSE

POSOPEN

t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4

tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

IEC12000616_1_en.vsd

IEC12000616 V1 EN

Figure 278: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the pickup of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the actual opening
time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting. The closing time is
calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured
closing time.

The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time (TTRVCL)
are given as service values.

The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input
RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrOpenAlm
setting, the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the measured closing travel
time is longer than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCLAL output is
activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by activating the
BLKALM input.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 729

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is,
whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is described in
Figure 279.

Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check

OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS

IEC12000613-3-en.vsd

IEC12000613 V3 EN

Figure 279: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting. If the
current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact position
indicator module as closed circuit breaker.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the
POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting AccStopCurr value.
The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input
is high. The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary contacts have the same value or
if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low and the POSOPEN input is high but the
current is above the setting AccStopCurr.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS and
INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.

14.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker

The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on the wear
and tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit
breaker reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the interrupted current. The
remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by
the manufacturer. The remaining life is decreased by at least one when the circuit breaker
is opened. The operation of the remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is described
in Figure 280.

730 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation

RSTCBWR

Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000620-3-en.vsd

IEC12000620 V3 EN

Figure 280: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker

Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the
RatedOperCurr setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one
operation. If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the
RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced by the
set OperNoRated divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the tripping current is between
these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is calculated based on the
maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer. The OperNoRated parameter sets
the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current. The OperNoFault
parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated fault current.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel
setting, the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLKALM.

The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from LHMI or by
activating the input RSTCBWR.

14.4.7.4 Accumulated energy

The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based on
current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The operation
is described in Figure 281.

The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil circuit
TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 731

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND

LRSTIPOW

IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM

IEC12000619-3-en.vsd

IEC12000619 V3 EN

Figure 281: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting the
AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends when the
RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.

The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to the time
the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts after the
auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the ContTrCorr setting has
passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction
time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.

Main Contact Main Contact

close close

open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1

0 0

Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts

ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd

IEC12000618 V1 EN

Figure 282: Significance of correction factor setting

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip output.
TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between the trip

732 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting
OperTimeDelay.

The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can be
reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.

Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set value
AlmAccCurrPwr.

IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.

The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input
BLKALM.

14.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles

The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-opening
sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after each closing-
opening sequence. The operation is described in Figure 283.

POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR

OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM

IEC12000617 V2 EN

Figure 283: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of the
auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit breaker
operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal parameter
and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or activating the input
RSTCBWR.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 733

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.

If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.

The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input is
activated.

14.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of the
circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set level. The
operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in Figure 284.

POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN

Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000614 V2 EN

Figure 284: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring

Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained
in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the
POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial number
of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit value
defined by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal MONALM can be
blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

734 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring charging
time. The operation is described in Figure 285.

SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT

Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000621 V2 EN

Figure 285: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge indication

Spring charging time measurement

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the pickup of circuit breaker spring charging time.
SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring charging time is
calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring charging indication is
described in Figure285.

The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The spring
charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input RSTSPCHT.

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the SpChAlmTime
setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.

It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary input.

14.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside
the arc chamber. The operation is described in Figure 286.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 735

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND 0 GPRESALM

BLKALM

PRESLO tDGasPresLO
AND 0 GPRESLO
ANSI12000622 V1 EN

Figure 286: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure indication

When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after a
time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be blocked by
activating the BLKALM input.

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high,
activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO
setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK
input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from the function
can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

14.4.8 Technical data

Table 603: SSCBR Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm level for open and close (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
travel time
Alarm level for number of (0 – 9999) -
operations
Independent time delay for spring (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
charging time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure lockout greater
CB Contact Travel Time, opening ±3 ms
and closing
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is
greater

736 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.5 Event function EVENT

14.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN

14.5.2 Functionality
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-
tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These
events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event
function (EVENT). The event function block is used for remote communication.

Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.

14.5.3 Function block

EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN

Figure 287: EVENT function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 737

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.5.4 Signals
Table 604: EVENT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
INPUT2 GROUP 0 Input 2
SIGNAL
INPUT3 GROUP 0 Input 3
SIGNAL
INPUT4 GROUP 0 Input 4
SIGNAL
INPUT5 GROUP 0 Input 5
SIGNAL
INPUT6 GROUP 0 Input 6
SIGNAL
INPUT7 GROUP 0 Input 7
SIGNAL
INPUT8 GROUP 0 Input 8
SIGNAL
INPUT9 GROUP 0 Input 9
SIGNAL
INPUT10 GROUP 0 Input 10
SIGNAL
INPUT11 GROUP 0 Input 11
SIGNAL
INPUT12 GROUP 0 Input 12
SIGNAL
INPUT13 GROUP 0 Input 13
SIGNAL
INPUT14 GROUP 0 Input 14
SIGNAL
INPUT15 GROUP 0 Input 15
SIGNAL
INPUT16 GROUP 0 Input 16
SIGNAL

738 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.5.5 Settings
Table 605: EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SPAChannelMask Disabled - - Disabled SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Disabled - - Disabled LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask3 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask4 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask5 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask6 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask7 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 7
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask8 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 8
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 739

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EventMask9 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 9
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask10 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 10
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask11 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 11
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask12 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 12
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask13 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask14 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask15 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask16 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 9
Table continues on next page

740 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MinRepIntVal10 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 16

14.5.6 Operation principle

The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state or
value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition,
for which event generation is enabled.

Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name
from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single
events, but are also intended for double indication events.

EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.

The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The
time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a
resolution corresponding to the execution cycle-time of the source application. The time-
tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1
ms.

The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms
by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended
to be used by the station level.

All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event
is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 741

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This can be
performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask respectively.
For each communication type these settings are available:

• Disabled
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is
possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.

To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the
event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented.
If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further
events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms
down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum
burst quota per input channel is 45 events per second.

14.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE

14.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B22RBDR - -

742 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.6.2 Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all
selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a, maximum
of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Sequential of events
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, initiating conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function

blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from
pickup of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format
as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies to
all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get
information about the recordings. The disturbance report files may be uploaded to
PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

14.6.3 Function block

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN

Figure 288: DRPRDRE function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 743

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10

IEC05000430-4-en.vsdx

IEC05000430 V4 EN

Figure 289: A1RADR function block example for A1RADR-A3RADR

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN

Figure 290: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN

Figure 291: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B22RBDR

744 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.6.4 Signals
Table 606: DRPRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

Table 607: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

A2RADR and A3RADR functions have the same input signal specifications as A1RADR
but with different numbering:

• A2RADR: GRPINPUT11 to GRPINPUT20 (group signal for inputs 11 to 20)

• A3RADR: GRPINPUT21 to GRPINPUT30 (group signal for inputs 21 to 30)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 745

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 608: A4RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

Table 609: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same input signal specifications as B1RBDR
but with different numbering:

746 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

• B2RBDR: INPUT17 to INPUT32 (binary channels 17 to 32)

• B3RBDR: INPUT33 to INPUT48 (binary channels 33 to 48)
• B4RBDR: INPUT49 to INPUT64 (binary channels 49 to 64)
• B5RBDR: INPUT65 to INPUT80 (binary channels 65 to 80)
• B6RBDR: INPUT81 to INPUT96 (binary channels 81 to 96)
• B7RBDR: INPUT97 to INPUT112 (binary channels 97 to 112)
• B8RBDR: INPUT113 to INPUT128 (binary channels 113 to 128)
• B9RBDR: INPUT129 to INPUT144 (binary channels 129 to 144)
• B10RBDR: INPUT145 to INPUT160 (binary channels 145 to 160)
• B11RBDR: INPUT161 to INPUT176 (binary channels 161 to 176)
• B12RBDR: INPUT177 to INPUT192 (binary channels 177 to 192)
• B13RBDR: INPUT193 to INPUT208 (binary channels 193 to 208)
• B14RBDR: INPUT209 to INPUT224 (binary channels 209 to 224)
• B15RBDR: INPUT225 to INPUT240 (binary channels 225 to 240)
• B16RBDR: INPUT241 to INPUT256 (binary channels 241 to 256)
• B17RBDR: INPUT257 to INPUT272 (binary channels 257 to 272)
• B18RBDR: INPUT273 to INPUT288 (binary channels 273 to 288)
• B19RBDR: INPUT289 to INPUT304 (binary channels 289 to 304)
• B20RBDR: INPUT305 to INPUT320 (binary channels 305 to 320)
• B21RBDR: INPUT321 to INPUT336 (binary channels 321 to 336)
• B22RBDR: INPUT337 to INPUT352 (binary channels 337 to 352)

14.6.5 Settings
Table 610: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Disabled - - Disabled Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
Enabled
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel
OpModeTest Disabled - - Disabled Operation mode during test mode
Enabled

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 747

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 611: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation02 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation03 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation04 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation05 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation06 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation07 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation08 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation09 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation10 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled

Table 612: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 1
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp01 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 1 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in % of
signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 2
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp02 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 2 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in % of
signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
Table continues on next page

748 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp03 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 3
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 3 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp03 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 3 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in % of
signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 4
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 4 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp04 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 4 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in % of
signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 5
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp05 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 5 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in % of
signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 6
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp06 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 6 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in % of
signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 7
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp07 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 7 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in % of
signal
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 749

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 8
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 8 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp08 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 8 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in % of
signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 9
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9 in % of
signal
OverTrigOp09 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 9 (on)
Enabled or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in % of
signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 10
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp10 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 10
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10 in % of
signal

A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as A1RADR
but with different numbering:

• A2RADR: Operation11 to Operation20

• A3RADR: Operation21 to Operation30
• A4RADR: Operation31 to Operation40

A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as
A1RADR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):

• A2RADR: 11 to 20 (NomValue11, nominal value for analog channel 11)

• A3RADR: 21 to 30 (NomValue21, nominal value for analog channel 21)
• A4RADR: 31 to 40 (NomValue31, nominal value for analog channel 31)

750 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Table 613: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED01 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR02 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED02 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR03 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED03 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR04 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED04 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR05 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED05 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR06 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED06 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR07 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED07 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR08 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED08 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 751

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR09 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED09 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR10 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED10 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR11 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED11 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR12 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED12 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR13 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED13 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR14 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED14 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR15 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED15 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
TrigDR16 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED16 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Table continues on next page

752 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 753

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)

Table 614: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
Table continues on next page

754 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 9
IndicationMa09 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for
Trig on 1 binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 755

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as B1RBDR
but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (SetLED17, set LED on HMI for binary channel 17)
• B3RBDR: 33 to 48 (SetLED33, set LED on HMI for binary channel 33)
• B4RBDR: 49 to 64 (SetLED49, set LED on HMI for binary channel 49)
• B5RBDR: 65 to 80 (SetLED65, set LED on HMI for binary channel 65)
• B6RBDR: 81 to 96 (SetLED81, set LED on HMI for binary channel 81)
• B7RBDR: 97 to 112 (SetLED97, set LED on HMI for binary channel 97)
• B8RBDR: 113 to 128 (SetLED113, set LED on HMI for binary channel 113)
• B9RBDR: 129 to 144 (SetLED129, set LED on HMI for binary channel 129)
• B10RBDR: 145 to 160 (SetLED145, set LED on HMI for binary channel 145)
• B11RBDR: 161 to 176 (SetLED161, set LED on HMI for binary channel 161)
• B12RBDR: 177 to 192 (SetLED177, set LED on HMI for binary channel 177)
• B13RBDR: 193 to 208 (SetLED193, set LED on HMI for binary channel 193)
• B14RBDR: 209 to 224 (SetLED209, set LED on HMI for binary channel 209)
• B15RBDR: 225 to 240 (SetLED225, set LED on HMI for binary channel 225)
• B16RBDR: 241 to 256 (SetLED241, set LED on HMI for binary channel 241)
• B17RBDR: 257 to 272 (SetLED257, set LED on HMI for binary channel 257)
• B18RBDR: 273 to 288 (SetLED273, set LED on HMI for binary channel 273)
• B19RBDR: 289 to 304 (SetLED289, set LED on HMI for binary channel 289)
• B20RBDR: 305 to 320 (SetLED305, set LED on HMI for binary channel 305)
• B21RBDR: 321 to 336 (SetLED321, set LED on HMI for binary channel 321)
• B22RBDR: 337 to 352 (SetLED337, set LED on HMI for binary channel 337)

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as
B1RBDR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (IndicationMa17, indication mask for binary channel 17)
• B3RBDR: 33 to 48 (IndicationMa33, indication mask for binary channel 33)
• B4RBDR: 49 to 64 (IndicationMa49, indication mask for binary channel 49)
• B5RBDR: 65 to 80 (IndicationMa65, indication mask for binary channel 65)
• B6RBDR: 81 to 96 (IndicationMa81, indication mask for binary channel 81)
• B7RBDR: 97 to 112 (IndicationMa97, indication mask for binary channel 97)
• B8RBDR: 113 to 128 (IndicationMa113, indication mask for binary channel 113)
• B9RBDR: 129 to 144 (IndicationMa129, indication mask for binary channel 129)
• B10RBDR: 145 to 160 (IndicationMa145, indication mask for binary channel 145)
• B11RBDR: 161 to 176 (IndicationMa161, indication mask for binary channel 161)
• B12RBDR: 177 to 192 (IndicationMa177, indication mask for binary channel 177)
• B13RBDR: 193 to 208 (IndicationMa193, indication mask for binary channel 193)
• B14RBDR: 209 to 224 (IndicationMa209, indication mask for binary channel 209)
• B15RBDR: 225 to 240 (IndicationMa225, indication mask for binary channel 225)
• B16RBDR: 241 to 256 (IndicationMa241, indication mask for binary channel 241)
• B17RBDR: 257 to 272 (IndicationMa257, indication mask for binary channel 257)

756 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

• B18RBDR: 273 to 288 (IndicationMa273, indication mask for binary channel 273)
• B19RBDR: 289 to 304 (IndicationMa289, indication mask for binary channel 289)
• B20RBDR: 305 to 320 (IndicationMa305, indication mask for binary channel 305)
• B21RBDR: 321 to 336 (IndicationMa321, indication mask for binary channel 321)
• B22RBDR: 337 to 352 (IndicationMa337, indication mask for binary channel 337)

14.6.6 Monitored data

Table 615: DRPRDRE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 757

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
Table continues on next page

758 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 759

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

760 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.6.7 Operation principle

Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

• Sequential of events (SOE)

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Trip value recorder(TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)

Figure 292 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events (SOE), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder
(TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR).
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and
BxRBDR.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 761

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

AxRADR Disturbance Report

DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec

BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals
Sequential of
events
Event recorder

Indications

ANSI09000337-2-en.vsd

ANSI09000337 V2 EN

Figure 292: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each
with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time,
and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each
report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance Event list

Indications
information values recordings recording (SOE)

en05000161_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000161 V1 EN

Figure 293: Disturbance report structure

762 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when

the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The total
recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency,
number of analog and binary channels and recording time. Figure 294 shows the number
of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical configuration, that is, in a
60 Hz system it is possible to record 80 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds.
The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event
recorder (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).

Number of recordings
100
3.4s

80 3.4s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6.3s
6.3s

6.3s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250 300 350 400 s

en05000488_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000488 V1 EN

Figure 294: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings
to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might
cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 763

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values
are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use
a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850)
client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus
(Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged).

Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600.

Sequential of events (SOE)

The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest
data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM600.

Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and
during the fault.

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the
fault.

Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable
time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance
recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and
events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which

criterion stops the current disturbance recording

764 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN

Figure 295: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the trip time of
the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid
trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated
triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not
reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording
and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting
TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external
analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data communication module
(LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM).
The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as
function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents
and so on).

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 765

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2_A AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External analog
^GRP2_B AI2 INPUT2
signals
^GRP2_C AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2_N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analog signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

ANSI10000029-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000029 V1 EN

Figure 296: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration)
available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block.
The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz).
Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific
function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance
recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available.

If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case
of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application
Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where
only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information
available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-
output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding
information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block.
Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers

766 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

even if operation is set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as
trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input
channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals
Up to 352 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals
can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected
to be recorded when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 352 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation =
Operation—>TrigDR =Enabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED
on the local HMI (SetLED = Enabled).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as
triggers. The indications are also selected from these 352 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask = Show/Hide.

Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of events,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there
is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of
choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 767

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual for
procedure.

Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the
disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and
UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the
absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above
the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with
a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is
separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The trip time for this initiation is typically in the
range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under
certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for
instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig =

Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will pickup
and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will not
pickup until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig
occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new
complete recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

768 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.6.8 Technical data

Table 616: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 766
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip 30 -
Value recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a 96 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the Event 150 -
recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Sequence of events
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) at -
recording time and maximum number of 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

14.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

14.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

14.7.2 Functionality
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA
master to poll signals from various other functions.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 769

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.7.3 Function block

BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
^INPUT1 OUTPUT2
^INPUT2 OUTPUT3
^INPUT3 OUTPUT4
^INPUT4 OUTPUT5
^INPUT5 OUTPUT6
^INPUT6 OUTPUT7
^INPUT7 OUTPUT8
^INPUT8 OUTPUT9
^INPUT9 OUTPUT10
^INPUT10 OUTPUT11
^INPUT11 OUTPUT12
^INPUT12 OUTPUT13
^INPUT13 OUTPUT14
^INPUT14 OUTPUT15
^INPUT15 OUTPUT16
^INPUT16

IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN

Figure 297: BINSTATREP function block

14.7.4 Signals
Table 617: BINSTATREP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16

770 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Table 618: BINSTATREP Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16

14.7.5 Settings
Table 619: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function

14.7.6 Operation principle

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16 outputs.
The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA
communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal
remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 771

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN

Figure 298: BINSTATREP logical diagram

14.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

14.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

14.8.2 Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and
VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI)
and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are provided with
measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four
settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value
expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable translating the integer
output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit,
below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high limit. The output signals can
be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

772 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.8.3 Function block

RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
IEC05000346 V2 EN

Figure 299: RANGE_XP function block

14.8.4 Signals
Table 620: RANGE_XP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

Table 621: RANGE_XP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

14.8.5 Operation principle

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to
table 622.
Table 622: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised below low-low between low‐ between low between high- above high-high
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 773

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT

14.9.1 Identification

14.9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

14.9.2 Functionality
The 12 Up limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four independent
limits where the number of positive and/or negative sides on the input signal are counted
against the setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the counted
value reaches that limit.

Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

14.9.3 Operation principle

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative sides on the
binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the
accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit
outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the
reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash memory and
will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

14.9.3.1 Design

Figure 300 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

774 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

BLOCK

INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue

Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check

CounterLimit1...4

Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN

Figure 300: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three possibilities
after reaching the maximum counted value are:

• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 301.

Overflow indication

Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...

Counted value ... Max value -1 ® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN

Figure 301: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 775

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial
value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input and
all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition remains
until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are applied.

The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not
counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be
initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial states
until the release of the block input.

14.9.3.2 Reporting

The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.

Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for
example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement on
the local HMI graphical display.

14.9.4 Function block

L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE

IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN

Figure 302: L4UFCNT function block

14.9.5 Signals
Table 623: L4UFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

776 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Table 624: L4UFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value
settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit1
LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit2
LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit3
LIMIT4 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

14.9.6 Settings
Table 625: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or negative
Negative edge sides
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed
Rollover Pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the function

14.9.7 Monitored data

Table 626: L4UFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 777

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.9.8 Technical data

Table 627: L4UFCNTtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

14.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC

14.10.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -

14.10.2 Functionality
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed
time when a given binary signal has been high, see also figure 303.

BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Accumulation ACC_HOUR
ADDTIME with Retain
ACC_DAY
tAddToTime

q-1

OVERFLOW
a
&
a>b
99 999.9 h b

WARNING
a
&
a>b
tWarning b

ALARM
a
&
a>b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC15000321-1-en.vsd

IEC15000321 V1 EN

Figure 303: TEILGAPC logics

The main features of TEILGAPC are:

778 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 hours)

• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the resolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart
• Possibilities for blocking and reset
• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
• Reporting of the accumulated time

14.10.3 Function block

TEILGAPC
BLOCK ALARM
IN WARNING
ADDTIME OVERFLOW
RESET ACC_HOUR
ACC_DAY

IEC15000323.vsdx

IEC15000323 V1 EN

Figure 304: TEILGAPC function block

14.10.4 Signals
Table 628: TEILGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the accumulation and block the outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed
time, when its value is high
ADDTIME BOOLEAN 0 Add time to the accumulation
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated time

Table 629: TEILGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached alarm limit
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached warning
limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached overflow
limit
ACC_HOUR REAL Accumulated time in hours
ACC_DAY REAL Accumulated time in days

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 779

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

14.10.5 Settings
Table 630: TEILGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
tAlarm 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 90000.0 Time limit for alarm supervision
tWarning 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 50000.0 Time limit for warning supervision
tAddToTime 0.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 0.0 Time to add to the accumulation

14.10.6 Operation principle

Figure 305 describes the simplified logic of the function.

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
IN
ADDTIME ACC_DAY

tAddToTime

Loop Delay

IEC15000322.vsd

IEC15000322 V1 EN

Figure 305: TEILGAPC Simplified logic

TEILGAPC main functionalities

• IN: Accumulation of the elapsed time when input IN is high

780 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

• applicable to very long time accumulation (≤99999.9 hours)

• output ACC_HOUR presents accumulated value in hours and ACC_DAY
presents accumulated value in days
• accumulated value is retained in a non-volatile memory
• any retained value is used as initiation value for the integration following by a
restart
• RESET: Reset of the accumulated value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• independent of the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
• reset can be made by activation of input RESET or from LHMI or with
IEC61850 command
• ADDTIME: Manually add time to the currently accumulated time
• the amount of time to be added is defined by a setting tAddToTime
• time is added through activation of input ADDTIME or from LHMI or with
IEC61850 command
• BLOCK: Freeze the accumulation and block/reset the other outputs
• independent of the input IN value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACC_HOUR > 99 999.9 hours
• alarm if output ACC_HOUR > tAlarm
• warning if output ACC_HOUR > tWarning

The ACC_HOUR output represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY
output represents the accumulated time in days.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable time limit parameters in hours. They are also
independent of each other, that is, there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.

tAlarm, tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of 0.1 hours
(6 minutes).

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours. The outputs will reset and
the accumulated time will reset and pickup from zero if an overflow occurs.

14.10.6.1 Operation accuracy

The accuracy of TEILGAPC depends on essentially two factors

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 781

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Monitoring

• the pulse length

• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.

14.10.6.2 Memory storage

The value of the accumulated time is retained in a non-volatile memory,

• at every falling edge of the input IN

• at every even 12 hours, after a rising edge of the input IN
• after a manual addition of time

Consequently in case of a power failure, there is a risk of losing the difference in time
between actual time and last time stored in the non-volatile memory.

14.10.7 Technical data

Table 631: TEILGAPC Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Time limit for alarm supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tAlarm
Time limit for warning supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tWarning
Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%

782 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 15
Metering

Section 15 Metering

15.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

15.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN

15.1.2 Functionality
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by
the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special
Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to
achieve this functionality.

15.1.3 Function block

PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC14000043-1-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V3 EN

Figure 306: PCFCNT function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 783

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Metering

15.1.4 Signals
Table 632: PCFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Table 633: PCFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

15.1.5 Settings
Table 634: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse
ReportEvents counter
CountCriteria Disabled - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per
counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

784 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 15
Metering

15.1.6 Monitored data

Table 635: PCFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time and
status information

15.1.7 Operation principle

The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary
input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent
to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values
can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active
counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental

counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format,
that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The
counter is reset at initialization of the IED.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the
value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database.
PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and
activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an
Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time
corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.

The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that
is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 785

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Metering

Figure 307 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the inputs
and outputs.

SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O- NEW_VAL INPUT4
module BI_PULSE
”Reset counter” RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT

SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000744 V1 EN

Figure 307: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics, which
are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as
the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to
READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a
pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary
Input Module (BIM).

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event
function block.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the
pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED pickup, in the
first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last
integration cycle.

786 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 15
Metering

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are
two reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated
since last report.

Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and
status information.

15.1.8 Technical data

Table 636: PCFCNT technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of counter (1–3600) s -
value

15.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR

15.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

15.2.2 Functionality
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as
reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 787

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Metering

accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction. Energy
values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also
calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to remove noise
from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy calculations, integration
of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm signals for limit violation of energy
values and maximum power demand, can be found.

The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values by
integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and reactive
energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions. These energy values are
available as output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be
controlled by inputs (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset
to initial values with RSTACC input.

The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output channels. The
active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated for both forward and
reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD input.

15.2.3 Function block

ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD

IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN

Figure 308: ETPMMTR function block

788 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 15
Metering

15.2.4 Signals
Table 637: ETPMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop accumulating energy values
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

Table 638: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set
interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value in VArS
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in VArS
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set
interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse
direction

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 789

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Metering

15.2.5 Settings
Table 639: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
EnaAcc Disabled - - Disabled Activate the accumulation of energy values
Enabled
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated
energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated
energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

Table 640: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Disabled - - Enabled Enable of zero point clamping detection
Enabled function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active energy
100000000.000
Table continues on next page

790 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 15
Metering

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active energy
100000000.000
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy
100000000.000
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy
100000000.000

15.2.6 Monitored data

Table 641: ETPMMTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward active
energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse active
energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward reactive
energy value in VArS
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive
energy value in VArS
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for set
interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward reactive
power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power
demand value in reverse
direction

15.2.7 Operation principle

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the
integrated energy. Figure 309 shows the overall functionality of the energy calculation
and demand handling function ETPMMTR.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 791

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Metering

MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM

ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC

IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN

Figure 309: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by the
STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output ACCINPRG
is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 310 shows the logic of the ACCINPRG output.
ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and the EnaAcc setting is
enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the output ACCINPRG is low even
if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG is deactivated by activating the
STOPACC input.

STOPACC

FALSE
STARTACC T
³1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &

q-1

RSTACC

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000186-4-en.vsd

IEC13000186 V4 EN

Figure 310: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values and
also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be connected to
a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward as well as reverse
direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to initial accumulated energy
values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or with the input signal RSTACC.

792 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 15
Metering

Figure 311 shows the logic for integration of energy in active forward direction. Similarly,
the integration of energy in active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC

EAFPrestVal

ACCINPRG

P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
S T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F

&

q-1

EALim T

q-1
0.0 F

a
a>b
b

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000187-4-en.vsd
IEC13000187 V4 EN

Figure 311: Logic for integration of active forward energy

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy values
and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values are divided
by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of pulses can be
reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu. The pulse
on and off time duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure
312 shows the logic for pulse output generation for the integrated energy in the active
forward direction. Similarly, the pulse generation for integrated energy in the active
reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 793

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Metering

tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC

a Counter q-1
a>b CU
EALim b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1

0
÷ X
S R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty ÷ 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst

q-1

tEnergyOnPls

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000188-4-en.vsd

IEC13000188 V4 EN

Figure 312: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register
available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and
MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction. When the
RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The
energy alarm is activated once the periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim.
Figure 313 shows the logic of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and
Maximum forward active power demand value. Similarly, the maximum power
calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive
reverse is implemented.

P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b

EALim

RSTMAXD

0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F

q-1
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000189-4-en.vsd
IEC13000189 V4 EN

Figure 313: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

794 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 15
Metering

15.2.8 Technical data

15.2.8.1 Technical data

Table 642:
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVarh Input from MMXU. No extra error
Export/Import at steady load

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 795

Technical manual
796
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Section 16 Station communication

16.1 Communication protocols

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or

many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA)
bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Available communication protocols are:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
• LON communication protocol
• SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• DNP3.0 communication protocol

Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

16.2 Communication protocol diagnostics

Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Protocol diagnostics. The diagnostic values are:
Diagnostic value Description
Off Protocol is turned off
Error An error has occured, refer to event list for more
information
Warning Configuration inconsistency. Unable to locate data
point.
Ready Protocol is ready

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 797

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

IEC15000400-1-en.vsd

IEC15000400 V1 EN

Figure 314: Protocol diagnostic screen in LHMI

16.3 DNP3 protocol

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

16.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

16.4.1 Functionality
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is equipped with
single or double optical Ethernet rear ports (order dependent) for IEC 61850-8-1 station
bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1 communication is also possible from the
electrical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices
(IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies system
engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE and client-server

798 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

communication over MMS are supported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE)

uploading can be done over MMS or FTP.

16.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 643: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX (ST
Glass fibre (ST connector) EIA-485
connector)
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports are
connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IP-
address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

16.4.3 Settings
Table 644: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LANAB Port selection for GOOSE communication
LANAB
LANCD
PortSelMMS Front - - Any Port selection for MMS communication
LANAB
LANCD
Any
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemoteModControl Disabled - - Disabled Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowGOOSESimulation No - - No Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation
Yes
IEC61850BufTimEnable Disabled - - Enabled Enable BRC buf time behavior
Enabled

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 799

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.4.4 Technical data

Table 645: Communication protocols
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–19200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

16.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC

16.4.5.1 Functionality

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to send one
single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

16.4.5.2 Function block

SPGAPC
BLOCK
^IN

IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN

Figure 315: SPGAPC function block

800 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN

Figure 316: SP16GAPC function block

16.4.5.3 Signals
Table 646: SPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

Table 647: SP16GAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 801

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

16.4.5.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.4.5.5 Monitored data

Table 648: SPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL

Table 649: SP16GAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

802 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR gate for
SIGNAL input 1 to 16

16.4.5.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point
indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or
system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

16.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC

16.4.6.1 Functionality

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog
value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

16.4.6.2 Function block

MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC14000022-1-en.vsd
IEC14000022 V1 EN

Figure 317: MVGAPC function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 803

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.4.6.3 Signals
Table 650: MVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

Table 651: MVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

16.4.6.4 Settings
Table 652: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int
Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all
limits)

804 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.4.6.5 Monitored data

Table 653: MVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal

16.4.6.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range,
as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC
61850 clients in the substation.

16.4.7 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

Function description LHMI and ACT IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification identification device number
Parallel Redundancy PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH - -
Protocol Status
Duo driver PRP - - -
configuration

16.4.7.1 Functionality

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC
62439-3 Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) are available as options when
ordering IEDs. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses
both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.

16.4.7.2 Function block

PRPSTATUS
PRP-A LINK
PRP-A VALID
PRP-B LINK
PRP-B VALID

IEC09000757.vsd
IEC09000757 V2 EN

Figure 318: PRPSTATUS function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 805

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.4.7.3 Signals
Table 654: PRPSTATUS Output signals
Name Type Description
PRP-A LINK BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Status
PRP-A VALID BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Valid
PRP-B LINK BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Status
PRP-B VALID BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Valid

16.4.7.4 Settings
Table 655: PRP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PRPMode PRP-0 - - PRP-1 PRP Mode
PRP-1
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.7.10 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address

16.4.7.5 Monitored data

Table 656: PRPSTATUS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
AB Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - AB Link Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
CD Beh INTEGER 1=On - CD Link Beh
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
PRP Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - PRP Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On

806 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.4.7.6 Principle of operation

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted
on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is
compared with data package identity from the other channel, if they are the same, the last
package is discarded. The PRP communication is based on the so called duo driver
concept.

The PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last
10 s, the output PRP-A LINK and/or PRP-B LINK is set to 0 which indicates an error.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 807

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision

Duo

Data Data

Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2

Data Data

AB CD IED
Configuration OEM

PRP PRPSTATUS

=IEC09000758=3=en=Original.vsd

IEC09000758 V3 EN

Figure 319: Redundant station bus

808 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.5 LON communication protocol

16.5.1 Functionality
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace, from
the control center and also from other terminals.

LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3

from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These
networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes),
peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance,
multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of
applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference model
for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International Standardization
Organization (ISO).

In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section "".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.

16.5.2 Settings
Table 657: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation
Enabled

Table 658: ADE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation
Enabled
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 809

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.5.3 Operation principle

The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection
and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum
speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices
connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node
number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).

The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured
values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-
level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting
values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level
devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information
among the terminals without the need of a bus master.

The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables
and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as
measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit
messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read
and write messages to access device data.

The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include
direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master
implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can
communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control,
User’s manual and Technical description.

LON protocol

Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration.
All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network, is easily
accessible on a single tool program.

Activate LON Communication

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu/
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/ LON/HORZCOMM:1,
where Operation must be set to ON.

Add LON Device Types LNT

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the
device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT package
version 1p2 r04.

810 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

LON net address

To establish a LON connection, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net
address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON
Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.

Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and
protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process
data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and
disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages.

Events and indications

Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H)
with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed
in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal.

Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the IEDs.
The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. Table 659 shows the LON
addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. Addresses to the other inputs on
the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on
event block EVENT:17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.

For double indications, only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 can be
used for other types of events at the same event block.

Three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time (3 ms)
are available as basic in the IEDs.. The remaining event function blocks EVENT:4 to
EVENT:9 run with a loop time of 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 run with a loop time
of 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like
analogue data from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter
signals.

16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16, and 24 mA input

service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 – SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the
IEDs.

The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 659
Table 659: LON adresses for Event functions
Function block First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 811

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Function block First LON address in

function block
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328

Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Settings/IED settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction or via parameter setting tool
(PST) as follows:

• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event
function block.

Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a pickup or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the event function block.

Double indications

812 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event
reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the
event function block.

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible
to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8
inputs on an event function block.

• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1
• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2
• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the connected
function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function
block.

Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-
bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message
following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit
messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.

Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are
sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-
bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.

For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That is, the
function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24; the SPA
addresses are according to table 660.

Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 670 series
IEDs.Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs
The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to
communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the

information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for
the application by a multiple command receive function block (MULTICMDRCV). With
horizontal communication, the input BOUND on MULTICMDSND must be set to 1.
There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60 MULTICMDRCV function blocks available.
These function blocks are connected using the LON network tool (LNT). The tool also
defines the service and addressing on LON.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 813

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.

Configuration of LON network variables

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON
network tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network variables
concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.

LON

BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9

en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN

Figure 320: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV

function blocks in three IEDs

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT
window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.

814 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN

Figure 321: The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the drag-
and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the
Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they can
perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 815

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN

Figure 322: The download configuration window in LNT

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the Main
Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103 and DNP
communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables, and 2) ST/bayonet
for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a combination of both,
which is identified by a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre
to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling
and connection of fibre cables.
Table 660: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

816 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI24 1 I 5667 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI25 1 I 5691 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI26 1 I 5715 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 817

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI27 1 I 5739 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI28 1 I 5763 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI29 1 I 5787 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI30 1 I 5811 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block
command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI16 1 I 5467 SPA parameters for cancel
command
Table continues on next page

818 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
CANCEL SCSWI17 1 I 5491 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI18 1 I 5515 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI19 1 I 5537 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI20 1 I 5563 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI21 1 I 5586 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancel
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command before
SELClose+ILO=11, operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 819

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5224 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5248 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5273 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5297 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5561 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5584 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5609 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

820 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5729 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5753 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5777 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5801 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command before
ExcClose+ILO=11, operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5152 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5274 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5298 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5322 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5346 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5370 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 821

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5514 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5536 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5658 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5826 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5850 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR03 2 I 7884 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continues on next page

822 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR14 3 I 94 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR15 3 I 120 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI06 3 I 292 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI07 3 I 310 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI08 3 I 330 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 823

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXSWI09 3 I 348 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI10 3 I 359 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI18 3 I 511 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
Table continues on next page

824 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR03 2 I 7885 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR04 2 I 7903 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR05 2 I 7924 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR18 3 I 178 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 825

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI07 3 I 309 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI08 3 I 328 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI09 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI22 3 I 588 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI23 3 I 607 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI24 3 I 626 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

826 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR16 3 I 131 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR17 3 I 160 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR18 3 I 177 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI02 3 I 214 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 827

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI13 3 I 415 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI20 3 I 548 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI21 3 I 567 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI22 3 I 586 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI23 3 I 605 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI24 3 I 624 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI25 3 I 643 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

828 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI26 3 I 662 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI27 3 I 681 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI28 3 I 700 SPA parameter for update block
command

16.5.4 Technical data

Table 661: LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

16.6 SPA communication protocol

16.6.1 Functionality
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section "".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.

16.6.2 Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires the
following equipment:

• Optical fibres
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600. (Note! SPA cannot be
used with PCM600 2.6 or later).

When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a
front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for using
"FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 829

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.6.3 Settings
Table 662: SPA Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd

Table 663: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation
Enabled
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address

16.6.4 Operation principle

The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits
+ even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more information on
recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical reference manual.
Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to
talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and,
consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave.
Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (for example, for
event information) or only on demand.

The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to
the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a
broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and
receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an
IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.

830 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found in table
664.
Table 664: SPA addresses for the MIM function
Function block SPA address
MIM3-CH1 4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2 4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3 4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4 4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5 4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6 4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1 4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2 4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3 4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4 4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5 4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6 4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1 4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2 4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3 4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4 4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5 4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6 4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1 4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2 4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3 4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4 4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5 4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6 4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1 4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2 4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3 4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4 4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5 4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6 4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1 4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2 4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3 4-O-6607
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 831

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MIM8-CH4 4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5 4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6 4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1 4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2 4-O-6625
MIM9-CH3 4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4 4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5 4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6 4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1 4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2 4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3 4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4 4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5 4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6 4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1 4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2 4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3 4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4 4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5 4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6 4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1 4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2 4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3 4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4 4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5 4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6 4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1 4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2 4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3 4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4 4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5 4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6 4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1 4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2 4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3 4-O-6721
Table continues on next page

832 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MIM14-CH4 4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5 4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6 4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1 4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2 4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3 4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4 4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5 4-O-6744
MIM15-CH6 4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1 4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2 4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3 4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4 4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5 4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found in
table 665.
Table 665: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function
Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL
PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 833

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block
are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 – BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to section Related
documents in Product Guide.

Single command, 16 signals

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs
that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local
control functions, the local HMI can also be used.

Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks; SINGLECMD:1

to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.

The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function
block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other
outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the
SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.

The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to

SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 666.
Table 666: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2 4-S-4640 5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3 4-S-4641 5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4 4-S-4642 5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5 4-S-4643 5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6 4-S-4644 5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7 4-S-4645 5-O-517
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8 4-S-4646 5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9 4-S-4647 5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10 4-S-4648 5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11 4-S-4649 5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12 4-S-4650 5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14 4-S-4652 5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15 4-S-4653 5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16 4-S-4654 5-O-526
Table continues on next page

834 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1 4-S-4672 5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2 4-S-4673 5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4 4-S-4675 5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5 4-S-4676 5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6 4-S-4677 5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7 4-S-4678 5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8 4-S-4679 5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9 4-S-4680 5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10 4-S-4681 5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11 4-S-4682 5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12 4-S-4683 5-O-538
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13 4-S-4684 5-O-539
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558

Figure 323 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect
the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control
of a circuit breaker.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 835

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control.
The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1 are shown
in table 666.
SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ^OUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
#CD01-CMDOUT1 ^OUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT2 ^OUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT3 ^OUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT4 ^OUT5 AND PULSETIMER
^OUT6 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
#CD01-CMDOUT5
#CD01-CMDOUT6 ^OUT7 INPUT2 NOUT
#CD01-CMDOUT7 ^OUT8 INPUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT8 ^OUT9 INPUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT9 ^OUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT10 ^OUT11
#CD01-CMDOUT11 ^OUT12
#CD01-CMDOUT12 ^OUT13
#CD01-CMDOUT13 ^OUT14
#CD01-CMDOUT14 ^OUT15
#CD01-CMDOUT15 ^OUT16
#CD01-CMDOUT16

IEC05000717-3-en.vsd
SYNCH OK

IEC05000717 V3 EN

Figure 323: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a
circuit breaker

The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or
setable pulse length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main
Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via
Parameter Setting Tool (PST).

Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for example,
operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list.
The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All
the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input
channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according
to the set of event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and
SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which
contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is
read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED, Terminal
Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).

The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Main Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function or via
parameter Setting Tool (PST) as follows:

836 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 667.
Table 667: Status and event codes

Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
event ate 00 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -

EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..

These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked ≠ OFF.

Connection of signals as events

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as events
to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function
block according to figure 324.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 837

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ^INPUT1
PSTO ^INPUT2
VABRANG ^INPUT3
VBCRANG ^INPUT4
VCARANG ^INPUT5
3I0RANG ^INPUT6
3V0RANG ^INPUT7
FALSE ^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

ANSI07000065-1-en.vsd

ANSI07000065 V1 EN

Figure 324: Connection of protection signals for event handling

16.6.4.1 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the numeric
processing module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103, or DNP
communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables and 2) ST/bayonet
for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a combination of both,
which is identified by a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre
to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling
and connection of fibre cables.

For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the Application
Manual and Commissioning Manual respectively.

838 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.6.5 Technical data

Table 668: SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899

16.7 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

16.7.1 Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

16.7.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

16.7.2.1 Functionality

103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.

The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
are generated.

• 9 Will be generated if at least IA is connected. IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, P, Q, F are
optional but there can be no holes.
• 3.4 Will be generated if IN and VN are present.
• 3.3 Will be generated if IB, VAB, P and Q present.
• 3.2 Will be generated if IB, VAB, and P or Q missing.
• 3.1 Will be generated if IB is present and IA is missing (otherwise I_B in 9).

Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IA
3.4 = IN AND VN
3.3 = IB AND VAB AND P AND Q
3.2 = IB AND VAB AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IB AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 839

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.7.2.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -

16.7.2.3 Function block

I103MEAS
BLOCK
I_A
I_B
I_C
IN
V_A
V_B
V_C
V_AB
V_N
P
Q
F

ANSI10000287-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000287 V1 EN

Figure 325: I103MEAS function block

16.7.2.4 Signals
Table 669: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IA REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase A
IB REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase B
IC REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase C
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
VA REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase A
VB REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase B
VC REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase C
V_AB REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase AB
V_N REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage VN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

840 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.7.2.5 Settings
Table 670: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIa 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase A
MaxIb 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase B
MaxIc 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase C
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxVa 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase A
MaxVb 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase B
MaxVc 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase C
MaxVab 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase AB
MaxVn 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage VN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency

16.7.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

16.7.3.1 Functionality

I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor

direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the
private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.

16.7.3.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 841

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.7.3.3 Function block

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN

Figure 326: I103MEASUSR function block

16.7.3.4 Signals
Table 671: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

16.7.3.5 Settings
Table 672: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands (1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 1
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 2
10000000000.00
Table continues on next page

842 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 3
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 4
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 5
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 6
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 7
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 8
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 9
10000000000.00

16.7.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR

16.7.4.1 Functionality

I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.

16.7.4.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103

16.7.4.3 Function block

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD

IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN

Figure 327: I103AR function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 843

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.7.4.4 Signals
Table 673: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

16.7.4.5 Settings
Table 674: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

16.7.5 Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF

16.7.5.1 Functionality

I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.

16.7.5.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103

16.7.5.3 Function block

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN

Figure 328: I103EF function block

844 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.7.5.4 Signals
Table 675: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, ground-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, ground-fault reverse

16.7.5.5 Settings
Table 676: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

16.7.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

16.7.6.1 Functionality

I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents
the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal
SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

16.7.6.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status fault protection for IEC I103FLTPROT - -
60870-5-103

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 845

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.7.6.3 Function block

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_PU_A
65_PU_B
66_PU_C
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TR_A
70_TR_B
71_TR_C
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTR_A
87_MTR_B
88_MTR_C
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC

ANSI10000291-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000291 V1 EN

Figure 329: I103FLTPROT function block

16.7.6.4 Signals
Table 677: I103FLTPROT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_PU_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, pickup phase A
65_PU_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, pickup phase B
66_PU_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, pickup phase C
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase A
70_TR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase B
71_TR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase C
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
Table continues on next page

846 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase A
87_MTR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase B
88_MTR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase C
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, ground-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, ground-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-
CALCMADE)

16.7.6.5 Settings
Table 678: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

16.7.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

16.7.7.1 Functionality

I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This block
uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined for each
input signal.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 847

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.7.7.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -

16.7.7.3 Function block

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN

Figure 330: I103IED function block

16.7.7.4 Signals
Table 679: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

16.7.7.5 Settings
Table 680: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

848 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.7.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV

16.7.8.1 Functionality

I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in

monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information
number parameter is defined for each output signal.

16.7.8.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV - -

16.7.8.3 Function block

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN

Figure 331: I103SUPERV function block

16.7.8.4 Signals
Table 681: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of V
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 849

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.7.8.5 Settings
Table 682: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

16.7.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

16.7.9.1 Functionality

I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction.
Each instance is associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an
Information Number (INF). Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use relative
time and how to respond to a GI request.

The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all
connected inputs. See Settings for details.

16.7.9.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Status for user defined signals for IEC I103USRDEF - -
60870-5-103

16.7.9.3 Function block

IEC10000294 V2 EN

Figure 332: I103USRDEF function block

850 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.7.9.4 Signals
Table 683: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8
RT_START BOOLEAN 0 Trig to set base of relative time

RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from
which relative time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the
corresponding TypNo parameter is set to Relative. The maximum relative time and unit
conform to the IEC60870-5-103 standard.

16.7.9.5 Settings
Table 684: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1 (1-255)
InfNo2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2 (1-255)
InfNo3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3 (1-255)
InfNo4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4 (1-255)
InfNo5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5 (1-255)
InfNo6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6 (1-255)
InfNo7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7 (1-255)
InfNo8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)
TypNo1 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo2 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo3 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 851

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TypNo4 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo5 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo6 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo7 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo8 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
GiNo1 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo2 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo3 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo4 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo5 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo6 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo7 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo8 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included

The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block with
a FUN. Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.

The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a
userdefined INF. Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.

The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This adheres
to the TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged message) and 2
(time-tagged message with relative time) of the IEC60870-5-103 standard.

The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or not.
Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.

852 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.7.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

16.7.10.1 Functionality

I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output

signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.

16.7.10.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103

16.7.10.3 Function block

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN

Figure 333: I103CMD function block

16.7.10.4 Signals
Table 685: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 686: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16 disable/enable autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

16.7.10.5 Settings
Table 687: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 853

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.7.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

16.7.11.1 Functionality

I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All
outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter.

16.7.11.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -

16.7.11.3 Function block

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN

Figure 334: I103IEDCMD function block

16.7.11.4 Signals
Table 688: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 689: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

854 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.7.11.5 Settings
Table 690: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

16.7.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD

16.7.12.1 Functionality

I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals.
These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private
range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.

16.7.12.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103

16.7.12.3 Function block

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN

Figure 335: I103USRCMD function block

16.7.12.4 Signals
Table 691: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 855

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Table 692: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

16.7.12.5 Settings
Table 693: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)

16.7.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

16.7.13.1 Functionality

I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The
function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement
double-point command schemes.

856 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady

ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF
output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF
deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1. Steady mode is selected by
setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained, and a command in steady mode
will be reissued on restart.

16.7.13.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103

16.7.13.3 Function block

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN

Figure 336: I103GENCMD function block

16.7.13.4 Signals
Table 694: I103GENCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

Table 695: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 857

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.7.13.5 Settings
Table 696: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)

16.7.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD

16.7.14.1 Functionality

The I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and
interprets any state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC103 link.
Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests, to which it will reply with
a GI response message with the current state of each connected input.

The Position input is a double-indication signal and is GI enabled. This means that any
state transition, i.e. to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, will be reported spontaneously.
However, the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the "Report
Intermediate Position" to "Off". See the settings for RS485 and optical serial
communication for more information.

The Select input is a single-indication signal and is also GI enabled. State transitions to
ON and OFF are reported spontaneously.

When the Block input is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all monitoring
activity. Consequently, no transitions will be detected.

The I103POSCMD is also equipped with two additional commands; Operate and Cancel.
These are hidden in ACT and respond only to the base INF +2 and +3 respectively. See
table below. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103
identifier that associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent in
the IED.

16.7.14.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands with position and select I103POSCMD - -
for IEC 60870-5-103

858 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.7.14.3 Function block

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN

Figure 337: I103POSCMD function block

16.7.14.4 Signals
Table 697: I103POSCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

16.7.14.5 Settings
Table 698: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type
InfNo 160 - 236 - 4 160 Information number for command output

16.7.15 Operation principle

16.7.15.1 General

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer
rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary
station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master
must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

Introduction to IEC 60870–5–103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:

• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurements)
• Fault location

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 859

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5:
Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative
interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with the
communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.

The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the
protection and control IED.

Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be

considered to ensure correct time stamping.

Commands in control direction

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 699: I103IEDCMD supported indications
INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
24 Activate setting group 2
25 Activate setting group 3
26 Activate setting group 4

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

860 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 700: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications
INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103USRCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.

Number of instances: 4

Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter
FunctionType.

Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Table 701: I103USRCMD supported indications
INF Description
11) Output signal 01

2* Output signal 02
3* Output signal 03
4* Output signal 04
5* Output signal 05
6* Output signal 06
7* Output signal 07
8* Output signal 08

1) * User defined information number

Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.

Number of instances: 1

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 861

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each input signals.

Table 702: I103IED supported functions
INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
24 Setting group 2 active
25 Setting group 3 active
26 Setting group 4 active

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103USRDEF

Function indication block in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.

Number of instances: 20

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is required for each input signal.

Table 703: I103USRDEF Information number default values
INF Description GI TYP COT
11) Input signal 01 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

2* Input signal 02 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

3* Input signal 03 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
4* Input signal 04 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
5* Input signal 05 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
6* Input signal 06 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
7* Input signal 07 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
8* Input signal 08 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

1) * User defined information number

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

862 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Information number is defined for output signals.

Table 704: I103SUPERV supported functions
Info. no. Message Typ GI COT
32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision V 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9
38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9

Ground fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for ground fault in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 705: I103EF supported indications
INF Description
51 Ground fault forward
52 Ground fault reverse

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Pickup A Yes
65 Pickup B Yes
66 Pickup C Yes
67 Pickup IN Yes
84 General pickup Yes
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 863

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Info. no. Message Supported

69 Trip A Yes
70 Trip B Yes
71 Trip C Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, overcurrent and
ground fault protection functions.

FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Pickup A Yes
65 Pickup B Yes
66 Pickup C Yes
67 Pickup IN Yes
84 General pickup Yes
69 Trip A Yes
70 Trip B Yes
71 Trip C Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
Table continues on next page

864 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Info. no. Message Supported

85 Breaker failure Yes
86 Trip measuring system A Yes
87 Trip measuring system B Yes
88 Trip measuring system C Yes
89 Trip measuring system N Yes
90 Over current trip I> Yes
91 Over current trip I>> Yes
92 Ground fault trip IN> Yes
93 Ground fault trip IN>> Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 706: I103AR supported indications
INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked

Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.

Measurands in public range, I103MEAS

Number of instances: 1

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.

Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.

Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.

The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU (Application
Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as OVERFLOW. The
factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require that a rated value to use as

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 865

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as
maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate value to client, the use of a scale factor on
<rated> does not make much difference.

You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or

client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>

If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-max ::=
1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2

Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best
accuracy.
Table 707: I103MEAS supported indications
INF Description
148 I_A
144, 145, I_B
146, 148
148 I_C
147 IN, Neutral current
148 V_A
148 V_B
148 V_C
145, 146 V_A-V_B
147 UN, Neutral voltage
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency

Measurands in private range, I103MEASUSR

Number of instances: 3

Function type parameter for each block in private range.

Information number must be selected for measurands.

866 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Table 708: I103MEASUSR supported indications

INF FUN GI TYP COT Description
*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas3
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas4
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas5
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas6
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas7
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas8
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas9
with CL2

1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is defined
by semantics of connected source.

<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.

Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.

<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that is, only
Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted.

Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined
in the standard.

Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

• IA connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• IB connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• IC connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• VAE connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 867

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

• VBE connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• VCE connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range
64 to 95.

Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE
and an INFORMATION NUMBER.

Disturbance upload

All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be reported
to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the
master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be
reported to the master again.

When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances
will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever
something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when a disturbance is
deleted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded
or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.

Deviations from the standard

Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of
the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED
series.

This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.

ASDU23

In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status

of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:

• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test
mode.
• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than
pick-up

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is
always set (hard coded) to:

868 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the
standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. FAN
is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance.

ASDU26 / ASDU31

When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the protection
equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named
NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number in the power
system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same
NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF is just as FAN, equal to disturbance
number.

Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 No
number of loads No
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 869

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command No
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No

870 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.7.15.2 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST, bayonet) or
a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available depending on
type of fibre.

The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical
fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay special
attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres.
The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

16.7.16 Technical data

Table 709: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

16.8 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV

16.8.1 Functionality
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the
IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending apparatus
position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n control. GOOSE can
also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point and analog measured values
between IEDs.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 871

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.8.2 Function block

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC07000048.vsd

IEC07000048 V3 EN

Figure 338: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

872 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.8.3 Signals
Table 710: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 711: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 873

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

16.8.4 Settings
Table 712: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

874 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.9 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

16.9.1 Function block

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
DVALID1
^OUT2
DVALID2
^OUT3
DVALID3
^OUT4
DVALID4
^OUT5
DVALID5
^OUT6
DVALID6
^OUT7
DVALID7
^OUT8
DVALID8
^OUT9
DVALID9
^OUT10
DVALID10
^OUT11
DVALID11
^OUT12
DVALID12
^OUT13
DVALID13
^OUT14
DVALID14
^OUT15
DVALID15
^OUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC07000047.vsd
IEC07000047 V3 EN

Figure 339: GOOSEBINRCV function block

16.9.2 Signals
Table 713: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 714: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 875

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Name Type Description

DVALID2 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
DVALID3 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
DVALID4 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
DVALID5 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
DVALID6 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
DVALID7 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
DVALID8 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
DVALID9 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
DVALID10 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
DVALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
DVALID12 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
DVALID13 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
DVALID14 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
DVALID15 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
DVALID16 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

876 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.9.3 Settings
Table 715: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

16.10 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV

16.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

16.10.2 Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

16.10.3 Function block

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 340: GOOSEDPRCV function block

16.10.4 Signals
Table 716: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 877

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Table 717: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

16.10.5 Settings
Table 718: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

16.10.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

878 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.11 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

16.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

16.11.2 Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

16.11.3 Function block

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 341: GOOSEINTRCV function block

16.11.4 Signals
Table 719: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 720: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 879

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.11.5 Settings
Table 721: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

16.11.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the integer values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

16.12 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV

16.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

880 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.12.2 Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

16.12.3 Function block

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 342: GOOSEMVRCV function block

16.12.4 Signals
Table 722: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 723: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

16.12.5 Settings
Table 724: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

16.12.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 881

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the measured value.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

16.13 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV

16.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

16.13.2 Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

16.13.3 Function block

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 343: GOOSESPRCV function block

882 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.13.4 Signals
Table 725: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 726: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

16.13.5 Settings
Table 727: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

16.13.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 883

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

16.14 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

16.14.1 Functionality
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals
via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16 binary
inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block,
MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.

16.14.2 Design

16.14.2.1 General

The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two
modes: Steady or Pulse.

• 1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
• 2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with a
duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary
output. This means that no connected function block may have a cycle time that is
higher than the execution cycle time of the particular MULTICMDRCV instance.

884 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.14.3 Function block

MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID

IEC06000007-2-en.vsd
IEC06000007 V2 EN

Figure 344: MULTICMDRCV function block

MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN

Figure 345: MULTICMDSND function block

16.14.4 Signals
Table 728: MULTICMDRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 885

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

Table 729: MULTICMDSND Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 730: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
Table continues on next page

886 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid

Table 731: MULTICMDSND Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error

16.14.5 Settings
Table 732: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions of
input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions of
input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs

Table 733: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between transmission
of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between transmission of
output data

16.14.6 Operation principle

There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast (8
ms cycle time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16 binary
inputs, to which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected signals are sent
through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV, located on a
different IED.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 887

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Station communication

The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through the
command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60
instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are
slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision function, which
sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not receive any data within
the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.

LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).

16.15 Security events on protocols SECALARM

16.15.1 Security alarm SECALARM

16.15.1.1 Signals
Table 734: SECALARM Output signals
Name Type Description
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event

16.15.1.2 Settings
Table 735: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation On/Off
Enabled

16.16 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

16.16.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.

There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configured
with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog
(RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

888 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 16
Station communication

16.16.2 Settings
Table 736: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ExtLogSrv1Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 1 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv2Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 2 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv2Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 2 port number
ExtLogSrv2IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 2 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv3Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 3 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv3Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 3 port number
ExtLogSrv3IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 3 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv4Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 4 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv4Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 4 port number
ExtLogSrv4IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 4 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv5Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 5 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv5Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 5 port number
ExtLogSrv5IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 5 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv6Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 6 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv6Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 6 port number
ExtLogSrv6IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 6 IP-address
Address

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 889

Technical manual
890
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 17
Remote communication

Section 17 Remote communication

17.1 Binary signal transfer

17.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive - -
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm - -

17.1.2 Functionality
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values
with a maximum of 8 binary signals in the line differential protection IED, or for the
transmission of only binary signals (up to 192) in the other IEDs. The binary signals are
freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any purpose, for example, communication
scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs.

Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line Data
Communication Module (LCDM). The LDCMs then act as interfaces to a 64 kbit/s
communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.

The IED can be equipped with up to two short range LDCMs.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 891

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Remote communication

17.1.3 Function block

LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000043-2-en.vsd

IEC07000043 V2 EN

LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN

Figure 346: LDCMRecBinStat function blocks

LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN

Figure 347: LDCMRecBinStat function block

892 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 17
Remote communication

17.1.4 Signals
Table 737: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals
Name Type Description
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

Table 738: LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 893

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Remote communication

Table 739: LDCMRecBinStat3 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

17.1.5 Settings
Table 740: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High
HighPower
Table continues on next page

894 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 17
Remote communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal
is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error signal
is reset
InvertPolX21 Disabled - - Disabled Invert polarization for X21 communication
Enabled

Table 741: LDCMRecBinStat2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO,
GPS 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS synchroniation
Echo signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High
HighPower
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal
is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error signal
is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant
channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication use
echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data and
transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 895

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Remote communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Disabled - - Disabled Invert polarization for X21 communication
Enabled

Table 742: LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO,
GPS 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS synchroniation
Echo signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High
HighPower
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal
is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error signal
is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant
channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication use
echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data and
transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
Table continues on next page

896 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 17
Remote communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Disabled - - Disabled Invert polarization for X21 communication
Enabled

17.1.6 Monitored data

Table 743: LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication link
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

Table 744: LDCMRecBinStat2 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication link
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 897

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Remote communication

Table 745: LDCMRecBinStat3 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication link
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

17.1.7 Operation principle

The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It
is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60
Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one
telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic
Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).

Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag

8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

IEC01000134 V1 EN

Figure 348: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The
optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is
included in the data field.

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages
up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to
accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty
message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.

When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight

898 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 17
Remote communication

binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as
sampled values.

When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of
the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity
of 192 signals.

17.2 Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit

17.2.1 Function block

LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N

IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN

Figure 349: LDCMTransmit function block

The function blocks are not represented in the Application Configuration

tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is visible in ACT. The
signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool when a LDCM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool.

17.2.2 Signals
Table 746: LDCMTRN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to remote
end
CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to remote
end
CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to remote
end
CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N to
remote end
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 899

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Remote communication

Name Type Default Description

CT2L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to remote
end
CT2L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to remote
end
CT2L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to remote
end
CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N to
remote end

900 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Section 18 Basic IED functions

18.1 Authority check ATHCHCK

18.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -

18.1.2 Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing
the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of
the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:

• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management
tool.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 901

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

IEC12000202-2-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V2 EN

Figure 350: PCM600 user management tool

18.1.3 Operation principle

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of
the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 747.

Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when
writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.

The meaning of the legends used in the table:

• R= Read
• W= Write
• - = No access rights

902 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Table 747: Pre-defined user types

Access rights System Protection Design User
Guest Super User SPA Guest
Operator Engineer Engineer Administrator
Basic setting possibilities (change R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
setting group, control settings, limit
supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R
example protection settings)
Basic control possibilities (process R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities (process R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
control including interlock trigg)
Basic command handling (for example R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
clear LEDs, manual trigg)
Advanced command handling (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
example clear disturbance record)
Basic configuration possibilities (I/O- R R/W R R R R/W R/W
configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration possibilities R R/W R R R R/W R/W
(application configuration including
SMT, GDE and CMT)
File loading (database loading from - R/W - - - R/W R/W
XML-file)
File dumping (database dumping to - R/W - - - R/W R/W
XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file transfer) R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -
Database access for normal user R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
User administration (user management R R/W R R R R R/W
– FTP File Transfer)
User administration (user management - R/W - - - - -
– SPA File Transfer)

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there
are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.

If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be

created, deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server. In
that case, only the user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool. See
Cyber Security Deployment Guidelines manual.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 903

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be

able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the IED User Management..

Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user
defined!”

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/
Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED returns to
Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at
delivery.

If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded
into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts
to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will appear.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, the user can
change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows.
After choosing the right user name, the user must press the “E” key again. When it comes
to password, upon pressing the key, the following character will show up: “$”. After
all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the
key again.

If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization
screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected
setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the
Log on window opens again, until either the user makes it right or presses “Cancel”.

18.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED

The users, their roles and rights are created, deleted and edited only in the Central Account
Management server (SDM600). However, the user rights can be edited in the IED by using
the PCM600 user tool.

904 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 286 are created
in the IED, and when creating new users in the SDM600 server, the predefined roles from
Table 749 can be used.

At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the
LHMI and as Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central
Account Management is activated.

Table 748: Default users

User name User rights
SuperUser Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users are
defined
Guest Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other users
are defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out
disturbances with third party FTP-client.

Table 749: Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351-8

User roles Role explanation User rights
VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI
OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as perform
control actions
ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings for the
IED and also run commands and manage disturbances
INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED
SECADM Security Can change role assignments and security settings. Can
administrator deploy certificates.
SECAUD Security auditor Can view audit logs
RBACMNT RBAC Can change role assignment
management
ADMINISTRATOR Administrator Sum of all rights for SECADM, SECAUD and RBACMNT
rights

This User role is vendor specific and not

defined in IEC 62351–8

Changes in user management settings do not cause an IED reboot.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 905

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

The PCM600 tool caches the login credentials after successful login for 15
minutes. During that time no more login will be necessary.

The successfully activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in users or
remove all local created users from PCM600.

Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the central Account Management
server e.g. SDM600 The IED employs two strategies to ensure availability of the
authentication system even if there is a problem with the network or authentication server:
• A substation can be equipped with two redundant authentication servers operating in
a hot standby mode.
• If configured by the security administrator, the IED itself maintains a local replica in
the database with selected users. This database is periodically updated with data from
the server and used as fallback if none of the servers are reachable.

Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be users
that are not assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users which are
part of replication group configured in the IED.

This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator, which
means that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 for authorization and in
case of problems with the network users will not be able to log in to the IED.

If user replication has been disabled in a CAM-enabled IED and if

communication with SDM600 is lost, access to that IED will be denied
until communication is re-established.

All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using
secure communication. Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and distribute
certificates during the engineering process of the substation. These certificates ensure
mutual trust between IED and for example SDM600, FTP, PCM600 and other system.

906 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Table 750: Authority-related IED functions

Function Description
Authority status This function is an indication function block for user logon activity.
ATHSTAT User denied attempt to logon and user successful logon are reported.
Authority check To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
ATHCHCK accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:

• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
Authority This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
management maintenance menu logon time out.
AUTHMAN

For more information on the functions Authority Management (AUTHMAN), Authority

Status (ATHSTAT), and Authority Check (ATHCHCK) functions, refer to chapter
“Basic IED functions” in the Technical Manual.

18.2 Authority management AUTHMAN

18.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority management AUTHMAN - -

18.2.2 AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance
menu log on time out.

18.2.3 Settings
Table 751: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MaintMenuDisAuth Disable - - Enable In maintenance menu, disable authority
Enable selection is shown
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 907

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS

18.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -

18.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with
TLS.

The automatic negotiation mode acts on configured port number 21 and server features,
it tries to negotiate with explicit TLS via AUTH TLS. If the specified port is any other, it
tries to negotiate in a similar way.

Using FTP without TLS encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This mode
is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.

If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a

specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The
password of this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.

18.3.3 Settings
Table 752: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PortSelection None - - Any Port selection for communication
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit SSL

908 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

18.4 Authority status ATHSTAT

18.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -

18.4.2 Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.

User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

18.4.3 Function block

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN

Figure 351: ATHSTAT function block

18.4.4 Signals
Table 753: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized

Account Management enabled.

18.4.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 909

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.4.6 Operation principle

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and
the user authorization:
• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT)
function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.

18.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG

18.5.1 Functionality
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system
events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events
are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer
tool.

18.5.2 Function block

INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK

IEC09000787-2-en.vsdx

IEC09000787 V2 EN

Figure 352: INTERRSIG function block

910 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

18.5.3 Signals
Table 754: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
DISABLE BOOLEAN Application Disable

18.5.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

18.5.5 Operation principle

The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the
Event Viewer in PCM600.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI, the actual information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/
Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The
information from the self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in
PCM600.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 911

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

IEC15000414-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000414 V1 EN

Figure 353: IED general status in local HM

The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A maximum
of 40 internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.

GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN

Figure 354: Self-supervision event list in local HMI

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of an output relay with potential

free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This contact
is closed when the IED either does not have auxiliary power, or when one or more error
conditions are present in the IED (for example harware error).

Some output signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events via IEC61850 to the station level of the control
system. These signals can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output
relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the
Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the
INTERRSIG function block via two outputs TSYNCERR and RTCERR .

912 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

18.5.5.1 Internal signals

Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the internal
status of the IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These internal
signals , available on local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General,
can be divided into two groups.

• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 755.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see table 756.

Table 755: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
FAIL Internal Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the
Fail status following internal signals are active; LMDERROR,
WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR, or any of
the HW dependent signals
WARNING Internal Internal This signal will be active if one or more of the
Warning warning following internal signals are active; RTCERROR,
status IEC61850ERROR, TIMESYNCHERROR
RTCERROR Real Time Real time This signal will be active when there is a hardware
Clock clock error with the real time clock.
status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the time
Synchroniz synchronization is lost, or when the time system has
ation to make a time reset.
status
RTEERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed
Execution execution to do some actions with the application threads. The
Error actions can be loading of settings or parameters for
status components, changing of setting groups, loading or
unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 IEC61850 This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did
Error not succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850
status configuration, startup, for example
DNP3 DNP3 error DNP3 This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any
status configuration error during startup.
LMDERROR LON/Mip SLM301 LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an
Device unrecoverable error state.
Error
status
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 913

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
APPERROR Runtime Runtime App This signal will be active if one or more of the
Application Error application threads are not in the state that Runtime
Error Engine expects. The states can be CREATED,
status INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example
SETCHGD Settings Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
changed changed Internal Event list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD Setting Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
groups changed Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed.
changed

Table 756: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
PSM PSM-Error Power PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Supply
Module
Error
status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error
status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error
status
IOM IOM-Error In/Out IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error
status
MIM MIM-Error Millampere MIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Input n = slot number
Module
Error
status
SOM SOM-Error Static Out SOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error
status
NUM NUM-Error Numerical/ NUM30 Activated if the module has a hardware or
CPU software error.
Module
Error
status
ADM ADM-Error A/D ADM31 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module
Error
status
Table continues on next page

914 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
ADM ADM-Error A/D ADM32 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module
Error
status
OEM OEM-Error Optical OEM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Ethernet n = slot number
Module
Error
status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line LDCM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Differential n = slot number
Communic
ation
Module
Error
status
TRM TRM-Error Transform TRM40
er Module
Error
status
TRM TRM-Error Transform TRM41
er Module
Error
status

18.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the
two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be
informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

18.5.6 Technical data

Table 757: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 915

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.6 Time synchronization

18.6.1 Functionality
The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time for
the synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it
possible to compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station
automation system and in between sub-stations.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization

source.

18.6.2 Settings
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:
• System time
• Synchronization

The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight Saving
Time (DST) for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The
Synchronization group relates to selecting the coarse and fine synchronization sources. As
well as defining the synchronization master and accuracy levels specifically for
IEC61850-9-2.

All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under Main
menu/Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED Configuration/
Time.

916 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Table 758: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Disabled - - Disabled Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Disabled - - Disabled Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Disabled - - Disabled Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
HWSyncSrc Disabled - - Disabled Hardware time synchronization source
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
AppSynch NoSynch - - NoSynch Time synchronization mode for application
Synch
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified

Table 759: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 917

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Table 760: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

Table 761: DSTENABLE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DST Enable Disabled - - Enabled Enables or disables the use of Daylight Saving
Enabled Time

Table 762: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time
-23:30 starts
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

918 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Table 763: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time
-23:30 ends
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 919

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Table 764: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00

Table 765: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

920 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

18.6.3 Operation principle

18.6.3.1 General concepts

Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the
clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time
gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on software and hardware clocks that run independently from
each other. See figure 355

External
Synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronisation

Off
Comm- Protection
LON Events
Time- unication and control
SPA Regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting,
GPS see
SW-time
technical
SNTP
reference
DNP manual) Connected when GPS-time is
IRIG-B used for differential protection

PPS

Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
Off Time-
GPS Regulator HW-time
(fast or slow)
IRIG-B
PPS Diff.-
A/D Trans-
converter comm- ducers*
unication

*IEC 61850-9-2

IEC08000287-2-en.vsd
IEC08000287 V2 EN

Figure 355: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status signal is
changed in the protection system of a function based on the free running hardware clock,

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 921

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. The
hardware clock can thus run independently.

The echo mode of differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there is no
need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.

The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only when
GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The
two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two
modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The
automatic fast mode makes the synchronization time as short as possible during pickup or
at interruptions/disturbances in the GPS timing. The fast and slow settings are also
available on the local HMI.

The hardware and software clocks are not synchronized if a GPS clock is used.

Fast clock synchronization mode

At start-up and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signals, the deviation
between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A new
start-up is also required, for example, after maintenance of the auxiliary voltage system.

When the time difference is >16μs, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the clock
systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, with big time
adjustment steps in the beginning, and then smaller steps until a time deviation between
the GPS time and the differential time system of <16μs has been reached. The differential
function is then enabled and the synchronization remains in fast mode or switches to slow
mode depending on the setting.

Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is used. This prevents
the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16µs, emanating from the differential
protection requirement of correct timing.

Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A
function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

922 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 356: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization
decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with
different maximum errors. This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with
the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock based on this source. The maximum error
of a clock can be defined as:

• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

18.6.3.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock
has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock
that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time
in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will
be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS) gives
an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of the three following

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 923

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

conditions happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as

FineSynchSource:

• If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset
compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for
synchronization, which means, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at
the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages, a
spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also has
a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization
message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset is
more than the threshold, the clock jumps a whole number of seconds so the remaining
offset is less than 500ms. The remaining offset is then slowly adjusted with 1000 ppm
until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000ppm it takes 500 seconds to
remove an offset of 500 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only
an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

Rate accuracy
The Rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal is lost
(e.g. GPS lost). In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is
synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding
temperature is constant. It can take up to one hour after a cold start of the IED to reach to
a stable rate due to the normal warming-up procedure of the IED.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces have a time-out, and a configured interface must receive
time synchronization messages regularly in order not to give an error signal
(TSYNCERR) that is reported from the INTERRSIG function block. The time-out is such
that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message
is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

18.6.3.3 Synchronization alternatives

Four main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The

synchronization message is applied:

924 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

• via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date
and time
• as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
• via GPS
• via IRIG-B or PPS

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED
to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception
time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that
connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there
must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP
synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The
IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse time
synch source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The only reason
to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source. The combination
SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.

SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at
least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent.

• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that is,
year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

The SLM module is located on the Numeric processing module (NUM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built-in GPS clock modules receive and decode time information from the global
positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module
(GTM).

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 925

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated
from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized
from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both
positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as
a fine time synchronization signal.

The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The
electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.

If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and
if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse
generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse
generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED.

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only
the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last
flank.

Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.

Pulse data:

• Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

• Pulse length (b):
• Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
• Maximum pulse length is optional.
• Magnitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time (a) larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN

Figure 357: Binary minute pulses

926 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse
is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.

If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next
minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.

If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,
contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the
system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less than 59950 ms
between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be
accepted.

Binary synchronization example

An IED is configured to use only binary input for time synchronization, and a valid binary
input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate
time, and the minute pulse is then used to synchronize the IED. Minute pulse means that
each pulse occurs one minute after the previous pulse, so the first pulse is not used at all.
The second pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give
the IED a good time, and will reset the time so that the fourth pulse will occur on a minute
border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is
set properly via the HMI or if the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the
minute pulse is removed, for example, for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum
the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse is
automatically rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter.
The third pulse will set the time if the time offset is more than 500 ms or adjust the time
if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe
state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within
one minute.

Synchronization via IRIG-B module

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time
of the year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted
and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are numbers stating if and how
the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the
galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic
interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range of
0-7.

“00” means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. “12” means that a 1 kHz modulation is
used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 927

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information
of the year. If the x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year,
and year information has to be set via PCM600 or local HMI.

The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks,
as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with
IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-zone.

18.6.4 Technical data

Table 766: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse ± 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement ± 1.0 ms typically
values

18.7 Parameter setting groups

18.7.1 Functionality
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power
system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can be
applied to a variety of power system scenarios.

18.7.2 Function block

ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
GRP_CHGD

ANSI05000433-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000433 V2 EN

Figure 358: ActiveGroup function block

928 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

18.7.3 Signals
Table 767: ACTVGRP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 768: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is active
GRP_CHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed
REMSETEN BOOLEAN Settings over IEC 61850 enabled

18.7.4 Settings
Table 769: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6

18.7.5 Operation principle

Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 929

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

inputs changes the active setting group. Eight functional output signals are available for
configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group is always available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating
the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs
in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive
functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either
permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two
are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.

Every time a setting is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a pulse.
Activating or deactivating test mode is made by changing a parameter, consequently this
will also cause a pulse on the GRP_CHGD output.

The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.

The output REMSETEN indicates whether setting changes over IEC61850 are enabled or
not. Per default, this is not enabled, which results in REMSETEN being at a logical low
level. If setting changes via IEC61850 are enabled, then REMSETEN will be a logical high.
The setting changes over IEC61850 is enabled with the setting EnableSettings in the
IEC61850-8-1 configuration under Main menu/Configuration/Communication/
Station communication/IEC61850-8-1/IEC61850-8-1. Please refer to documentation
for IEC61850 for further details.

Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups
selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the
Parameter Setting Tool.

930 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1 ActiveGroup
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3
Æ ACTGRP3 GRP3
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4
IOx-Bly5
Æ ACTGRP5 GRP5
IOx-Bly6 ACTGRP6
Æ GRP6
GRP_CHGD

ANSI05000119-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000119 V2 EN

Figure 359: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group
that is active.

18.8 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK

18.8.1 Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block
inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 931

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.8.2 Function block

CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd

IEC09000946 V2 EN

Figure 360: CHNGLCK function block

18.8.3 Signals
Table 770: CHNGLCK Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

Table 771: CHNGLCK Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

18.8.4 Operation principle

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that
does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations

932 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

• Set system time

• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function
1 Activated
0 Deactivated

18.9 Test mode functionality TEST

18.9.1 Functionality
When entering IED test mode there is an option to block all functions. Active test mode
is indicated by a flashing yellow Pickup LED on the LHMI. After that, it is possible to
unblock arbitrarily selected functions from the LHMI to perform required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed (except for functions that have
their block input active), and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during
TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later restored, the IED will remain in
TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the
power was removed. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values
within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test
mode.

18.9.2 Function block

TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850

IEC14000072-1-en.vsd
IEC09000219 V2 EN

Figure 361: TESTMODE function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 933

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.9.3 Signals
Table 772: TESTMODE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode

Table 773: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test
blocked

18.9.4 Settings
Table 774: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IEDTestMode Disabled - - Disabled Activate IED Test mode
Enabled
EventDisable Disabled - - Disabled Event disable during test mode
Enabled
BlockAllFunc Disabled - - Enabled Block all functions when entering IED test
Enabled mode
CmdTestEd1 Disabled - - Disabled Require test bit in command at test mode (only
Enabled for IEC61850 Ed1)

18.9.5 Operation principle

Set the IED in test mode by

• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to Enabled in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.

934 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is
activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the
"Test mode: Enabled" state — input from configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or
setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow Pickup LED will flash and all functions can be
blocked depending on the configuration of the testmode component. Any function can be
unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling.

The functions will be blocked next time if the testmode component is configured to block
components upon puting the IED into testmode.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.

If the IED is restarted while set to IED testmode by a binary input all
functions will be temporarily unblocked during startup, which might
cause unwanted operations.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a
test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30)
or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
commissioning or maintenance test.

18.10 IED identifiers

18.10.1 Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in
the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 935

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.10.2 Settings
Table 775: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 3)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 4)

18.11 Product information

18.11.1 Functionality
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change) that
uniquely identifies the IED:

• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiersand underMain menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED identifiers

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g. during
repair and maintenance).

936 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

18.11.2 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

18.11.3 Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL670
• ProductDef
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0
• FirmwareVer
• Describes the firmware version.
• The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers
• Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production
numbers. For every release number there can be one or more firmware versions
depending on the small issues corrected in between releases.
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new hardware
added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is either
changed or enhanced in the product

• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 937

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.12 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI

18.12.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED
configuration.

18.12.2 Function block

SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10

IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
IEC05000434 V2 EN

Figure 362: SMBI function block

18.12.3 Signals
Table 776: SMBI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI2 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI3 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI4 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI8 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI9 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI10 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input

938 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Table 777: SMBI Output signals

Name Type Description
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10

18.12.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 362, receives its inputs
from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes them
available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and
outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user defined name. These names will
be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical
IO and SMBI function. The input/output user defined name will also appear on the
respective output/input signal.

18.13 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO

18.13.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED
configuration.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 939

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.13.2 Function block

SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10

IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
IEC05000439 V2 EN

Figure 363: SMBO function block

18.13.3 Signals
Table 778: SMBO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

18.13.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 363, receives logical
signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via
the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well
as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as
information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.

18.14 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI

940 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

18.14.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). See the
Application Manual for information about how milliamp (mA) inputs from external
transducers are physically connected to the MIM board inputs used in an IED. Via the
SMMI, the signals are brought into the IED configuration, for example, to the input for
ambient temperature compensation of the thermal overload function when there is a need
for ambient temperature compensation in the thermal function.

18.14.2 Function block

SMMI
^AI1 ^AI1
^AI2 ^AI2
^AI3 ^AI3
^AI4 ^AI4
^AI5 ^AI5
^AI6 ^AI6

IEC05000440.vsd
IEC05000440 V3 EN

Figure 364: SMMI function block

18.14.3 Signals
Table 779: SMMI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI2 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI3 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI4 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI5 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI6 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input

Table 780: SMMI Output signals

Name Type Description
AI1 REAL Analog milliampere input 1
AI2 REAL Analog milliampere input 2
AI3 REAL Analog milliampere input 3
AI4 REAL Analog milliampere input 4
AI5 REAL Analog milliampere input 5
AI6 REAL Analog milliampere input 6

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 941

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.14.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 364, receives its inputs from
the real (hardware) mA inputs (the MIM boards) via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and
makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to
AI6. The inputs, outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given user-defined names
which will be represented in SMT and ACT.

The outputs on SMMI can also be connected to the IEC61850 generic communication I/
O functions (MVGAPC) for further use of the mA signals elsewhere in a substation
system.

18.15 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

18.15.1 Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function block,
analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and calculates all
relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle, frequency, true
RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by
the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT (for example protection,
measurement or monitoring functions).

18.15.2 Function block

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1_A G1AI2
^GRP1_B G1AI3
^GRP1_C G1AI4
^GRP1_N G1N

ANSI14000027-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000027 V1 EN

Figure 365: SMAI1 function block

Figure 365 is an example of SMAI1:n in each of the three task time groups 1, 2 or 3 where:
• n=1–12 in task group 1
• n=13–24 in task group 2
• n=25–36 in task group 3

942 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 1, 3 or 8 ms respectively for the
three task time groups.
SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2_A G2AI2
^GRP2_B G2AI3
^GRP2_C G2AI4
^GRP2_N G2N

ANSI14000028-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000028 V1 EN

Figure 366: SMAI2 function block

Figure 366 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the three task time groups
1, 2 or 3 where:
• n=2 and m=12 in task group 1
• n=14 and m=24 in task group 2
• n=26 and m=36 in task group 3

The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 3, 8 or 1 ms respectively for the
three task time groups.

18.15.3 Signals
Table 781: SMAI1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1_A STRING - First analog input used for phase A or AB quantity
GRP1_B STRING - Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity
GRP1_C STRING - Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity
GRP1_N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

Table 782: SMAI1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal
DFT reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
G1AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 2
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 943

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Name Type Description

G1AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3
G1AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 4
G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

Table 783: SMAI2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2_A STRING - First analog input used for phase A or AB quantity
GRP2_B STRING - Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity
GRP2_C STRING - Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity
GRP2_N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

Table 784: SMAI2 Output signals

Name Type Description
G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1
G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2
G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3
G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

18.15.4 Settings

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency
DFT reference is then the reference.

944 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Table 785: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 786: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Disabled - - Disabled Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 945

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Table 787: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 788: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Disabled - - Disabled Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase

18.15.5 Operation principle

Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals
(three phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see figure 365
and figure 366. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog
signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. – 244
values in total). The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value zero.

System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and Frequency
settings in the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the REVROT input
to the SMAI function means that the phase rotation is changed relative to the set
PhaseRotation in PRIMVAL.

The output signal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the, in SMT, connected input to GRPx_A,
GRPxB, GRPxC and GRPx_N, x=1-12. AIN is always calculated residual sum from the

946 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase information containing all relevant
information about four connected inputs. Note that all other functions, with a few
exceptions, use this output in configuration. Note that the SMAI function will always
calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input GRPxN is not connected in SMT.
Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.

18.15.5.1 Frequency values

The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence
voltage, MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If the
positive sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the
frequency output value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the nominal
value. A signal is available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due to non-valid
frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of VBase/√3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B
and GRPx_C, where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the positive
sequence voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows:
A-B to GRPxA, B-C to GRPxB, C-A to GRPxC. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
N, all three inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be connected in order to
calculate the positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph,
the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and
GRPx_C to the same voltage input as shown in figure 367 to make SMAI calculate a
positive sequence voltage.

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P V3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
VAB BLOCK PICK UP
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEA G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1_A G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEB
G1N
^GRP1_B
PHASEC
^GRP1_C
NEUTRAL
^GRP1_N

ANSI10000060-1-en.vsdx

ANSI10000060 V1 EN

Figure 367: Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-ground voltage is available,
the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType
setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when setting
MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same
Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 947
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence

voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for
Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81), Underfrequency protection
(SAPTUF, 81) and Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81)
due to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence
voltage might be wrongly calculated.

18.16 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

18.16.1 Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three-
phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

18.16.2 Function block

3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^G1AI3P* AI2
^G2AI3P* AI3
AI4

IEC05000441-3-en.vsdx

IEC05000441 V3 EN

Figure 368: 3PHSUM function block

18.16.3 Signals
Table 789: 3PHSUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
BLKGR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 1
BLKGR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 2
Table continues on next page

948 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Name Type Default Description

REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI
SIGNAL

Table 790: 3PHSUM Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal
DFT reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI
blocks
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both SMAI
blocks
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both SMAI
blocks
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both SMAI
blocks

18.16.4 Settings

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Table 791: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 949

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Table 792: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

18.16.5 Operation principle

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix
for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset all the
outputs of the function to 0.

18.17 Global base values GBASVAL

18.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

18.17.2 Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for
all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for
current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base
values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point
for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out of
the twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.

18.17.3 Settings

950 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Table 793: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VBase 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Global base current
SBase 1.00 - 200000.00 MVA 0.05 2000.00 Global base apparent power

18.18 Primary system values PRIMVAL

18.18.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

18.18.2 Functionality
The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600
parameter setting tree.

18.18.3 Settings
Table 794: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=ABC - - Normal=ABC System phase rotation
Inverse=ACB

18.19 Denial of service DOS

18.19.1 Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The
communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of
the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 951

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

18.19.2 Function blocks

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN

Figure 369: DOSFRNT function block

DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000308-1-en.vsd
IEC13000308 V1 EN

Figure 370: DOSLANAB function block

DOSLANCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000309-1-en.vsd
IEC13000309 V1 EN

Figure 371: DOSLANCD function block

18.19.3 Signals
Table 795: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 796: DOSLANAB Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

952 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 18
Basic IED functions

Table 797: DOSLANCD Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

18.19.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

18.19.5 Monitored data

Table 798: DOSFRNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100

Table 799: DOSLANAB Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100

Table 800: DOSLANCD Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 953

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Basic IED functions

18.19.6 Operation principle

The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) measures
the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs
control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following
outputs:
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

954 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Section 19 IED hardware

19.1 Overview

19.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display

ANSI04000460 -2-en.psd
ANSI04000460 V2 EN

Figure 372: 1/1 19” case with local HMI display.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 955

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.1.2 Case from the rear side

Table 801: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X51
MIM and X52
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

956 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Table 802: Designations for 3/4 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to
MIM X101 and X102
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 957

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Table 803: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slots

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and
IOM or MIM X132
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or X312, X313, X322, X323
GTM
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

958 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A
19.2 Hardware modules
19.2.1 Overview
Table 804: Basic modules
Module
Power supply module (PSM)
Numerical module (NUM)
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
Transformer input module (TRM)
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Table 805: Application specific modules
Module
Binary input module (BIM)
Binary output module (BOM)
Binary I/O module (IOM)
Line data communication modules (LDCM), short
range, medium range ,long range,X21
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103
communication modules (SLM)
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
mA input module (MIM)
GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
Static output module (SOM)
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B)
Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI
Technical manual
Section 19
IED hardware
Description
Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies
auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
• An internal fail alarm output is available.
Module for overall application control. All information is
processed or passed through this module, such as
configuration, settings and communication.
The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button
keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a
PC to the IED.
Transformer module that galvanically separates the
internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12
analog inputs.
Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Description
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole
command outputs including supervision function
Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs
and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Modules used for digital communication to remote
terminal.
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 60870–5–103 communication
PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically
separated channels.
Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization.
Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over
output relays.
Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both
pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude
modulated signals and one is used for optical input type
ST for PPS time synchronization.
959
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.2 Numeric processing module (NUM)

19.2.2.1 Introduction

The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.

For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed
serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact
PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.

19.2.2.2 Functionality

The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU

module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact
PCI connectors and an euro connector.

The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots onto
which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.

To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal
PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI accesses
through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.

The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file
system.

The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the
real time clock.

No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.

960 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.2.2.3 Block diagram

Compact
Flash Logic

PMC
connector
PC-MIP

connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet

North
bridge

Backplane
PCI-PCI-

connector
bridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN

Figure 373: Numeric processing module block diagram

19.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)

19.2.3.1 Introduction

The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation
between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 961

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.3.2 Design

There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input
voltage ranges see table 806. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated
DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery
system.

Connection diagram

IEC08000476 V2 EN

Figure 374: PSM Connection diagram.

19.2.3.3 Technical data

Table 806: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 - 60) V EL ±20%
EL = (90 - 250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -

19.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "" for information.

19.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM)

19.2.5.1 Introduction

The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary
currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve
inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.

962 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

19.2.5.2 Design

The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.

Basic versions:

• 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

• 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels
• 12 current channels

The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs are
selected at order.

Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current
transformers intended for protection purposes, due to limitations in
overload characteristics.

The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for analog
inputs SMAI".

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 963

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

IEC08000479 V2 EN

Figure 375: TRM connection diagram

19.2.5.3 Technical data

Table 807: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current In = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) × In

Operative range (0-100) x In

Permissive overload 4 × In cont.

100 × In for 1 s *)

Burden < 150 mVA at In = 5 A

< 20 mVA at In = 1 A

Ac voltage Vn = 120 V 0.5–288 V

Operative range (0–340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Table continues on next page

964 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fn = 60/50 Hz ±5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

19.2.6 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

(ADM)

19.2.6.1 Introduction

The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The
PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table
808. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
Table 808: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards
PC-MIP cards PMC cards
LDCM SLM
LR-LDCM OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485

19.2.6.2 Design

The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage
level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels
are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16
bit A\D converter.

Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency
and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are
reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2
kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 965

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI

PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN

Figure 376: The ADM layout

966 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.2.7 Binary input module (BIM)

19.2.7.1 Introduction

The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions,
one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used
with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be
used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in
the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive
monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.

19.2.7.2 Design

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of
the binary input is selected at order.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBI".

A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis
function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use
the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery supply
ground faults, see figure 377 The figure shows the typical operating characteristics of the
binary inputs of the four voltage levels.

The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand

disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs are
debounced by software.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 967

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

[V]

300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17

24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx99000517-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000517 V2 EN

Figure 377: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Operation

Operation uncertain

No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown
in figure 378 and 379.

968 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

[mA]
50

55 [ms]

en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN

Figure 378: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.

[mA]
50

5.5 [ms]

en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN

Figure 379: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 969

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

IEC99000503 V3 EN

Figure 380: Connection diagram

19.2.7.3 Signals
Table 809: BIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
Table continues on next page

970 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Name Type Description

BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10
BI11 BOOLEAN Binary input 11
BI12 BOOLEAN Binary input 12
BI13 BOOLEAN Binary input 13
BI14 BOOLEAN Binary input 14
BI15 BOOLEAN Binary input 15
BI16 BOOLEAN Binary input 16

19.2.7.4 Settings
Table 810: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

19.2.7.5 Monitored data

Table 811: BIM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input module status
1=Error

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 971

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.7.6 Technical data

Table 812: BIM - Binary input module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50mA max. 0.1 W/input
125 V, 50mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1–20ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously

with influencing factors within nominal range.

Table 813: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

972 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously

with influencing factors within nominal range.

19.2.8 Binary output modules (BOM)

19.2.8.1 Introduction

The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or
any signaling purpose.

19.2.8.2 Design

The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of
relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 381. This should be
considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.

The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip
and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary
contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required.

For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMBO".

Output module

ANSI_xx00000299.vsd
ANSI00000299 V1 EN

Figure 381: Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 973

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

IEC99000505 V3 EN

Figure 382: Connection diagram

19.2.8.3 Signals
Table 814: BOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
Table continues on next page

974 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Name Type Default Description

BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12
BO13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 13
BO14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 14
BO15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 15
BO16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 16
BO17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 17
BO18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 18
BO19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 19
BO20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 20
BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 21
BO22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 22
BO23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 23
BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 24

Table 815: BOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status

19.2.8.4 Settings
Table 816: BOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

19.2.8.5 Monitored data

Table 817: BOM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary output part of IOM
1=Error module status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 975

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
Table continues on next page

976 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - nary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO13VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 13 value
0=0
BO13FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 force
1=Forced
BO13 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO14VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 14 value
0=0
BO14FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 force
1=Forced
BO14 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 977

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO15VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 15 value
0=0
BO15FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 force
1=Forced
BO15 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO16VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 16 value
0=0
BO16FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 force
1=Forced
BO16 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO17VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 17 value
0=0
B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 force
1=Forced
BO17 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO18VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 18 value
0=0
BO18FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 force
1=Forced
BO18 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO19VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 19 value
0=0
BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1=Forced - Binary output 19 force
0=Normal
BO19 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 19 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO20VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 20 value
0=0
BO20FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 force
1=Forced
BO20 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO21VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 21 value
0=0
BO21FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

978 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO21 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO22VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 22 value
0=0
BO22FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 force
1=Forced
BO22 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO23VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 23 value
0=0
BO23FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 force
1=Forced
BO23 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO24VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 24 value
0=0
BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - nary output 24 force
1=Forced
BO24 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 24 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

19.2.8.6 Technical data

Table 818: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 979

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be
activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms.
48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible
with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature
rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per
BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power
dissipation.

19.2.9 Static binary output module (SOM)

19.2.9.1 Introduction

The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.

19.2.9.2 Design

The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.

The SOM consists mainly of:

• An MCU
• A CAN-driver
• 6 static relays outputs
• 6 electromechanical relay outputs
• A DC/DC converter
• Connectors interfacing
• CAN-bus to backplane CBM
• IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

The following parts are supervised:

• Interruption in relay coil

• Short circuit of relay coil
• Driver failure

980 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

IEC09000974-1-en.vsd

IEC09000974 V1 EN

Figure 383: SOM Static output principle

1MRK002802-AB-13-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN

Figure 384: Connection diagram of the static output module

19.2.9.3 Signals
Table 819: SOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 12

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 981

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Table 820: SOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Static binary output module status

19.2.9.4 Settings
Table 821: SOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

19.2.9.5 Monitored data

Table 822: SOM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Static binary output module
1=Error status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

982 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 983

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

19.2.9.6 Technical data

Table 823: SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip
Rated voltage 48 - 60 VDC 110 - 250 VDC
Number of outputs 6 6
Impedance open state ~300 kΩ ~810 kΩ
Test voltage across open contact, 1 No galvanic separation No galvanic separation
min
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 5A 5A
1.0s 10A 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load
with the maximum capacitance of 0.2
μF :
0.2s 30A 30A
1.0s 10A 10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 48V / 1A 110V / 0.4A
40ms
60V / 0.75A 125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Operating time <1ms <1ms

984 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Table 824: SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical
relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250V AC/DC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8A
1.0s 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum
capacitance of 0.2 μF:
0.2s 30A
1.0s 10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40ms 48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be
activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms.
48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible
with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature
rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per
BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power
dissipation.

19.2.10 Binary input/output module (IOM)

19.2.10.1 Introduction

The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are
needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose.
The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating
time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input
information.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 985

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.10.2 Design

The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected
contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.

Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the
disturbance immunity during normal protection trip times. This is achieved with a high
peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 378. Inputs are
debounced by software.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply
ground faults, see figure 377.

The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.

The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One
of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group
has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 385.

The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is
connected in parallel to the standard output relay.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix for
binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".

986 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN

IEC1MRK002802-AA-13 V1 EN

Figure 385: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to
rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named XB to rear
position X32, X42, and so on

The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be
used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of
the contacts.

The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary
input/output module.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 987

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

xx04000069.vsd

IEC04000069 V1 EN

Figure 386: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

19.2.10.3 Signals
Table 825: IOMIN Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8

Table 826: IOMOUT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
Table continues on next page

988 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Name Type Default Description

BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12

19.2.10.4 Settings
Table 827: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Binary input/output module in operation (On) or
Enabled not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

19.2.10.5 Monitored data

Table 828: IOMIN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input part of IOM
1=Error module status

Table 829: IOMOUT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 989

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

990 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

19.2.10.6 Technical data

Table 830: IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz
Release settable 1-30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 991

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously

with influencing factors within nominal range.

Table 831: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with
L/R>10 ms

0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be
activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms.
48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible
with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature
rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per
BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power
dissipation.

992 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Table 832: IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC
61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 250 V rms 250 V rms
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
j>0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be
activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms.
48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible
with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature
rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per
BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power
dissipation.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 993

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.11 mA input module (MIM)

19.2.11.1 Introduction

The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the –20 to +20
mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers. The
module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

19.2.11.2 Design

The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMMI".

The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter has
a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The
filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the
module.

The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.

994 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

IEC99000504 V2 EN

Figure 387: MIM connection diagram

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 995

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.11.3 Signals
Table 833: MIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Milliampere input module status
CH1 REAL Analog input 1
CH2 REAL Analog input 2
CH3 REAL Analog input 3
CH4 REAL Analog input 4
CH5 REAL Analog input 5
CH6 REAL Analog input 6

19.2.11.4 Settings
Table 834: MIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
MaxReportT 0 - 3600 s 1 1 Maximum time between reports
EnDeadBandCh1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
Enabled channel 1
DeadBandCh1 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 1
IMinCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 1
IMaxCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 1
ValueMinCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh1
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh1
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
Enabled channel 2
DeadBandCh2 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 2
IMinCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 2
IMaxCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 2
ValueMinCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh2
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh2
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh3 Disabled - - Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
Enabled channel 3
DeadBandCh3 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 3
Table continues on next page

996 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMinCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 3
IMaxCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 3
ValueMinCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh3
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh3
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh4 Disabled - - Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
Enabled channel 4
DeadBandCh4 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 4
IMinCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 4
IMaxCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 4
ValueMinCh4 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh4
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh4 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh4
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh5 Disabled - - Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
Enabled channel 5
DeadBandCh5 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 5
IMinCh5 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 5
IMaxCh5 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 5
ValueMinCh5 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh5
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh5 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh5
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh6 Disabled - - Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
Enabled channel 6
DeadBandCh6 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 6
IMinCh6 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 6
IMaxCh6 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 6
ValueMinCh6 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh6
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh6 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh6
- 10000000000.000

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 997

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.11.5 Monitored data

Table 835: MIM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Milliampere input module
1=Error status
CH1 REAL - - Analog input 1
CH2 REAL - - Analog input 2
CH3 REAL - - Analog input 3
CH4 REAL - - Analog input 4
CH5 REAL - - Analog input 5
CH6 REAL - - Analog input 6
CH1 REAL - A Service value analog input 1
CH2 REAL - A Service value analog input 2
CH3 REAL - A Service value analog input 3
CH4 REAL - A Service value analog input 4
CH5 REAL - A Service value analog input 5
CH6 REAL - A Service value analog input 6

19.2.11.6 Technical data

Table 836: MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -

Input range ±5, ±10, ±20mA -

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Power consumption -
each mA-board £2W
each mA input £ 0.1 W

19.2.12 Serial and LON communication module (SLM)

19.2.12.1 Introduction

The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical communication ports for
plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is used for serial communication
(SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one port is dedicated for LON
communication.

998 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.2.12.2 Design

The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations of optical
fiber connectors, see figure 388. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the
glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN

Figure 388: The SLM variants, component side view

1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber

Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side of
the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1 in the
lowest position.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 999

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.12.3 Technical data

Table 837: SLM – LON port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

Table 838: SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

19.2.13 Galvanic RS485 communication module

19.2.13.1 Introduction

The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The
RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop
communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control
of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop
communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal
is needed in this case.

19.2.13.2 Design

The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module.

1000 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 389) are presented in table
839:
Table 839: The arrangement for the pins

Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485– TX– Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2–
wir case) (connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
5 N.A. RX– Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high

Angle
bracket

Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6

Backplane

IEC06000517 V1 EN

Figure 389: RS485 connector

• 2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5

• Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3

• Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used
in two combinations like:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1001

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

• Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part · .

• Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV

19.2.13.3 Technical data

Table 840: Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity Range or value
Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector

19.2.14 Optical ethernet module (OEM)

19.2.14.1 Introduction

The optical fast-ethernet module is used for fast and interference-free communication of
synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 protocols. It is also used to
connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC
61850-8-1 protocol (port A, B). The module has one or two optical ports with ST
connectors.

19.2.14.2 Functionality

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to
IEC61850–8–1 have been implemented.

19.2.14.3 Design

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on
the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single channel or double
channel unit.

1002 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN

Figure 390: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

• 1: Transmitter
• 2: Receiver

19.2.14.4 Technical data

Table 841: OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 1 or 2
1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 / IEEE C37.118)
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

19.2.15 Line data communication module (LDCM)

19.2.15.1 Introduction

The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the
IEDs situated at distances <68 miles or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with
G.703 interface located on a distances <1.9 miles away. The LDCM module sends and

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1003

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI standard format is
used.

The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has
one optical port with ST connectors see figure 391.

Line data communication module LDCM

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.

Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm single
mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.

Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never
look into the laser beam.

19.2.15.2 Design

The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted
on:

• the ADM
• the NUM

ST
IO-connector

ST

IEC07000087=1=en=Original.vsd

IEC07000087 V2 EN

Figure 391: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector

1004 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

C
IEC06000393=1=en=Original.vsd

IEC06000393 V2 EN

Figure 392: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format
with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

19.2.15.3 Technical data

Table 842: Line data communication module

Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fiber Graded-index Singlemode 9/125 Singlemode 9/125 µm
multimode µm
62.5/125 µm
Peak Emission Wave
length 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Nominal 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Maximum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm
Minimum
Optical budget 13 dB (typical 22 dB (typical 26 dB (typical distance 68 mile *)
Graded-index multimode distance about 2 distance 50 mile *)
62.5/125 mm, mile *)
9 dB (typical
distance about 1
Graded-index multimode mile *)
50/125 mm

Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC

Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94 implementation **)
implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1005

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Characteristic Range or value

Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Transmission rate / Data 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
rate
Clock source Internal or derived Internal or derived Internal or derived from received
from received from received signal signal
signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation
**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94

19.2.16 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)

19.2.16.1 Introduction

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module supports
64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.

Examples of applications:

• Line differential protection

• Binary signal transfer

19.2.16.2 Design

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP Type
II format.

1006 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

C
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN

Figure 393: Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

1 4

1 8

9 15

3 2
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN

Figure 394: The X.21 LDCM module external connectors

1. Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

2. Ground pin
3. Soft ground pin, see figure 395
4. X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27) balanced
version

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1007

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

I/O

100kW 100nF

Soft ground

en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN

Figure 395: Schematic view of soft ground

Grounding

At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IIO-ground can
be tested.

Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1. Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2 directly to
the chassis.
2. No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
3. Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 394

X.21 connector
Table 843: Pinout for the X.21 communication connector

Pin number Signal

1 Shield (ground)
2 TXD A
3 Control A
4 RXD A
6 Signal timing A
8 Ground
9 TXD B
10 Control B
Table continues on next page

1008 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

11 RXD B
13 Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15 Not used

19.2.16.3 Functionality

The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64 kbit/
s.

A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data (deviation
from X.21 standard cable length).

Synchronization

The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally expecting
synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission is normally
synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a DTE. When the
signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal is low it will write data
to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control register.

Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.

When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set as a
master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal Element
Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.

The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.

19.2.16.4 Technical data

Table 844: Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity Range or value
Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 100 m

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1009

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.2.17 GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

19.2.17.1 Introduction

This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one
SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-connector
output.

19.2.17.2 Design

The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots. The
antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to eliminate
the risk of electromagnetic interference.

All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time data is
sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1μs accuracy at sampling
level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time synchronization of
another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output connector is of ST-type for
multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.

19.2.17.3 Monitored data

Table 845: SYNCHGPS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NoOfSatellites INTEGER - - Number of GPS signals from
satellites

19.2.17.4 Technical data

Table 846: GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Receiver – ±1µs relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes –
position or after power loss longer than 1 month
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer <15 minutes –
than 48 hours
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter <5 minutes –
than 48 hours

1010 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.2.18 GPS antenna

19.2.18.1 Introduction

In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with
applicable cable must be used.

19.2.18.2 Design

The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an
antenna mast. See figure 396

1 6

4 7

xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN

Figure 396: Antenna with console

where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, (2'6.7"x4'11')
4 Mounting holes about 1/5"
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1011

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose cable type and
length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.

Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the
antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with
some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the antenna
is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. The IED must
be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.

19.2.18.3 Technical data

Table 847: GPS – Antenna and cable
Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end
TNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-1μs

19.2.19 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

19.2.19.1 Introduction

The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the
IED from a station clock.

The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC 61850-9-2LE
is used.

Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.

19.2.19.2 Design

The IRIG-B module has two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a
pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated
signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for optical
pulse-width modulated signal (IRIG-B 00X).

1012 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

ST

Y2

A1
T

IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN

Figure 397: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for optical IRIG-B 00X
820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector
for IRIG-B signal input

19.2.19.3 Settings
Table 848: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

19.2.19.4 Technical data

Table 849: IRIG-B
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1013

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Quantity Rated value

Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fibre 62.5/125 μm multimode fibre
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1μs

1014 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.3 Dimensions

19.3.1 Case without rear cover

A
D

B C

IEC08000164-2-en.vsd
IEC08000164 V2 EN

Figure 398: Case without rear cover

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1015

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

K
F

G
H J

xx08000166.vsd

IEC08000166 V1 EN

Figure 399: Case without rear cover with 19” rack mounting kit

Case size A B C D E F G H J K
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 10.47 8.81 7.92 9.96 8.10 7.50 8.02 18.31 7.39 19.00
6U, 3/4 x 19” 10.47 13.23 7.92 9.96 12.52 7.50 12.44 18.31 7.39 19.00
6U, 1/1 x 19” 10.47 17.65 7.92 9.96 16.94 7.50 16.86 18.31 7.39 19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit

1016 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.3.2 Case with rear cover

A
D

B
C

IEC08000163-2-en.vsd
IEC08000163 V2 EN

Figure 400: Case with rear cover

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1017

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

K
F

G
J
H
xx08000165.vsd

IEC08000165 V1 EN

Figure 401: Case with rear cover and 19” rack mounting kit

IEC05000503-2-en.vsd
IEC05000503 V2 EN

Figure 402: Rear cover case with details

1018 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Case size A B C D E F G H J K
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 10.47 8.81 9.53 10.07 8.10 7.50 8.02 18.31 9.00 19.00
6U, 3/4 x 19” 10.47 13.23 9.53 10.07 12.52 7.50 12.4 18.31 9.00 19.00
6U, 1/1 x 19” 10.47 17.65 9.53 10.07 16.86 7.50 16.86 18.31 9.00 19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.

19.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions

A C
B

E
D

IEC08000162-2-en.vsd
IEC08000162 V2 EN

Figure 403: Flush mounting

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1019

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Cut-out dimensions (inches)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/0.04 +/0.04
6U, 1/2 x 19” 8.27 10.01 0.16–0.39 0.49
6U, 3/4 x 19” 12.69 10.01 0.16–0.39 0.49
6U, 1/1 x 19” 17.11 10.01 0.16–0.39 0.49
E = 7.42” without rear protection cover, 9.03” with rear protection cover

19.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN

Figure 404: A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6

1020 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

D
B
E

F
C
xx05000505.vsd

IEC05000505 V1 EN

Figure 405: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

Case size A B C D E F G
(inches) ±0.04 ±0.04 ±0.04 ±0.04 ±0.04 ±0.04 ±0.04
Tolerance
6U, 1/2 x 19” 8.42 10.21 9.46 7.50 1.35 0.52 0.25 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19” 12.85 10.21 13.89 7.50 1.35 0.52 0.25 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19” 17.27 10.21 18.31 7.50 1.35 0.52 0.25 diam

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1021

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions

IEC04000471-2-en.vsd
IEC04000471 V2 EN

Figure 406: Wall mounting

Case size (inches) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19” 10.50 10.52 10.74 15.36 9.57
6U, 3/4 x 19” 15.92 14.94 10.74 15.36 9.57
6U, 1/1 x 19” 20.31 19.33 10.74 15.36 9.57

1022 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.3.6 External current transformer unit

482.6 [19]

89 [3.5]

57 [2.24]

Dimension
mm [inches]
xx06000233.vsd
IEC06000233 V1 EN

Figure 407: Dimension drawing of summation current transformers

19.4 Mounting alternatives

19.4.1 Flush mounting

19.4.1.1 Overview

The flush mounting kit can be used for case sizes:

• 1/2 x 19”
• 3/4 x 19”
• 1/1 x 19”
• 1/4 x 19” (RHGS6 6U)

Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54
protection.

Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54
class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting
two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing

must be ordered when ordering the IED.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1023

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting

IEC08000161-2-en.vsd
IEC08000161 V2 EN

Figure 408: Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 - -
class. The sealing strip is factory
mounted between the case and
front plate.
2 Fastener 4 -
3 Groove - -
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2.9x9.5 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip - -
6 Panel - -

1024 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.4.2 19” panel rack mounting

19.4.2.1 Overview

All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using a suitably sized
mounting kit consisting of two mounting angles and their fastening screws.

The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19” or 3/4
x 19” either to the left or the right side of the cubicle.

A separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs or

IEDs together with RHGS cases should be selected so that the total size
equals 19”.

When mounting the mounting angles, use screws that follow the
recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1025

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting

1a

1b

IEC08000160-2-en.vsd
IEC08000160 V2 EN

Figure 409: 19” panel rack mounting details

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1a, 1b Mounting angles, can be mounted 2 -
either to the left or the right side of the
case
2 Screw 8 M4x6

1026 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.4.3 Wall mounting

19.4.3.1 Overview

All case sizes, 1/2 x 19”, 3/4 x 19”,1/1 x 19”, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to
mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.

When mounting the side plates, use screws that follow the recommended
dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication modules
with fiber connection.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1027

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting

2
3
1 4

IEC130 00266-1-en.vsd

IEC13000266 V1 EN

Figure 410: Wall mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Bushing 4 -
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 or
corresponding
4 Mounting bar 2 -
5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -

19.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with this
type of mounting. See figure 411.

1028 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 3.2 inches is required on the unhinged
side.

View from above

3
1

3.2" 2
(80 mm)

ANSI_en06000135.vsd
ANSI06000135 V1 EN

Figure 411: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover (Ordered separately)

19.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting

19.4.4.1 Overview

IED case size 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” and RHGS cases can be mounted side-by-side up to
a maximum size of 19”. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit
together with the 19” rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be
ordered separately.

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, use screws that
follow the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1029

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

19.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1

IEC04000456-2-en.vsd
IEC04000456 V2 EN

Figure 412: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

19.4.4.3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case

A 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS case (6 or 12 depending
on IED size). The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It
also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, a DC-
switch or two trip IEDs.

1030 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

1 2 1 2

1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5

6 6 6 6

7 7 7 7

8 8 8 8

IEC06000180-2-en.vsd
IEC06000180 V2 EN

Figure 413: IED (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch
module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base

19.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting

19.4.5.1 Overview

It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If
your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details
kit and the 19” panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered
separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19”.

With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is

obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs
separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see
section "Flush mounting".

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws
that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1031

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches
on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

19.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1 2

IEC06000181-2-en.vsd
IEC06000181 V2 EN

Figure 414: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19”
IED).

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

19.5 Technical data

19.5.1 Enclosure
Table 850: Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

1032 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

Table 851: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP20
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type
IP10 with ring lug terminals

Table 852: Weight

Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19” £
6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 40 lb

19.5.2 Electrical safety

Table 853: Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27

Equipment class I (protective earthed)

Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a
temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected)

19.5.3 Connection system

Table 854: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
lug terminals

Table 855: Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
lug terminals

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1033

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for

Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two adjacent
IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

19.5.4 Influencing factors

Table 856: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, +20°C -10 °C to +55°C 0.02% / °C
operate value
Relative humidity 10%-90% 10%-90% -
Operative range 0%-95%
Storage temperature - -40 °C to +70 °C -

Table 857: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01% / %
Operative range Full wave rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate ±20% of EL 0.01% / %
value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%

90-250 V DC ±20%
Interruption
interval
0–50 ms No restart
0–∞ s Correct behaviour
at power down
Restart time <300 s

Table 858: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, fn ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0% / Hz
operate value fn ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Frequency dependence for fn ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±2.0% / Hz

differential protection fn ±3.0 Hz for60 Hz

Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn ±2.0%

dependence (20% content)
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn ±6.0%
dependence for differential
protection (10% content)

1034 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 19
IED hardware

19.5.5 Type tests according to standard

Table 859: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz Oscillatory burst 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
disturbance
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
wave immunity test
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
Surge withstand capability test 2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
4.0 kV, fast transient
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms IEC 60255-26, Zone A
high energy
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Conducted common mode 15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
immunity test
Power frequency magnetic field 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
test 100 A/m, cont.
Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic field 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
test
Radiated electromagnetic field 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
disturbance
1.4-2.7 GHz
Radiated electromagnetic field 20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
disturbance 80-1000 MHz
Conducted electromagnetic field 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
disturbance
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26

Table 860: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
ANSI C37.90
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1035

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
IED hardware

Table 861: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to IEC 60068-2-14
+70°C
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40°C and IEC 60068-2-78
humidity 93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to IEC 60068-2-30
+55°C and humidity 93 to 95% (1
cycle = 24 hours)

Table 862: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 60255–26
Emissivity EN 60255–26
Low voltage directive EN 60255–27

Table 863: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3

1036 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 20
Labels

Section 20 Labels

20.1 Labels on IED

Front view of IED

2
3

6
6 5
7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1037

Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Labels

1 Product type, description and serial number

2 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated
frequency
3 Optional, customer specific information
4 Manufacturer
5 Transformer input module, rated currents and
voltages
6 Transformer designations

IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN

7 Ordering and serial number

IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN

1038 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 20
Labels

Rear view of IED

4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN

1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label

IEC06000575 V1 EN

4 Warning label

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1039

Technical manual
1040
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 21
Connection diagrams

Section 21 Connection diagrams

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part of
the product delivery.

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

Connection diagrams for Customized products

Connection diagram, 670 series 2.1 1MRK002802-AF

Connection diagrams for Configured products

Connection diagram, REB670 2.1, A31A 1MRK002804-EK

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1041

Technical manual
1042
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

Section 22 Inverse time characteristics

22.1 Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different

points in the network different time delays for the different protections are normally used.
The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated applications
current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple
application with three overcurrent protections operating in series.

IPickup IPickup IPickup

xx05000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000129 V1 EN

Figure 415: Three overcurrent protections operating in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd

IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 416: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1043

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd

IEC05000131 V1 EN

Figure 417: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and
still assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

• Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset times of the protections
• Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

1044 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A1 B1
Feeder

51 51

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000132 V1 EN

Figure 418: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall trip without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When
the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the
protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay
timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two
protections. There is a possibility that A1 will pickup before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit
breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the
fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.
The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the
timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is
stopped.

In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be
minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed
reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications:

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1045

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, picks up
and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release
function.

22.2 Principle of operation

22.2.1 Mode of operation

The function can trip in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse time mode.
For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are
available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A,
B, C pr, tr, and cr.

Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.

If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value (here internal signal
pickupValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level
used in timing calculations.

In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or
until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and the
reset time has elapsed.

For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 91.

1046 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

æ ö
ç ÷
t [s ] = ç + B ÷ × td
A
ç P ÷
çç æç ö
i
÷ -C ÷÷
è è Pickupn ø ø
EQUATION1640 V1 EN (Equation 91)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

æ P
ö
( top - B × td ) × çç æçè Pickupn
i ö
÷
ø
-C÷
÷
= A × td
è ø
EQUATION1642 V1 EN (Equation 92)

where:
top is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 93, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
ææ i ö
P
ö
òçç
ç è Pickupn ÷ø
0è
- C ÷ × dt ³ A × td
÷
ø
EQUATION1643 V1 EN (Equation 93)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1047

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

n æ æ i ( j ) öP ö
Dt × å çç
ç Pickupn ø
j =1 è è
÷ - C ÷ ³ A × td
÷
ø
EQUATION1644 V1 EN (Equation 94)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected,
that is, when

i
>1
Pickupn
EQUATION1646 V1 EN

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and
ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 419.

1048 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

Operate
time

tMin

Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN

Figure 419: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to
the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve for
measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time
value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional
inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.

The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 96:

æ ö
ç td ÷
t [s ] = ç ÷
çç 0.339 - 0.235 × Pickupn ÷÷
è i ø
EQUATION1647 V1 EN (Equation 96)

where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1049

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
ground-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The
curve is described by equation 97:

æ i ö
[ ]
t s = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è td × Pickupn ø
EQUATION1648 V1 EN (Equation 97)

where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time
curve according to the general equation 98.

æ ö
ç ÷
t [s ] = ç + B ÷ × td
A
ç P ÷
çç æç ö
i
÷ -C ÷÷
è è Pickupn ø ø
EQUATION1640 V1 EN (Equation 98)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility to
choose between three different reset time-lags.
• Instantaneous Reset
• IEC Reset
• ANSI Reset.

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.

If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops
below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.

If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the pickup current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 99.

1050 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

æ ö
ç tr
÷
t [s] = ç ÷ × td
ç æ i ö2 ÷
çç ÷ -1 ÷
è è pickupn ø ø
ANSIEQUATION1197 V1 EN (Equation 99)

where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice
of time delay characteristic.

For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are instantaneous
and IEC constant time reset.

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are
available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time.

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current
dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be
given, see equation 100:

æ ö
ç tr
÷
t [s] = ç ÷ × td
ç æ i ö pr ÷
çç ÷ - cr ÷
è è pickupn ø ø
ANSIEQUATION1198 V1 EN (Equation 100)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set
the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1051

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

22.3 Inverse characteristics

Table 864: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ td ≤ 3.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±2.0% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
æ A ö
t = ç P + B ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1651 V1 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = × td
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1652 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

1052 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

Table 865: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ td ≤ 3.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
greater
æ A ö
t = ç P ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1653 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Trip characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B ÷ × td P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of
è ø
0.001
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

TR
t = × td
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1655 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 866: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic 0.10 ≤ td ≤ 3.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = × td
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1656 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

æ
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In
I ö
÷
è td ø
EQUATION1657 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1053

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

Table 867: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
± 5.0% or ± 40 ms
whichever is greater
æ A ö
t = ç P + B ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1651 V1 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = × td
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1652 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

1054 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

Table 868: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%
or ± 40 ms whichever is
greater
æ A ö
t = ç P ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1653 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B ÷ × td P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of
è ø
0.001
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

TR
t = × td
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1655 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1055

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

Table 869: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%
or ± 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = × td
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1656 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

æ
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In
I ö
÷
è td ø
EQUATION1657 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 870: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
whichever is greater
æ A ö
t = ç P + B ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1651 V1 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = × td
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1652 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

1056 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

Table 871: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever is
greater
æ A ö
t = ç P ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1653 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Trip characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B ÷ × td P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of
è ø
0.001
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

TR
t = × td
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1655 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1057

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

Table 872: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent
and power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = × td
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1656 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

æ
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In
I ö
÷
è td ø
EQUATION1657 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 873: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
± 5.0% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
æ A ö
t = ç P + B ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1651 V1 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = × td
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1652 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

1058 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

Table 874: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
or ±40 ms whichever is
greater
æ A ö
t = ç P ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1653 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1059

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

Table 875: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of ±5.0% or ±45 ms
0.01 whichever is greater
td
t =
æ V - VPickup ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1661 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
td ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 V − VPickup 
 32 ⋅ − 0.5 
 VPickup 
EQUATION1662 V2 EN

Type C curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
td ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 V − VPickup 
 32 ⋅ − 0.5 
 VPickup 
EQUATION1663 V2 EN

Programmable curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
td × A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æ V - VPickup ö B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
çB × -C÷ of 0.01
è VPickup ø C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
EQUATION1664 V1 EN
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001

1060 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

Table 876: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of ±5.0% or ±45 ms
0.01 whichever is greater
td
t =
æ VPickup - V ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1658 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
td × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ VPickup - V ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1659 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

Programmable curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
é ù
steps of 0.001
ê ú
td × A B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
t = ê ú+D
of 0.01
ê æ VPickup - V ö ú
P
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè VPickup ø û 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
EQUATION1660 V1 EN
steps of 0.001
V = Vmeasured P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1061

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

Table 877: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of ±5.0% or ±45 ms
0.01 whichever is greater
td
t =
æ V - VPickup ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1661 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
td ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 V − VPickup 
 32 ⋅ − 0.5 
 VPickup 
EQUATION1662 V2 EN

Type C curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
td ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 V − VPickup 
 32 ⋅ − 0.5 
 VPickup 
EQUATION1663 V2 EN

Programmable curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
td × A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æ V - VPickup ö B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
çB × -C÷ of 0.01
è VPickup ø C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
EQUATION1664 V1 EN
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001

1062 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 420: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1063

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 421: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

1064 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 422: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1065

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 423: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

1066 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 424: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1067

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 425: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

1068 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 426: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1069

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 427: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

1070 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 428: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1071

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 429: IEC Inverse time characteristics

1072 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 430: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1073

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 431: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

1074 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 432: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1075

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 433: RI-type inverse time characteristics

1076 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 434: RD-type inverse time characteristics

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1077

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 435: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

1078 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 436: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1079

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 437: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

1080 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 438: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1081

Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 439: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

1082 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 23
Glossary

Section 23 Glossary

23.1 Glossary

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1083

Technical manual
Section 23 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Glossary

C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between

IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body within
the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two
twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both
directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format
for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111,
1999 / IEC60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four
twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in both
directions and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing

1084 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 23
Glossary

DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US

developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data
and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1085

Technical manual
Section 23 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Glossary

FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to

seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by
local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver
module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements
for protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial
master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on
twisted-pair or optical fiber cable

1086 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 23
Glossary

IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the
electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)
Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in
the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function. One
instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but
has a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word
"instance" is sometimes defined as an item of information that is
representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a
function in the IED is representative of a type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol
suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,
best-effort packet-switching protocol. It provides packet
routing, fragmentation and reassembly through the data link
layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level
IP20- Protected against solid foreign objects of 12.5mm
diameter and greater.
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level IP40-
Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level
IP54-Dust-protected, protected against splashing water.
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1087

Technical manual
Section 23 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Glossary

LDCM Line differential communication module

LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally
developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical Ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/
pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it should not
have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach

1088 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI

Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 23
Glossary

POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip

Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in
point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SLM Serial communication module.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant
impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1089

Technical manual
Section 23 1MRK 505 338-UUS A
Glossary

instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required

accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave
protocol for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de
facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working
and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed gound-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and
voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for further
signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching when
the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
1090 Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI
Technical manual
1MRK 505 338-UUS A Section 23
Glossary

set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but perhaps it should
have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time
1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit,
the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the
Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane
and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet
stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the
residual or the ground-fault current
3VO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the
residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

Busbar protection REB670 2.1 ANSI 1091

Technical manual
1092
1093
Contact us
For more information please contact:
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Note:
1MRK 505 338-UUS
We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify the
contents of this document without prior notice. ABB AB does
not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors or
possible lack of information in this document.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter
and illustrations contained herein. Any reproduction,
disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents – in whole
or in part – is forbidden without prior written consent of ABB AB.
© Copyright 2016 ABB.
All rights reserved.
Scan this QR code to visit our website